About this handbook

This handbook forms part of the Owner literature supplied with your new vehicle. Left-hand drive
and right-hand drive conditions may be shown in the graphics and where information is specific to
a particular country, it is indicated as such.
The Quick start section is designed to rapidly familiarise the driver with the initial set up and also
explain some of the unique features. Please take the time to study the operating instructions with
your vehicle as soon as you can.

Important
The information contained in this handbook covers all vehicle derivatives and optional equipment.
Some of the options may not be fitted to your vehicle unless they formed part of the original vehicle
specification. Therefore some parts of this handbook may not apply to your vehicle. Furthermore,
due to printing cycles, it may include descriptions of options before they become generally
available.
The options, hardware and software in your vehicle are from the available specifications for the
market in which the vehicle was intended for sale. If your vehicle is to be used in another
geographical area you may have to modify the vehicle specification to suit local conditions. Land
Rover is not responsible for the cost of any modifications.

OWNER’S HANDBOOK The information contained in this publication was correct when it went to print. Vehicle design
changes may have been made after this handbook was printed. When this occurs a handbook
supplement is added to the literature pack. Subsequent updates can be viewed on the Land Rover
Internet site at; www.landrover.com.
In the interest of development, the right is reserved to change specifications, design or equipment
at any time without notice and without incurring any obligations. This publication, or part thereof,
may not be reproduced nor translated without our approval. Errors and omissions excepted.

© Land Rover 2007

All rights reserved.
Published by Land Rover Technical Communications.

Publication Part No. LRL 10 02 53 802

2
 Contents
Quick start
REMOTE CONTROL .......................................... 9
CENTRAL LOCKING ........................................ 10
TAILGATE ....................................................... 10
BONNET .......................................................... 11
POWER OPERATED SEAT ADJUSTMENT ....... 11
DRIVING POSITION MEMORY ........................ 12
MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT ........................ 12
WINDOWS AND DOOR MIRRORS .................. 13
DOOR MIRROR ADJUSTMENT ....................... 13
POWER FOLD MIRRORS ................................ 13
STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT ............... 14
OVERHEAD CONSOLE .................................... 15
SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS .......... 16
CHILD SEATS.................................................. 16
PASSENGER AIRBAG DEACTIVATION ............ 16
HEATING AND VENTILATION.......................... 17
HEATED WINDSCREEN AND REAR WINDOW 19
SEAT HEATERS............................................... 19
FACIA .............................................................. 20
INSTRUMENT PACK ....................................... 22
WARNING INDICATORS (ATTENTION) ........... 23
WARNING INDICATORS (INFORMATION) ...... 24
WINDSCREEN WIPER AND WASHER ............. 24
DIRECTION INDICATORS AND HEADLAMP
HIGH BEAM .................................................... 25
EXTERIOR LAMPS MASTER SWITCH............. 25
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB) ................. 26
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION......................... 26
COMMANDSHIFT ™ ........................................ 27
TRANSFER GEARBOX ..................................... 27
HILL DESCENT CONTROL (HDC).................... 28
AIR SUSPENSION ........................................... 28
TERRAIN RESPONSE SYSTEM ....................... 29
CRUISE CONTROL .......................................... 30
AUDIO SYSTEMS............................................ 30
CD OPERATION .............................................. 32
TELEPHONE - BLUETOOTH SYSTEM.............. 33
Filling station information
FUEL FILLER FLAP.......................................... 35
REFUELLING................................................... 35
TYRE PRESSURES.......................................... 36
ENGINE OIL SPECIFICATION .......................... 36
ENGINE COOLANT SPECIFICATION ................ 36
3 4
Introduction
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY ...................................
LABEL LOCATIONS.........................................
HEALTH AND SAFETY ....................................
DATA RECORDING .........................................
DISABILITY MODIFICATIONS.........................
PARTS AND ACCESSORIES............................
Keys and remote controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION............................
PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE CONTROL .....
GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO
FREQUENCIES ................................................
USING THE KEY..............................................
Locks
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING ........................... 45
Engine immobiliser
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION............................ 48
CODED KEYS.................................................. 48
Alarm
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION............................
ARMING THE ALARM.....................................
SWITCHING OFF THE ALARM ........................
TILT SENSOR .................................................
PANIC ALARM................................................
Seats
SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION ............
MANUAL SEATS .............................................
ELECTRIC SEATS ...........................................
HEAD RESTRAINTS........................................
REAR SEATS ..................................................
HEATED SEATS ..............................................
Seat belts
GENERAL INFORMATION ...............................
SEAT BELT REMINDER ..................................
FASTENING THE SEAT BELTS ........................
SEAT BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT ................
USING SEAT BELTS DURING PREGNANCY....
Contents
Supplementary restraints system Wipers and washers
37 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION............................ 68 WINDSCREEN WIPERS................................. 103
37 SIDE AIRBAGS ............................................... 71 RAIN SENSOR............................................... 104
38 CURTAIN AIRBAGS ........................................ 71 WINDSCREEN WASHERS ............................. 104
39 DISABLING THE PASSENGER AIRBAG........... 71 REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHERS ...... 105
40 AIRBAG WARNING LAMP .............................. 73 ADJUSTING THE WINDSCREEN WASHER
40 AIRBAG SERVICE INFORMATION................... 74 JETS.............................................................. 106
HEADLAMP WASHERS ................................. 106
Child safety CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES ................... 106
42 CHILD SEATS ................................................. 75 CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES .................. 106
42 CHILD SEAT POSITIONING ............................ 77
ISOFIX ANCHOR POINTS................................ 79 Windows and mirrors
44 BOOSTER CUSHIONS..................................... 81 ELECTRIC WINDOWS ................................... 108
44 CHILD SAFETY LOCKS ................................... 81 EXTERIOR MIRRORS.................................... 109
ELECTRIC EXTERIOR MIRRORS................... 110
Steering wheel INTERIOR MIRROR....................................... 112
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL .............. 82
HORN ............................................................. 83 Instruments
AUDIO CONTROL ........................................... 83 INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW................. 113
VOICE CONTROL ............................................ 84 GAUGES ........................................................ 114
CRUISE CONTROL.......................................... 84
Information displays
Lighting TRIP COMPUTER .......................................... 115
49 GENERAL INFORMATION ............................... 85 PERSONALISED SETTINGS........................... 116
49 LIGHTING CONTROL ...................................... 86 INFORMATION MESSAGES........................... 117
51 FRONT FOG LAMPS........................................ 87
51 REAR FOG LAMPS.......................................... 87 Climate control
51 ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS....................... 88 AIR VENTS .................................................... 119
HEADLAMP LEVELLING ................................. 88 MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL....................... 121
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS...................... 89 AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL ................. 123
52 ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROLS..... 126
53 SYSTEM (AFS) ............................................... 89 HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS ............. 126
54 DIRECTION INDICATORS ............................... 91 AUXILIARY HEATER...................................... 127
56 INTERIOR LAMPS .......................................... 92 ELECTRIC SUNROOF..................................... 127
57 REMOVING A HEADLAMP .............................. 93
62 REMOVING A REAR LAMP ............................. 94
CHANGING A BULB ........................................ 95
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART...................... 102
63
65
65
66
67
 Contents
Convenience features
SUN VISORS................................................. 129
SUN BLINDS ................................................. 129
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER ............... 129
CLOCK .......................................................... 130
CIGAR LIGHTER............................................ 132
ASHTRAY...................................................... 132
AUXILIARY POWER SOCKETS...................... 133
CUP HOLDERS.............................................. 134
CENTRE CONSOLE........................................ 135
COOL BOX .................................................... 136
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS ........................ 137
MEMORY FUNCTION .................................... 138
Starting the engine
GENERAL INFORMATION ............................. 139
STARTER SWITCH........................................ 139
STEERING WHEEL LOCK .............................. 139
STARTING THE ENGINE................................ 140
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF) ........... 141
Transmission
MANUAL TRANSMISSION ............................ 142
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION....................... 142
TRANSFER GEARBOX ................................... 146
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 150
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ABS..................... 152
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB) ............... 153
Parking aid
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 158
USING THE PARKING AID ............................ 158
Driving hints
RUNNING-IN................................................. 160
GENERAL DRIVING POINTS ......................... 160
REDUCED ENGINE PERFORMANCE.............. 162
ECONOMICAL DRIVING ................................ 162
Cruise control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 163
USING CRUISE CONTROL ............................ 163
5 6
Stability control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION.......................... 165
USING STABILITY CONTROL ....................... 165
Traction control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION.......................... 166
Hill descent control (HDC)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION.......................... 167
USING HDC .................................................. 167
Terrain Response
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION.......................... 170
USING TERRAIN RESPONSE........................ 170
Air suspension
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION.......................... 176
ADJUSTING THE SUSPENSION.................... 177
AIR SUSPENSION MESSAGES ..................... 181
Fuel and refuelling
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS................................ 183
FUEL QUALITY ............................................. 183
ALTERNATIVE FUELS FOR PETROL
ENGINES ...................................................... 184
DIESEL ENGINED VEHICLES ........................ 185
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL ............................... 186
FUEL FILLER FLAP ....................................... 186
REFUELLING ................................................ 187
FUEL CUT-OFF.............................................. 188
CATALYTIC CONVERTER.............................. 188
FUEL CONSUMPTION................................... 189
Load carrying
GENERAL INFORMATION ............................. 190
LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTS ........................ 190
REAR LOADSPACE HATCHES ...................... 190
LUGGAGE COVERS....................................... 190
Towing
TOWING A TRAILER..................................... 193
LEVELLING................................................... 198
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS...................... 198
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS ........... 199
DETACHABLE TOW BALL ............................. 200
TOW BALL STOWAGE .................................. 202
Contents
Vehicle care Vehicle recovery
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR ........................... 203 TOWING POINTS........................................... 264
CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS .................. 205 LASHING POINTS ......................................... 266
CLEANING THE INTERIOR............................ 205 TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE..................... 266
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE............ 206 TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS... 267
Maintenance Vehicle identification
GENERAL INFORMATION ............................. 207 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ... 268
OPENING AND CLOSING THE BONNET ........ 209 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE................. 268
ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW........... 210 VEHICLE BUILD DATE PLATE ....................... 268
UNDER BONNET COVERS ............................ 212
ENGINE OIL CHECK ...................................... 212 Technical specifications
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK............................ 213 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS....................... 269
BRAKE FLUID CHECK ................................... 215
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK ................ 216 Type approvals
WASHER FLUID CHECK................................ 217 TYPE APPROVALS ........................................ 275
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................... 218
Audio introduction
Vehicle battery RADIO RECEPTION ....................................... 285
BATTERY WARNING SYMBOLS ................... 220
BATTERY CARE ............................................ 220 Audio unit overview
USING BOOSTER CABLES............................ 221 AUDIO UNIT OVERVIEW ............................... 286
CHARGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY............. 223
CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY............. 224 Audio unit operation
REFITTING THE VEHICLE BATTERY ............. 225 ON/OFF CONTROL......................................... 288
VOLUME CONTROL....................................... 288
Wheels and tyres BASS/TREBLE CONTROL .............................. 291
GENERAL INFORMATION ............................. 226 BALANCE/FADE CONTROL............................ 294
TOOL KIT ...................................................... 227 STATION PRESET BUTTONS......................... 294
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL......................... 228 WAVEBAND BUTTON .................................... 295
TYRE CARE................................................... 241 AUTOSTORE CONTROL................................. 295
USING WINTER TYRES ................................ 246 TRAFFIC INFORMATION CONTROL............... 296
USING SNOW CHAINS ................................. 246
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM.... 247 Audio unit menus
TYRE GLOSSARY ......................................... 251 RADIO DATA SYSTEM (RDS)........................ 297
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................... 252 NEWS BROADCASTS .................................... 297
PRIORITY PROGRAMME TYPE (PTY)........... 298
Fuses
FUSE BOX LOCATIONS................................. 253 Audio unit clock and date displays
CHANGING A FUSE....................................... 255 SETTING THE CLOCK AND DATE ON THE
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART ...................... 256 AUDIO UNIT .................................................. 300
Status after a collision
DRIVING AFTER A COLLISION ..................... 262
INSPECTING SAFETY SYSTEM
COMPONENTS.............................................. 263
 Contents
Compact disc player
LOADING COMPACT DISCS.......................... 301
EJECTING COMPACT DISCS......................... 303
EJECTING MULTIPLE COMPACT DISCS ....... 303
COMPACT DISC SELECTION......................... 304
COMPACT DISC PLAYBACK ......................... 305
TRACK SELECTION ....................................... 306
COMPACT DISC PAUSE ................................ 306
FAST FORWARD/REVERSE........................... 306
COMPACT DISC FUNCTION MENU ............... 307
SHUFFLE/RANDOM....................................... 307
REPEAT COMPACT DISC TRACKS................ 308
COMPACT DISC TRACK SCANNING ............. 308
MP3 FILE PLAYBACK.................................... 309

Rear passenger controls

REAR SEAT CONTROLS................................ 310
HEADPHONES............................................... 311

Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket

AUXILIARY INPUT (AUX IN) SOCKET ........... 312

Telephone
GENERAL INFORMATION ............................. 314
TELEPHONE CONTROLS............................... 316
BLUETOOTH SETUP...................................... 318
TELEPHONE SETUP ...................................... 319
USING THE TELEPHONE............................... 320
PHONEBOOK................................................. 324
TELEPHONE VOICE CONTROL ...................... 327

Voice control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 336
USING VOICE CONTROL............................... 336
AUDIO UNIT COMMANDS............................. 340
NOTEPAD COMMANDS ................................ 345

Television
GENERAL INFORMATION ............................. 346
TELEVISION CONTROLS............................... 346
USING THE TELEVISION............................... 347
TELEVISION SETUP ...................................... 351

7 8
 Filling station information Filling station information
Filling station information

FUEL FILLER FLAP When delivery is complete, withdraw the nozzle TYRE PRESSURES ENGINE OIL SPECIFICATION
and replace the filler cap. Turn the cap Air pressure naturally increases in warm tyres;
Fuel filler flap location clockwise until it clicks three times, and close Model Specification
if it is necessary to check the tyres when they
A small arrow on the fuel gauge the fuel filler flap. are warm (after the vehicle has been driven for
E83705
Diesel vehicles SAE 5W-30 meeting
indicates which side the fuel filler Fuel tank capacity a while), you should expect the pressures to specification
flap is located. have increased by up to 30 - 40 kPa (0.3- 0.4
x Petrol engine - 86 litres (19 gallons). WSS-M2C913-B only
Fuel filler flap opening x Diesel engine - 82 litres (18.5 gallons). bar) (4 - 6 lbf/in²). In this circumstance, Do not Petrol vehicles WSS-M2C913-B ¹
let air out of the tyres in order to match the
Fuel specification recommended cold tyre pressures. See TYRE
¹ If you are unable to find an oil that meets the
CARE (page 241).
CAUTIONS specification defined by WSS-M2C913-B, you
This vehicle is not suitable for use with Tyre pressure labels must use an SAE 5W-30 oil meeting
fuels containing more than 10% Ethanol. The correct tyre pressures are shown on a label specification ACEA:A3/B3. See ENGINE OIL
Do not use E85 fuels (85% Ethanol content). attached to the driver’s door CHECK (page 212).
Equipment necessary for the use of fuels LAND ROVER RECOMMENDS
containing more than 10% Ethanol is not fitted
to this vehicle. If E85 fuels are used, serious
MAX.
DISCOVERY

engine and fuel system damage will occur. XXX/XXRXX XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX
E83706 XXX/XXRXX (kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)
XXX/XXRXX
The maximum allowable Bio-diesel mix XXX/XXRXX XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX
(kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)
L7MTA

Press and release the centre of the left edge of is 5%, meeting EN 590 specification. MAX. XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX
TXXX/XXRXX
(kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)
the fuel filler flap (where arrowed) to open. XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX
The correct fuel specification for your vehicle is (kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)
RTC500XXX

The fuel flap has a spring loaded release, do not
force it open.
REFUELLING
E83707
The filler cap is secured to the vehicle by a
strap, and a holder is provided on the flap to
locate the cap during refuelling.
Insert the pump nozzle into the filler neck,
pushing aside the spring-loaded flap.
shown on the inside of the fuel filler flap. See
FUEL QUALITY (page 183).
Incorrect fuelling
CAUTION
If the fuel tank is accidentally filled with
the wrong type of fuel, do not start the
engine. It is essential that you seek qualified
assistance.
ENGINE COOLANT SPECIFICATION
Top-up to the upper level indicator mark
located above the COLD FILL RANGE text, on
A B the side of the expansion tank. Use only a 50%
mix of water and Castrol SF antifreeze. See
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK (page 213).
E80376
A. Left-hand drive vehicle
B. Right-hand drive vehicle
Temporary spare wheel
The tyre pressure in the temporary spare
wheel/tyre should be maintained at 420 kPa
(4.2 bar/60 lbf/in²) for all loading conditions.

35 36
 Introduction
Introduction
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
Warnings
WARNING
Safety warnings in this format are
included in this handbook. They
indicate either a procedure which must be
followed precisely, or information that should
be considered with great care in order to avoid
the possibility of personal injury.
Cautions
CAUTION
Cautions in this format are included in
this handbook. They indicate either a
procedure which must be followed precisely,
or information that should be considered with
great care in order to avoid the possibility of
damage to your vehicle.
Symbols
This recycling symbol identifies
those items that must be disposed
of safely in order to prevent
unnecessary damage to the environment.
This symbol identifies those
features that can be adjusted,
disabled or enabled by your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
LABEL LOCATIONS
Warning labels attached to your
vehicle bearing this symbol mean:
E83651
Do not touch or adjust components
until you have read the relevant
instructions in the handbook.
Labels showing this symbol
indicate that the ignition system
E83652
utilises very high voltages. Do not
touch any ignition components
while the starter switch is turned on.
37
Warning labels
Labels are attached to your vehicle at several
positions. These are applied to draw your
attention to important subjects, e.g. tyre
pressures, tow bar use, airbags, roll-over risk,
engine compartment hazards, etc.
Additional information labels may also be
found at these locations:
8 features are used safely. Using the index at the
6 7
5 5
4 4
3
2 2
E89653 1 all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt
1. Bonnet locking platform - Air conditioning
label, Vehicle Identification Number label
(China).
2. Top face of battery - Battery warning
symbols.
3. Windscreen lower left side - Vehicle
identification number.
4. End of facia (passenger side) - Passenger
airbag label.
Introduction
5. Sun visor - Airbag label. Vehicle handling
warning label.
6. Right hand B pillar - Tyre pressure/loading
label. Airbag warning label. Disposal
information.
7. Left hand B pillar - Airbag warning label,
Vehicle Identification Number label.
8. Rear of fuel filler cap - Fuel specification
label.
It is important that you are familiar with these
subjects to ensure that your vehicle and its
back of this handbook, refer to the relevant
topic for more information.
HEALTH AND SAFETY
WARNINGS
Your vehicle has a higher ground
clearance and hence, a higher centre of
gravity than ordinary passenger cars, to
enable the vehicle to perform in a wide variety
of off-road applications. An advantage of the
higher ground clearance is a better view of the
road allowing you to anticipate problems.
The vehicle is not designed for
cornering at the same speed as
conventional passenger cars any more than a
low-slung sports car is designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at
manoeuvres. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate the vehicle correctly
may result in loss of control or vehicle
roll-over.
The vehicle should not be parked over
long dry grass or other combustible
material, particularly during dry weather. Heat
generated by the exhaust and emission control
system may be sufficient to start a fire.
38
WARNINGS
Before exiting the vehicle ensure that P
(park) is selected and the park brake
applied. When exiting the vehicle ensure that
the remote control is removed from the
vehicle.
Vehicle stability
WARNINGS
Utility vehicles have a significant higher
roll-over rate than other types of
vehicle. Since these vehicles are designed to
be operated off-road, they have a higher
ground clearance and hence a higher centre of
gravity. Such a feature has been associated
with an increased risk of vehicle roll-over.
Another factor shown to significantly
increase roll-over risk is unauthorised
vehicle modifications such as fitting incorrect
specification tyres, oversized tyres, body
lifting, incorrect springs/dampers, incorrect
vehicle loading/trailer towing.
However, on-road crash data also
indicates that driver behaviour is a
greater factor than a high centre of gravity in
determining a vehicle’s overall roll-over rate.
The single most effective driver behaviour that
can reduce the risk of injury or death in all
crashes including roll-over is to ALWAYS
WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT and to properly
restrain all child passengers in the rear seat in
an appropriate child safety seat. In a roll-over
crash, an unbelted person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
 Introduction
WARNINGS
Many vehicle roll-overs occur when a
driver attempts to bring a vehicle back
onto the road after some or all of the wheels
drift onto the shoulder of the road, especially
when the shoulder is unpaved. If you find
yourself in such a situation, do not initiate any
sharp or abrupt steering and/or braking
manoeuvres to re-enter the roadway. Instead,
let the vehicle slow down as much as is safely
possible before attempting to re-enter the
roadway and keep your wheels as straight as
possible while re-entering the roadway.
In a roll-over crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than a
person wearing a seat belt.
DATA RECORDING
Service data recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing diagnostic
information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or
status of various systems and modules in the
vehicle such as engine, throttle, steering or
brakes. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Land Rover and service
and repair facilities may access vehicle
diagnostic information through a direct
connection to your vehicle.
. enforcement, could combine the EDR data with
39
Event data recording
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle's systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
x How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
x Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
x How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
x How fast the vehicle was travelling.
x Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
Note: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no
data are recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Introduction
Land Rover do not access event data recorder
information without obtaining consent, unless
pursuant to court order or where required by
law enforcement, other government authorities
or third parties acting with lawful authority.
Other parties may seek to access the
information independently of Land Rover.
DISABILITY MODIFICATIONS
Occupants with disabilities which may require
modification of the vehicle must contact a Land
Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer before any
modifications are made.
PARTS AND ACCESSORIES
WARNINGS
Do not fit non-approved parts and
accessories or carry out non-approved
alterations or conversions. It may be
dangerous and could affect the safety of the
vehicle and occupants. Also, the terms and
conditions of the vehicle warranty may be
invalidated.
Land Rover will not accept any liability
for death, personal injury or damage to
property which may occur as a direct result of
fitment on non-approved accessories or the
carrying out of non-approved conversions to
Land Rover vehicles.
Land Rover strongly advise against
making any modifications to the
suspension or steering system. This could
seriously affect the handling and stability of
the vehicle leading to loss of control or
roll-over.
40
The vehicle has been designed, built and tested
to cope with a variety of off-road driving
conditions, some of which can place the
severest possible demands on control systems
and components. As such, fitting replacement
parts and accessories that have been
developed and tested to the same stringent
standards as the original components will
safeguard the continued reliability, safety and
performance of your vehicle.
To augment the vehicle's already impressive
performance, a comprehensive range of Land
Rover approved spare parts and accessories is
available, enabling the vehicle to fulfil a wide
variety of roles, and enhancing and protecting
the vehicle in the many tasks to which it can be
applied.
Land Rover parts are the only parts built to
original equipment specifications and
approved by Land Rover designers; this means
that every single part and accessory has been
rigorously tested by the same engineering
team that designed and built the vehicle and
can therefore be guaranteed for twelve months
with unlimited mileage.
A full list and description of all accessories is
available from your Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
Electrical equipment
WARNING
It is extremely hazardous to fit or
replace parts or accessories, the
installation of which requires the dismantling
of, or addition to, either the electrical or fuel
systems.
Always consult your Dealer/ Authorised
Repairer before fitting any accessory.
Fitting inferior quality parts or accessories,
may be dangerous and could invalidate the
vehicle warranty.
 Introduction
Always consult your Dealer/Authorised
Repairer for advice regarding the approval,
suitability, installation and use of any parts or
accessories before fitting.
Airbag system
WARNING
The components that make up the
airbag system are sensitive to electrical
or physical interference, either of which could
easily damage the system and cause
inadvertent operation or a malfunction of the
airbag module.
To prevent malfunction of the airbag system
always consult your Dealer/Authorised
Repairer before fitting any of the following:
x Electronic equipment such as a mobile
phone, two-way radio or in-car
entertainment system.
x Accessories attached to the front of the
vehicle.
x Any modification to the front of the vehicle.
x Any modification involving the removal or
repair of any wiring or component in the
vicinity of any of the airbag system
components, including the steering wheel,
steering column, instrument or facia
panels.
x Any modification to the facia panels or
steering wheel.
After-sales service
After Sales Parts service is of paramount
importance to us.With worldwide franchised
representation, Land Rover is able to support
your vehicle wherever you go.
Travelling abroad
In certain countries, it is a legal requirement to
fit parts made to the vehicle manufacturers'
specification.
41
Owners should ensure that any parts or
accessories fitted to the vehicle while travelling
abroad will also conform to the legal
requirements of their own country when they
return home.
Keys and remote controls
Keys and remote controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
E81023
You have been supplied with two remote
controls, with integral keys, to operate all the
vehicle’s locks.
The operation of all buttons on all remote
controls is inhibited when a key is in the starter
switch.
Note: Interference from other radio equipment,
operating on a similar frequency may affect the
remote control. If this happens, operate the
remote control as close as possible to the
vehicle or use the key.
Note: If the remote control fails to work even
when close to the vehicle, it may not be
synchronised with the system. Start and run
the engine for six minutes to synchronise. If
the remote control still fails to operate, unlock
the vehicle manually. See USING THE KEY
(page 44).
Remote control battery
CAUTION
The remote control contains delicate
electronic circuits and must be protected
from impact, water damage, high
temperatures and humidity, direct sunlight
and the effects of solvents, waxes and abrasive
cleaners.
42
The battery is rechargeable. If the battery needs
recharging the following will occur:
x KEY BATTERY LOW will be displayed in the
main message centre.
x You will notice a gradual deterioration in
range and performance.
To recharge the battery, insert the key in the
starter switch and start the engine.
PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE
CONTROL
The Land Rover button on the remote control
can be programmed to operate any one of the
following functions:
x Panic alarm.
x Headlamp courtesy delay.
x Air suspension control.
The currently-programmed feature will be
activated when the reprogramming sequence
is started.
The button is disabled when the key is in the
ignition switch.
Panic alarm
2
E80563 3
Press and hold the Land Rover button and
press the hazard warning switch. A chime will
confirm the feature is programmed.
The alarm will sound and the hazard warning
lamps will flash when the button is pressed.
 Keys and remote controls
Press the lock or unlock buttons or insert the
key in the ignition switch, to switch off the
alarm.
Headlamp courtesy delay
E80564
Press and hold the Land Rover button and flash
the headlamps. A chime will confirm
successful programming.
A short press of the Land Rover button will turn
on the headlamps for the length of time
specified in Settings. See TRIP COMPUTER
(page 115).
A second press of the button after three
seconds, will deactivate the lamps.
Air suspension control
E80565
Press and hold the Land Rover button and
press the suspension raise/lower switch. A
chime will confirm the feature is programmed.
Programming of this function must be done
within one minute of switching off the engine.
Before attempting to raise or lower the
suspension, turn on the hazard warning lamps
and close all the doors.
43
To raise the suspension, press and hold the
Land Rover button and the lock button.
To lower the suspension, press and hold the
Land Rover button and the unlock button.
If any button is released during the raising or
lowering, all movement will stop, until the
buttons are pressed again.
Initially the height will change slowly, but will
increase after three seconds.
While the height is changing, a symbol on the
raise/lower switch will be lit, according to the
direction of movement. See ADJUSTING THE
SUSPENSION (page 177).
If the suspension is not set to On-road height,
all movement will stop when On-road height is
reached. Release the buttons and press again,
to continue. See ADJUSTING THE
SUSPENSION (page 177).
Single-point entry
This feature enables the driver's door to be
unlocked, while leaving the other doors locked.
Single-point entry can be disabled on individual
remote control keys, by pressing and holding
the lock and unlock buttons for three seconds.
All doors will now unlock with a single press.
Repeating the procedure above will re-enable
single point entry.
Each time single-point entry is enabled or
disabled, the vehicle will lock then unlock into
the selected mode.
Keys and remote controls
GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO
FREQUENCIES
Note: The radio frequency used by your remote
control may be used by other devices. For
example, amateur radios, medical equipment,
wireless head phones or other remote control
devices. This may cause the frequency to be
jammed and prevent your remote control from 2
operating correctly.
Environmental conditions can affect the
operation of remote controls, and the operating
range may vary considerably depending on the 1
vehicle's location.
USING THE KEY
Emergency locking and unlocking
Under a removable cap on the left front door
outer handle, there is an emergency-use door
lock.
3
E91959
1. Insert the key fully into the slot under the
cap and turn clockwise to release the
forward edge of the cap.
2. Remove the cap and withdraw the key.
3. Insert the key into the emergency lock, and
turn counterclockwise to unlock.
If the alarm is armed, it will sound when the
door is unlocked. Insert the key in the starter
switch to stop the alarm.
To lock the vehicle in an emergency, reverse
the steps above.
44
 Locks Locks
Locks

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
To operate, the remote control must be within
range of the vehicle when you press a button.
Note: If the remote control fails to work, even
when close to the vehicle, it may not be
synchronised with the system. Unlock the
vehicle manually. See USING THE KEY
(page 44).To resynchronise the remote
control, start and run the engine for six
minutes.
Note: If a key is in the starter switch, the
vehicle will not respond to remote control
commands.
Note: If any door or the tailgate is unlocked 10
times within a short period, the latch is
disabled for approximately one minute.
Superlocking
WARNING
Never superlock the vehicle with
children or pets inside. In the event of
an emergency they would not be able to
escape and the emergency services would be
unable to release them quickly. Also, any
movement from within the vehicle would
activate the interior space protection alarm.
Superlocking is activated by one press of the
lock button on the remote control.
When the vehicle is superlocked, the doors can
only be opened (from inside or outside of the
vehicle) with the correct key or remote control.
The interior door handles are immobilised.
Locking with the remote control
Remove the key from the starter switch and
shut all doors, the bonnet and the tailgate.
1 If the vehicle is involved in a collision which
2 three flashes of the hazard warning lamps, with
3 later.
4 aperture (other than the bonnet) is open.
E80759
1. Key release button
2. Lock button-Press to superlock all doors
and to activate the perimetric alarm, the
interior space protection and the tilt
sensor.-Press twice within three seconds
to lock all doors and activate the
perimetric alarm, but not activate interior
space protection or tilt sensor.-The
direction indicator lamps will flash three
times.
3. Unlock button-Press once to disarm the
alarm and unlock the driver’s door. Press
again to unlock the remaining doors.-In
either case, the interior lamps illuminate
and the direction indicators flash once.
4. Land Rover button. See PROGRAMMING
THE REMOTE CONTROL (page 42).
Partial locking
If an aperture (door, bonnet or tailgate) is not
fully closed when the remote control lock
button is pressed, the horn will sound briefly to
signal that an aperture is still open. The alarm
will remain disarmed, but all of the closed
apertures will lock.
As soon as the open aperture is closed, the
system will automatically arm, signalled by
interior space protection activating 30 seconds
Note: The vehicle will not superlock if an
Master lock and unlock switches
1 2
E80760
1. Press the unlock switch to unlock all the
doors. If the vehicle is superlocked, the
switch is inhibited.
2. Press the lock switch to lock all the doors.
Speed-related locking
This feature locks all the doors automatically
when the vehicle speed exceeds 8 km/h (5
mph).
Speed related locking can be disabled. See
TRIP COMPUTER (page 115).
Note: Pressing the master lock or unlock
switch will override the speed locking function
for the journey.
Automatic re-lock
If the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
control and a door, the tailgate or the bonnet is
not opened within one minute, the vehicle will
re-lock and the alarm will re-arm.
Automatic unlocking
causes a restraints device to deploy, all door
locks will automatically be unlocked, the
hazard warning lamps will flash and the interior
lamps will illuminate.
Interior door handles and door locking
levers
E80762
From inside the vehicle, each door can be
individually locked by depressing the
appropriate lever (arrowed).
To open and unlock a front door, pull the door
handle.
To open a rear door, first return the locking
lever to its unlocked position, then pull the
door handle.
When the master lock or unlock switch is used,
or speed-related locking is activated, all doors
lock automatically.

45 46
 Locks Engine immobiliser
Engine immobiliser

Opening the tailgate PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Your vehicle is fitted with an engine
immobiliser. The engine is immobilised
automatically five seconds after the key is
removed from the starter switch.
Note: The engine will be re-mobilised
automatically whenever the key is inserted into
the starter switch. When this happens, the
anti-theft alarm indicator illuminates briefly.

CODED KEYS
Note: A replacement remote control can only
be obtained from your Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer. The Dealer will
require proof of ownership.
Notify your Dealer immediately if a remote
control is lost or stolen.

E80763

Upper tailgate
Unlock the vehicle and press the touch pad on
the underside of the exterior handle and then
pull up.
Lower tailgate
With the upper tailgate open, press the touch
pad on the lower tailgate waist moulding.
Door open warning indicator
Illuminates when the tailgate or one
of the vehicle's doors is open. On
vehicles with a message centre, the
message DRIVER'S DOOR OPEN is displayed
when only the driver's door is open.

47 48
 Alarm
Alarm
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
E81206
The anti-theft alarm system has a number of
additional security features, some of which are
selectable options and some are standard
features of the vehicle.
To ensure maximum security and convenience,
you are strongly advised to read this section
and gain a full understanding of the features
available.
Vehicle security
The security system fitted to your vehicle is
Thatcham category one approved and meets
European regulation 97 and directive 95/56/EC.
Battery-backed sounder
In some markets a separate, battery-backed
sounder is fitted. This device will sound if the
alarm is activated, or if the vehicle battery or
the sounder are disconnected.
49
Alarm
ARMING THE ALARM Interior space protection Anti-theft alarm indicator
Interior space protection is activated whenever
Perimetric alarm
the vehicle is superlocked.
This feature is activated automatically
whenever the vehicle is locked using the
remote control and protects the doors, bonnet
and tailgate.
If any of these apertures are opened, or if an
unknown key is inserted into the starter switch,
the alarm will be triggered.
When the perimetric alarm is activated, the
E80560
direction indicators will flash three times, and
the anti-theft alarm indicator will flash. The indicator provides information about the
Partial arming status of the alarm and immobiliser systems,
as follows:
If an aperture (door, bonnet or tailgate) is not
fully closed when the remote control lock
Alarm status Indicator
button is pressed, the horn will sound briefly to
signal that an aperture is still open. The alarm E80559
Armed with space Triple flash for 10
will remain disarmed, but all of the closed protection seconds, then
apertures will lock. Four roof-mounted sensors monitor the single flash
interior space and activate the alarm if Armed without Double flash for 10
As soon as the open aperture is fully closed,
the system will automatically arm, signalled by movement of air is detected in the passenger space protection seconds, then
three flashes of the hazard warning lamps, with compartment. single flash
interior space protection activating 30 seconds Note: Interior space protection cannot be Disarmed, engine Single flash
later. activated if an aperture (other than the bonnet) immobilised
Note: The vehicle will not superlock if an is open.
Disarmed, engine A one second flash
aperture (other than the bonnet) is open. Disabling interior space protection mobilised
To disable interior space protection, press the
lock button on the remote control twice within
three seconds.
50
 Alarm
SWITCHING OFF THE ALARM
If the alarm is triggered, it sounds and the
hazard warning lamps flash for 30 seconds.
The alarm system then returns to the same
protection status that existed before.
To silence the alarm, press the lock or unlock
button on the remote control or insert the key
into the starter switch. Pressing the lock button
will keep the alarm armed. If the alarm has
been activated since it was last armed, the
hazard warning lights will flash rapidly for eight
seconds when the alarm is disarmed.
TILT SENSOR
Your vehicle is fitted with a tilt sensor which
activates the alarm if the vehicle is tilted fore
and aft, or side to side, after it has been
superlocked.
The alarm will sound if theft is attempted by
hoisting onto another vehicle or if a side is
lifted to attempt wheel removal.
If you wish to have the doors locked but the tilt
sensor disabled (e.g. when aboard a ferry or
having the vehicle transported on a recovery
truck) press the lock button twice within three
seconds.
PANIC ALARM
The Land Rover button on the remote control
can be programmed to operate the panic alarm.
See PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE CONTROL
(page 42).
The alarm will sound and the hazard warning
lamps will flash when the button is pressed.
Press the lock or unlock buttons or insert the
key in the starter switch, to switch off the
alarm.
51
Seats
Seats
SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION x Position the seat belt so that it is mid-way
between your neck and your shoulder. Fit
1 the strap tightly across your hips, not
across your stomach.
x Ensure that your driving position is
comfortable and enables you to maintain
full control of the vehicle.
2
E81931
WARNING
Do not adjust the seat while the vehicle
is moving. Doing so could cause loss of
vehicle control and personal injury.
The seat, head restraint, seat belt and airbags,
all contribute to the protection of the user.
Correct use of these components will give you
greater protection, therefore you should
observe the following points:
1. Sit in an upright position with the base of
your spine as far back as possible and the
seat back reclined no more than 30
degrees.
2. Do not move the driver's seat too close to
the steering wheel. Ideally, a minimum
distance of 254 mm (10 inches) is
recommended between the breastbone
and the steering wheel airbag cover. Hold
the steering wheel in the correct position
with your arms slightly bent. Bend your
legs slightly so that the pedals can be
pressed fully to the floor.
x Adjust the head restraint so that it's
highest point is level with the top of your
head.
52
 Seats Seats
MANUAL SEATS ELECTRIC SEATS

2
3
1 1
4
2 3

1 2 3 4
1
2

5
4 3

E89573 E80424

1. Forward/backward adjustment. 1. Forward/backward adjustment

2. Height adjustment. 2. Backrest adjustment
3. Seat back angle adjustment. 3. Seat cushion height adjustment
4. Lumbar support adjustment. 4. Seat cushion edge adjustment
5. Folding armrest adjustment. The seats have a 15 minute (10 minutes for a
WARNING driver's seat with seat memory) active period
Do not adjust any part of a seat while started when:
the vehicle is in motion. Vehicle x the vehicle is unlocked, or;
movement may cause the seat to suddenly
x the starter key is turned to position 0.
shift, potentially causing injury or loss of
control.
The seat adjustment controls are situated on
the outer side of the seat cushion and you can
adjust the position of the seat when the starter
key is in position I or II.

53 54
 Seats
Folding armrest Lumbar support adjustment
E91253
A separate switch located in the side of the seat
E91267 provides for adjustment of lumbar support.
Press the front end of the switch to stiffen the
Some vehicles are fitted with adjustable front
support or the rear end of the switch to relax
seat armrests. These are used in the horizontal
the support. Release the switch to stop
position or can be stowed vertically alongside
adjustment.
the seat backrest.
55
Seats
HEAD RESTRAINTS Front head restraints
WARNINGS
Head restraints are designed to support
the head not the back of the neck). The
restraint must be positioned correctly to
restrain rearward movement of the head in a
collision. An incorrectly adjusted head
restraint increases the risk of death or serious
injury in the event of a collision.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top
of the head restraint is above the centre
line of the head. An incorrectly adjusted head
restraint increases the risk of death or serious
injury in the event of a collision. See SITTING
IN THE CORRECT POSITION (page 52).
E91252
Do not drive, or carry passengers with
the head restraints removed from
Adjust the head restraint correctly, up or down
occupied seats. The absence of a correctly
by pressing the collar button as indicated. The
adjusted head restraint increases the risk of
top of the head restraint should be level with
death or serious injury in the event of a
the top of the head.
collision
Never adjust the head restraint while Rear head restraints
the vehicle is in motion. An incorrectly Adjustment
adjusted head restraint increases the risk of
death or serious injury in the event of a
collision.
E81310
1. Press the collar button.
56
 Seats
2. Raise or lower the head restraint until the
top of the head restraint is level with the
top of the passenger's head.
Removal
If removal is essential, press the collar button
whilst lifting the restraint clear of the seat.
To replace the head restraint, engage the guide
posts into the collars and press the restraint
downwards until a click is heard.
REAR SEATS
WARNING
Always ensure that objects carried
within the vehicle are securedproperly.
Unsecured items can cause death or serious
injury in the event of an impact or sudden
manoeuvre.
Never allow passengers to travel in the
load space under any circumstances.
All vehicle occupants should be seated
correctly, and wear a seat belt at all times
when the vehicle is in motion. Failure to do so
will greatly increase the risk of death and
serious injury in the event of an accident or
heavy braking.
Second-row seats - 5-seat vehicle
Note: Some 5-seat models are fitted with the
same type of seat as the 7-seat model.
Folding the seats
One or both parts of the seat can be folded.
Move the front seats forward and remove any
items from the seats and the rear footwell.
1 1
2
2 checked and physically tested to ensure
3 seat(s) to be folded.
4
4 raise the backrest(s) until they click into
E80411
1. Fully lower the head restraints.
2. Pull the strap on the required cushion(s),
to raise the cushion to the vertical position.
3. Pull the seat backrest release lever(s)
forward.
4. Lower the backrest until it locks into place.
Note: Only Land Rover-approved seat covers
and accessories should be used on these seats.
Raising the seats
WARNING
Ensure that when the seat back is raised
the locking mechanism is fully
engaged. Failure to do so will greatly increase
the risk of death and serious injury in the event
of an accident or heavy braking.
Seats
2
E80412
1. Pull the strap vertically on the back of the
seat to unlock the seat. Continue to pull to
position.
2. Push the seat cushion(s) firmly back into
position.
3. If the lever has not returned to its locked
position, red flags will be visible around
the lever.
4. Pull the headrest up into the correct
position.
Second row seats - 7-seat vehicle
The seats can be used in a variety of
configurations:
x As a standard row of three seats.
x A backrest can be folded forwards to form
a table.
x One or all seats can be folded flat.
x An outer seat can be folded forwards for
access to the third row of seats.
If the front seats are in their rearmost position,
move them forward prior to folding down the
seats.
Table fold position
WARNING
The latching mechanism should be
that both the cushion and backrest are secure
before driving.
Remove any items from the seats and rear
footwell. Fully lower the head restraint on the
1
2
E80413
1. Pull the backrest release lever forwards.
2. Lower the backrest forwards into the
table-fold position.
Note: Only Land Rover-approved seat covers
and accessories should be used on these seats.
To return the seat-back to its upright position,
push the release lever forwards and pull the
backrest up until it clicks into place.
If it has not returned to its locked position, red
flags will be visible around the lever.
Pull the head restraint up to its correct
position.

57 58
 Seats Seats
Extending the loadspace Raising the seat Access position Note: A second-row seat cannot be moved
from the loadspace position, to the access
CAUTION WARNING position. Return the seat to the table-fold
1
Do not attempt to raise the seats from the The outer seat(s) must not be left in the position before attempting to move it to the
loadspace position while the loadspace access position while the vehicle is access position.
cover unit is stowed behind it, as damage will being driven. Motion of the vehicle could
2
result. cause the seat to drop back into its table-fold
position.
4
3 To enter the third-row seats, first ensure that
the head restraint on the second-row seat is
fully lowered.

1
3 4
2

2
E80414

1. Pull the backrest release lever forwards.

2. Lower the backrest forwards into the
table-fold position.
3. Pull the strap at the front of the seat.
4. Press down on the seat.
Note: The centre seat must always be folded
first.
E81904
Remove the luggage cover and stow it between
the folded seat rows.
1
E80415 4
1. To raise the seat, pull the strap at the front
of the cushion.
2. Grasp the top and bottom of the backrest, 3
lift the seat and return it to the table-fold
position.
E80416
3. Push the release lever forward.
4. Pull the backrest up and push until the 1. Pull the backrest release lever forwards.
latching mechanism clicks into place. If the 2. Lower the backrest forwards into the
lever has not returned to its locked table-fold position.
position, red flags will be visible around 3. Pull the access lever on the side of the
the lever. seat.
Note: If a combination of backrests, including 4. Tilt the seat forwards.
the centre backrest, is to be erected, the centre
When you have gained access to the third-row
backrest should be erected last.
seat, return the second-row seat to its fully
upright position.

59 60
 Seats Seats
Raising the seat Folding the seat Raising the seat 5. Raise the head restraint until it latches into
position.
WARNINGS WARNINGS
1 Note: When not in use, fold the head restraints
When lowering the seats from the 2 The head restraint must always be to improve rear vision.
access position, ensure that nothing is raised when using the third-row seat.
trapped by the returning seat. Do not use the seat until it is fully HEATED SEATS
The latching mechanism should be raised.
checked and physically tested to ensure Front seat heaters
3
that the cushion and backrest are secure
before driving. 1 2
Pull the seat down into the table-fold position
and the access lever will click into place.
Check around the lever, a red flag will be visible
behind the lever if the backrest is not correctly 4
located. E80400

Third-row seats Rear seat heaters

WARNINGS
5 3
Ensure that nothing has been left under
the seat or in the footwell when folding
down the seat as this could cause damage. 6 4
Beware of trapping your fingers when
operating the seats.

CAUTION
E80417
Do not attempt to raise the seats from the E80401
loadspace position while the loadspace
1. Press the head restraint release button. With the starter switch turned on, the seats can
cover is in its floor level stowage position as
2. Fold the head restraint fully downwards. be heated at two different settings.
this may damage either the cover or the seats. 5
3. Pull up the release strap at the rear corner x Press once to operate at the high setting.
Third row seats can be folded flat. As cabin temperature rises, the seat
of the cushion; this lifts under spring
pressure. heaters switch to the low setting
E80418
automatically.
4. Fold the cushion fully forwards until it
1. Pull lever to release backrest. x Press twice to operate at the low setting.
latches into position.
2. Raise the backrest into its upright position, x Press a third time to turn off the heaters.
5. Pull up the backrest release lever.
ensuring that it is fully latched into place. The seat heaters will maintain a pre-determined
6. Fold the backrest fully forwards until it
3. Release catch and raise cushion. temperature.
latches into position in the loadspace floor.
4. Push the cushion into place, ensuring that Note: The seat heaters consume considerable
the cushion is latched to the backrest. power from the battery, we recommend they
are only operated while the engine is running.

61 62
 Seat belts
Seat belts
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Seat belts are designed to bear upon
the bony structure of the body and
should be worn low across the pelvis or pelvis,
chest and shoulders, as applicable; wearing
the lap section of the belt across the
abdominal area must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly
as possible, consistent with comfort, to
provide the protection for which they have
been designed. A slack belt will greatly reduce
the protection afforded to the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid
contamination of the webbing with
polishes, oils and chemicals and particularly
battery acid. Cleaning may safely be carried
out using mild soap and water.
The belt should be replaced if webbing
becomes frayed, contaminated or
damaged.
It is essential to replace the entire
assembly after it has been worn in a
severe impact even if damage to the assembly
is not obvious.
Belts should not be worn with the
straps twisted.
Do not carry hard, fragile, or sharp
items between your person and the seat
belt. In an impact the pressure from the seat
belt on such items can cause them to break,
which in turn may cause death or serious
injury.
Each belt assembly must only be used
by one occupant; it is dangerous to put
a belt around a child being carried on the
occupant’s lap.
63
WARNINGS
The occupants of the front seat should
not travel with the seat back at more
than 30 degrees from the upright. Doing so
will reduce the protection afforded by the seat
belt.
Seat belts should be worn by all vehicle
occupants, for every journey no matter
how short. Failure to do so will greatly
increase the risk of death or serious injury in
the event of an accident.
Never wear just the lap belt or just the
shoulder belt of a lap/shoulder diagonal
seat belt. Both of these actions are extremely
dangerous and may increase your risk of
injury.
No modifications or additions should
be made which prevent the seat belt
mechanism from taking up the slack, or
prevent the seat belt from being adjusted to
remove slack. A slack seat belt offers a greatly
reduced level of occupant protection in an
impact.
If any damage, wear, cuts, defects, or
impaired operation are noted with the
seat belts, the vehicle should be taken to your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer for immediate
attention. Do not use the vehicle if the seat
belts cannot be operated correctly.
When using seat belts to restrain items
other than occupants, take care to
ensure that the belts are not damaged or
exposed to sharp edges.
Seat belts
WARNINGS
Care must be taken to avoid
contaminating the seat belt webbing,
and seat belt mechanisms with chemicals,
liquids, grit, dirt or cleaning products. If the
seat belts do become contaminated they
should be replaced immediately.
Contaminated seat belts may not operate
correctly in an impact and cannot be relied
upon.
The airbag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) is designed to add to the
overall effectiveness of the seat belts. It does
not replace them. Seat belts must always be
worn.
Should the seat belt not retract and
remain at its static length, consult your
Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
Where possible, use the seat belts to
secure large items of luggage that are
to be carried on the seats. In the event of an
accident, unsecured items become flying
missiles, capable of causing serious injury.
Seat belts
Lap/shoulder inertia reel seat belts are
provided for all seat positions.
The inertia reel operating mechanism of the
seat belts, allows the wearers to move their
upper bodies to reach various controls.
The seat belts include a buckle sensor, to
detect when the buckle is latched.
Caring for seat belts
The seat belts should be inspected regularly to
check for signs of fraying, cuts, wear to the
webbing and the condition and security of the
mechanism, buckles, adjusters and mounting
points.
64
Do not bleach or dye the webbing and avoid
contaminating the webbing with polish, oil or
chemicals. See FASTENING THE SEAT BELTS
(page 65).
Testing inertia reel belts
x With the seat belt fastened, give the
webbing near the buckle a quick upward
pull. The buckle must remain securely
locked.
x With the seat belt unfastened, unreel the
seat belt o the limit of its travel. Check that
it unreels smoothly with no snatches or
snags. Allow the belt to fully retract, again
checking for smooth operation.
x Partially unreel the seat belt, then hold the
tongue plate and give it a quick forward
pull. The mechanism must lock and
prevent any further unreeling.
If any of the seat belts fail to meet those
criteria, immediately contact your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
Note: If the vehicle is parked on an incline, the
seat belt mechanism may lock. This is not a
fault and the belt should be gently eased out
from the upper anchorage.
Seat belt pre-tensioners
WARNINGS
The seat belt pre-tensioners will only be
activated once and then must be
replaced by a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer. Failure to replace the pre-tensioners
will reduce the efficiency of the vehicle's front
restraint systems.
After any impact, always have the seat
belts and pre-tensioners checked and,
if necessary, replaced by a Land Rover Dealer/
Authorised Repairer.
 Seat belts
WARNINGS
In the interests of safety, it is
recommended that removal or
replacement of the front seats and seat belts
should only be carried out by a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
The seat belt pre-tensioners activate in
conjunction with the airbag SRS and provide
additional protection in the event of a severe
frontal impact. The pre-tensioners
automatically retract the seat belts fitted to the
front seats. This reduces any slack in both the
lap and diagonal portions of the belts, thereby
reducing forward movement of the belt wearer.
The airbag SRS warning indicator on the
instrument pack, will alert you to any
malfunction of the seat belt pre-tensioners.
If the pre-tensioners have been activated, the
seat belts will still function as restraints and
must be worn in the event that the vehicle
remains in a driveable condition.
Note: The seat belt pre-tensioners will be
activated in major side and frontal impacts and
in rollovers.
SEAT BELT REMINDER
Beltminder commences when the
starter switch is turned to position II
and the driver's belt is unbuckled.
Dependent on market, the warning indicator in
the instrument pack illuminates, the message
FASTEN SEAT BELTS appears in the message
centre and an audible chime sounds.
The visual and audible warnings applicable to
the Beltminder feature are market dependent to
meet individual market requirements. The
warning signals given may also change
depending on whether the vehicle is stationary
or when the vehicle speed exceeds a
pre-determined threshold.
65
In certain markets, the Beltminder feature also
applies to the front passenger seat.
Note: Objects placed on the front passenger
seat may activate the seat belt reminder
warning chime and indicator. It is
recommended that any objects placed on the
front passenger seat are secured using the seat
belt.
FASTENING THE SEAT BELTS
1
2 E80375
LAN1113
1. Draw the belt out smoothly, ensuring that
the belt height, the seat position and your
position on the seat are correct. The belt
should lay flat across the pelvis, chest and
mid-point of the collar bone between the
neck and shoulder.
2. With the belt correctly positioned, place
the metal tongue into the buckle nearest to
you. Press until a click is heard.
The buckles on third row seats are
spring-loaded allowing them to be stowed
within the seat. This is to prevent damage when
the seats are folded flat. To fasten the belt, pull
the buckle up from the seat before inserting the
tongue plate.
Seat belts
Adjust the seat belt to eliminate any slack in the
webbing.
Releasing the belt
Note: When releasing the belt it is advisable to
hold it near the buckle before pressing the
release button. This will prevent the belt from
retracting too quickly.
To release the seat belt, press the red button.
66
SEAT BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Correct seat belt adjustment is essential
for safety and comfort. Ensure that the
height is correctly adjusted and the
mechanism is locked in place before driving
the vehicle. Do not attempt to adjust the seat
belt height once the vehicle is in motion. Doing
so may cause you to loose control of the
vehicle, or incorrectly adjust the seat belt.
Press down (solid arrow) to release the catch,
then lift or push down to adjust the height of
the anchorage.
Ensure the anchorage has clicked into one of
the locked positions before driving.
Where possible passengers should adjust their
position on the seat to enable the seat belt
webbing to cross the shoulder without
pressing on the neck.
 Seat belts
USING SEAT BELTS DURING
PREGNANCY
WARNINGS
Position the seat belt correctly for the
safety of the mother and unborn child.
never wear just the lap strap and never sit on
the lap strap whilst using just the shoulder
strap. Both of these actions are extremely
dangerous and may increase your risk of
serious injury in the event of an accident or
during emergency braking.
Never place anything between you and
the seat belt in an attempt to cushion
the impact in the event of an accident. It can be
dangerous and reduce the effectiveness of the
seat belt in preventing injury.
E80374
Position the lap strap comfortably across the
hips beneath the abdomen. Place the diagonal
strap between the breasts and to the side of
abdomen. Ensure that the seat belt is not slack
or twisted.
67
Supplementary restraints system
Supplementary restraints system
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The Supplementary Restraint System (SRS)
In the event of a collision, the airbag control components include:
unit monitors the rate of deceleration induced x SRS warning indicator.
by the collision, to determine whether the x Rotary coupler.
airbags should be deployed. x Airbag modules.
Operation of the airbag SRS is dependent on x Airbag diagnostic control unit.
the rate at which the vehicle's passenger
x Crash sensors.
compartment changes speed as a result of a
x Airbag wiring harness.
collision. The circumstances affecting different
collisions (vehicle speed, angle of impact, type x Seat occupancy sensor.
and size of object hit, for example), vary The airbag SRS is not designed to operate as a
considerably and will affect the rate of result of:
deceleration accordingly. x Rear collisions.
When deployed, inflation of the airbag is x Minor front impacts.
virtually instantaneous and occurs with
x Minor side impacts.
considerable force, accompanied by a loud x Heavy braking.
noise. The inflated bag, together with the seat
x Driving over bumps or potholes.
belt restraint system, limit the movement of an
occupant, thereby reducing the risk of injury to It follows, therefore, that significant superficial
the head and upper torso. damage can occur without the airbags
deploying or, conversely, that a relatively small
Provided the occupants are correctly seated,
amount of structural damage may cause the
with the seat belts properly worn; in the event
airbags to be deployed.
of a severe frontal impact, the airbags will
provide additional protection to the chest and
face of the front seat occupants.
In the event of a severe side collision, airbags
provide additional protection to the side of the
head and body facing the impact for front seat
occupants and to the side of the head facing
the impact for outer rear seat occupants.
Note: Inflation and deflation of the front and
seat mounted side airbags takes place very
quickly and will not protect against the effects
of secondary impacts that may occur. Head
airbags deflate at a slower rate and therefore do
offer some additional protection in the event of
a secondary impact.
68
 Supplementary restraints system
Airbags
5 4
E82231
1. Front passenger's airbag.
2. Driver's airbag.
3. Side airbags.
4. Front curtain airbags.
5. Rear curtain airbags.
WARNINGS
High speed impacts may cause serious
injury or death irrespective of safety
features fitted to a vehicle. Always drive with
caution and consideration for the vehicle’s
characteristics, road and weather conditions,
and do not exceed any speed limits in force.
Seat belts should be worn at all times,
by the driver and passengers in all
seating positions. The airbag supplementary
restraint system (SRS) cannot provide
protection in some types of impact. Under
these circumstances the only protection will
be provided by a correctly worn seat belt.
69
3 2 1 WARNINGS
3 operation of the airbags by placing any
WARNINGS
Airbags inflate at high speeds, and can
cause injuries. To minimise the risk of
injury, ensure that all vehicle occupants wear
correctly positioned seat belts, sit correctly in
the seats, and position the seats as far back as
practical.
Ensure that a gap is maintained
between the side of the vehicle and the
head and torso. This will enable unobstructed
inflation of the curtain, and seat mounted side
airbags.
Airbag inflation takes place
instantaneously and cannot protect
against the effects of secondary impacts.
Under these circumstances the only protection
will be provided by a correctly worn seat belt.
Phone systems should only be installed
by qualified persons familiar with the
operation of, and requirements for, vehicles
fidgets with SRS. If you are in any doubt, seek
advice from your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
Supplementary restraints system
Obstruction of airbags
For the airbags to operate correctly the
roof lining and door posts must be in
good condition, correctly fitted, and free from
obstruction. Any damage, wear or incorrect
fitment should be referred to your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer as soon as
possible for examination and repair.
Do not allow passengers to obstruct the
part of their person, or any objects in contact
with, or close to, an airbag module. Airbags
deploy at very high speeds and can cause
death or serious injury if objects are within the
area of deployment.
Do not attach or position items on, or
close to the roof lining, A, B and C post
finishers, front seat backrests or to an airbag
cover, which could interfere with the inflation
of the airbag or be propelled inside the vehicle
causing injury to the occupants.
C B A impacts that can occur during multiple vehicle
E80487
Do not use non-approved seat
covers/accessory seat covers over a front seat;
in particular, seat covers that have not been
designed for use with side airbags. If in doubt,
consult your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.
70
Note: Unauthorised modification of the vehicle
or parts may invalidate the vehicle’s warranty.
Deployment effects
WARNINGS
After inflation some airbag components
are at high temperatures. To prevent
injury, do not touch the airbag components
until they have cooled.
In order to react with sufficient speed,
airbags are deployed by an explosive
charge. Consequently airbag deployment is
accompanied by a very loud noise which may
cause discomfort and temporary loss of
hearing.
An airbag will only provide additional
protection in certain types of frontal
collisions. No protection is afforded against
the effects of rear impacts, or minor frontal
impacts.
Inflation and deflation take place
instantaneously and will not provide
protection against the effects of secondary
collisions.
When an airbag inflates a fine powder is
released. This is normal and not an
indication of a malfunction. However, the
powder may cause irritation to the skin and
should be thoroughly flushed from eyes and
any cuts or abrasions.
Activation of an airbag creates dust,
causing possible breathing difficulties
for asthma sufferers or other people with
respiratory problems. If an airbag is activated,
any occupant who suffers from breathing
difficulties should either leave the vehicle as
quickly as possible, or obtain fresh air by fully
opening the windows and doors.
 Supplementary restraints system
After inflation, the front and seat mounted side
airbags deflate immediately (curtain airbags
deflate slowly). This provides a gradual
cushioning effect for the occupants and also
ensures that the driver's forward vision is not
obscured.
Disability modifications
Occupants with disabilities that may require the
vehicle to be modified must contact a Land
Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer before any
modifications are made.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING
Ensure that a gap is maintained
between the side of the vehicle and the
torso, to enable unobstructed inflation of the
seat-mounted side airbags.
Side airbags are designed to protect the thorax
region of the torso and will only deploy in the
event of a severe side impact. They will not
inflate as a result of frontal or rear impacts
only. The airbags on the non-impacted side of
the vehicle will not be deployed.
CURTAIN AIRBAGS
WARNING
For the curtain airbags to deploy
correctly, the roof lining and A post trim
must be undamaged and fitted correctly. Any
damage or suspect fitting should be referred
to a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer
for examination.
Curtain airbags are designed to protect the
head in the event of a severe side impact or
rollover event. They will not inflate as a result
of frontal or rear impacts alone.
71
DISABLING THE PASSENGER AIRBAG
WARNING
Crash test data and statistics show that
the safest place for a child to be
restrained is in a child seat correctly fitted to
the vehicle’s rear seat.
Do not use a child restraint on a seat
protected by an operational airbag in
front of it. Doing so presents a high risk of
death or serious injury to the child in the event
of an accident.
Do not fit a child restraint to the front
passenger seat if the SRS warning lamp
illuminates continuously with the ignition on.
As soon as a child seat is removed from
the front passenger seat the airbag
must be turned on. Failure to do so will put a
front seat passenger at greater risk of death or
serious injury in the event of a frontal impact.
E90827
Note: The passenger airbag should be disabled
only when a rearward facing child restraint is
fitted to the front passenger seat.
Supplementary restraints system
Prior to fitting a child restraint on the front
passenger seat, open the passenger door and
using the starter key, turn the airbag disabling
switch to the OFF position.
Passenger airbag status indicator
WARNING
When checking the operational status
of the front passenger airbag, ensure
that the ignition is switched on.
6CD-465
E90840
When the airbag disabling switch is turned to
the OFF position, the passenger airbag status
indicator (arrowed) will illuminate (yellow)
whenever the starter key is turned to position ll
or the engine is running.
When switching the passenger airbag on or off,
check that the status lamp shows the correct
condition.
Note: The indicator will only illuminate when
the ignition is turned on or the engine is
running.
72
Airbag switched OFF
WARNING
To avoid the risk of injury, never use a
child restraint in the front of the vehicle
unless the passenger airbag has been
switched OFF.
E82245
In order to fit a child restraint to the front
passenger seat, use the starter key to turn the
passenger airbag disabling switch to the OFF
position.
Check that when the starter key is turned to
position II, the status indicator on the facia is
illuminated confirming that the passenger
airbag is not operational.
If the airbag SRS warning indicator in the
instrument pack illuminates continuously,
remove the child restraint from the front seat
and consult your Land Rover Dealer/
Authorised Repairer.
 Supplementary restraints system
Airbag switched ON
WARNING
To ensure that the adult restraint
system performs as intended, make
sure that the passenger airbag is switched ON.
E82246
When an adult is seated in the front passenger
seat of your vehicle, ensure that the passenger
airbag disabling switch is turned to the ON
position.
This will ensure that the airbag will perform as
intended in the event of a crash.
Check that when the starter key is turned to
position II, the operational status lamp on the
facia is not illuminated, confirming that the
passenger airbag is operational.
73
AIRBAG WARNING LAMP
WARNING
If the warning indicator signals that a
fault is present in the system, do not
use a child restraint on the front passenger
seat. Doing so will increase the risk of death or
serious injury to the child.
A red warning indicator in the
instrument pack will alert you to any
malfunction of the airbag SRS. On
vehicles with a message centre, this will be
accompanied by the message AIRBAG FAULT.
Seek qualified assistance urgently if any of the
following symptoms occurs:
x The warning indicator fails to illuminate
when the starter switch is turned to
position ll.
x The warning indicator fails to extinguish
within approximately four seconds after
the starter switch is turned to position Il.
x The warning indicator illuminates after the
engine is started, or while the vehicle is
being driven.
Supplementary restraints system
AIRBAG SERVICE INFORMATION
WARNING
For your safety a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer must carry
out any of the following tasks:
Removal, replacement, repair, or modification,
of any wiring or component in the vicinity of
the SRS components, including the steering
wheel, steering column, door trim, roof lining,
instrument pack and instrument panel.
Installation of electronic equipment such as a
mobile phone, two-way radio or in-car
entertainment system.
Modification to the front or side of the vehicle,
including the bumper and chassis.
Attachment of accessories to the front or side
of the vehicle.
Do not attempt to service, repair,
replace modify, or tamper with, any part
of the SRS. This includes wiring or
components in the vicinity of SRS
components. Doing so may cause the system
to trigger, or render the system inoperative,
either of which may result in death or serious
injury.
Do not use any electrical test equipment
or devices in the vicinity of SRS
components or wiring. Doing so may cause
the system to trigger, or render the system
inoperative, either of which may result in death
or serious injury.
In addition, always contact your Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer if:
x An airbag inflates.
x A seat belt pre-tensioner activates.
x The front or side of the vehicle is damaged,
even if the airbag has not inflated.
x Any part of the airbag trim, module cover
shows signs of cracking or damage.
74
 Child safety
Child safety
CHILD SEATS
WARNINGS
Do not use a child restraint on a seat
with an operational airbag in front of it.
There is a risk of death or serious injury when
the airbag deploys.
Crash statistics show that children are
safest when properly restrained in a
child or infant restraint system that is secured
in a rear seating position.
Do not use a forward facing child seat,
until a child is above the minimum
weight of 9 kg (20 lb.) and able to sit up
unaided. Up to the age of two, a child's spine
and neck are not sufficiently developed to
avoid injury in a frontal impact.
Do not allow a baby or infant to be held
or carried on the lap. The force of a
crash can increase effective body weight by as
much as thirty times, making it impossible to
hold on to the child. Children typically require
the use of a booster seat appropriate to their
age and size, thereby enabling the seat belts to
be properly fitted, reducing the risk of injury in
a crash. Children could be endangered in a
crash, if their child restraints are not properly
secured in the vehicle.
Do not use a child seat that hooks over
the seat back. This type of seat cannot
be satisfactorily secured and is unlikely to be
safe for your child.
It is very important for all infants and children
under 12 years of age to be restrained in a
suitable child safety seat appropriate to their
age and size. See CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
(page 77).
75
Note: In some countries legislation prohibits
children travelling in the front of a vehicle.
Ensure that you are familiar with the legislation
in force where the vehicle is being used and are
in full compliance.
If a child must travel in the front passenger
seat, Land Rover recommends the following:
1. Position the seat fully rearward.
2. Adjust the lumbar to its minimum.
3. Adjust the cushion to its highest position.
4. Set cushion rake to its lowest position.
5. Set seat belt upper anchorage to its lowest
position.
6. For markets other than Australia, disable
the airbag. See DISABLING THE
PASSENGER AIRBAG (page 71).
WARNING
Original text according to EEC R94.01.
Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward
facing child restraint on a seat protected by an
airbag in front of it.
E79258
This symbol is affixed to the end of the facia on
the passenger side. Its purpose is to warn
against the use of a rear facing child seat when
the front passenger airbag is fitted and
operational.
Child safety
Seat belt automatic locking mechanism
The second and third row seat belts have a
special locking mechanism which aids the
retention of child seats.
The procedure to install a child seat is as
follows:
1. Place the child seat in the vehicle, attach
the seat belt and secure the buckle in
accordance with the manufacturer’s fitting
instructions.
2. Pull on the shoulder section of the belt to
reel out all of the remaining webbing to the
limit of its travel. This will engage the
automatic locking feature, which then acts
as a ratchet, allowing the webbing only to
retract.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract onto the child
seat (a clicking sound will confirm that the
ratchet has engaged), while firmly pushing
the child seat into the vehicle seat.
4. Ensure that there is no slack in the seat belt
by pulling upwards on the shoulder belt
immediately above the child restraint. The
seat belt should now be locked and the
child seat held firmly in position.
When the child seat is removed and all of the
seat belt webbing is allowed to retract, the seat
belt locking mechanism reverts to normal
operation.
Note:
Where possible, use the seat belt automatic
locking mechanism to secure large items of
luggage that are to be carried on the seats. In
the event of an accident, unsecured items
become missiles capable of causing serious
injury.
76
Child restraint checklist
Every time a child travels in the vehicle observe
the following:
x Always use the appropriate child restraints
and adjust harnesses for every child, every
trip.
x Make sure that a child falls into the correct
weight range for the seat.
x Carefully follow the instructions provided
by the manufacturer of the restraint
system.
x Ensure that all slack is removed from the
adult seat belt.
x When installing an ISOFIX seat, always
attach the top tether. Always give the
ISOFIX seat a final pull to ensure that the
lower anchors are secure.
x Regularly check the fit of a child seat and
replace seats or harnesses that show signs
of wear.
x Avoid dressing a child in bulky clothing
and do not place any objects between the
child and the restraint system.
x No child seat is completely child-proof.
Encourage a child not to play with the
buckle or harness.
x Never leave a child unsupervised in the
vehicle.
x Activate the rear door child safety locks.
See CHILD SAFETY LOCKS (page 81).
x Ensure that a child does not exit the vehicle
from the side where there is traffic.
x Set children a good example - always wear
your seat belt.
 Child safety Child safety
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING The following table shows the suitability of ISOFIX child seat positions
each passenger seat position for carrying Note:
CAUTION children up to 12 years of age or 1.5 m (5 feet)
tall and the installation of suitable child ISOFIX anchorages are provided for second row outer seating positions. ISOFIX child restraints
Information given in the table was
restraints systems. should be securely attached following the manufacturers instructions at these locations only.
correct at the time of going to press.
However, availability of child restraints may Note: The information contained in the Mass group as shown on child restraint. Size Classes Fixtures Vehicle ISOFIX
change. Please refer to your Land Rover following tables may not be applicable to all positions
Dealer/Authorised Repairer for the latest countries. If you are in any doubt regarding the
recommendation. type and fitment of child seats seek advice from Carrycot F/ G ISO L1/L2 X
your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer. 0 = Up to 10kg (22lb) E ISO R1 IL
0+ Up to 13kg (29lb) C/ D/ E ISO R1/R2/R3 IL
Seating position Mass group (with approximate age) As shown on child restraint
I = 9 to 18 kg (20 to 40 lb) C/D ISO R2/R3 IL
0 = Up to 10 kg 0+ = Up to 13 kg I = 9 to 18 kg (20 II and III =15 to 36
A/ B1/ B ISO F2/ F2X/ F3 IUF
(22 lb) (0-10 (29 lb) (0-18 to 40 lb) (9 kg (33 to 80 lb)
months) months) months - 5 years) (4-12 years) II = 15 to 25 kg (33 to 55 lb) - - -
Front passenger U U U U III - 22 TO 36 kg (48 to 79 lb) - - -
Rear seats - 5-seat L L L L
vehicle x IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for
use in the mass group.
Second row seats - U U U U
x IL = Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) in the table below. These
7-seat vehicles
ISOFIX CRS are those of the "specific vehicle", "restricted" or "semi-universal" categories.
Third row seats X X UF UF
x X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and or
this size class.
x U = Suitable for universal category restraints approved for this mass group.
x UF = Suitable for forward-facing universal category restraints approved for this mass group. Recommended ISOFIX child seats
x X = Not suitable for children in this mass group.
ISOFIX position Recommended seat
x L = Suitable for particular child restraints as listed in the Child seat usage table.
Recommended child seats I Britax Duo Plus ISOFIX
Child size/age Recommended seat IL Britax Cosy-Tot ISOFIX or
Groups 0 and O+ Britax Cosy-Tot/Römer Römer Baby Safe ISOFIX.
Baby Safe
Group I Britax/Römer Duo
Group II and III Britax Evolva 23 Ultra

Note: The legislation which governs how and

where children should be carried when
travelling in a vehicle is subject to change. It is
the responsibility of the driver to comply with
all regulations in force.

77 78
 Child safety Child safety
ISOFIX ANCHOR POINTS Once the ISOFIX child seat is installed, test the
A security of the installation, before seating a
WARNINGS child. Attempt to twist the child seat from side
Do not attempt to fit an ISOFIX child to side and to pull it away from the vehicle seat,
seat to the centre seating position. The then check that the anchors are still securely in
anchor bars are not designed to hold an place.
ISOFIX restraint in this position. If the restraint
Tether strap anchorages (Australia only)
is not correctly anchored, there is a significant
risk of injury to the child in the event of a WARNINGS
collision or emergency braking.
E80615
Child restraint anchorages are designed
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those load imposed
to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitting child restraints. Under no
To install your child seat with an ISOFIX
by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult
restraint system:
circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other
seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other B 1. Raise or remove the head restraint.
items or equipment to the vehicle.
items or equipment to the vehicle. 2. Lift the velcro strap, exposing the ISOFIX
Always follow the child seat or restraint
If removing a head restraint in order to locking mechanism.
system manufacturer’s instructions
fit a child restraint, always secure the 3. Slide the child seat into the locking when fitting tether straps.
head restraint when storing it. If left loose in mechanism. When fitting a child seat or restraint
the vehicle it may cause death or serious injury
system, always pass the tether strap
during sudden braking or an impact.
over the top of the seat back and beneath the
Note: ISOFIX child restraints are only fitted to underside of the head restraint.
the second row seats.
Attaching tether straps
1. Install the child restraint securely in one of
E80614 the rear seating positions.
2. Pass the tether strap over the back of the
A. 5-seat vehicles
seat and under the head restraint.
B. 7-seat vehicles
3. Attach the tether strap hook to the tether
Both second row outer seating positions, are anchor on the back of the vehicle seat.
equipped to accept ISOFIX restraints. Ensure that the tether strap hook is facing
This symbol is shown on a label E80616 the correct direction. See illustration.
sewn into the seats to indicate the 4. Tighten the tether strap according to the
Upper tether anchorages are provided at each
position of the ISOFIX lower manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
seating position equipped to accept ISOFIX
anchorages. slack in the webbing.
child restraints (shown in the illustrations).
Note: Always ensure that if an upper tether is
provided, it is secured and tightened properly,
as this provides maximum protection for a
child.

79 80
 Child safety Steering wheel
Steering wheel

Child seat upper tether anchorage Your vehicle is equipped with anchorage points ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL Electric adjustment
(5-seat vehicles) on the back of the second row seat frames.
These should be used to attach straps from WARNINGS
child seats or restraint systems. Never adjust the steering wheel
position while the vehicle is in motion.
BOOSTER CUSHIONS Doing so will reduce control of the vehicle, and
In a situation where a child is too large to fit may cause unpredictable steering movements.
into a child safety seat but is still too small to
Manual adjustment
safely use just the three point belt, a booster
seat is recommended for maximum safety.
FRONT OF
VEHICLE Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
fitting and use, and then adjust the seat belt to
suit.

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS

WARNING
E81521
Never leave children unsupervised in
Child seat upper tether anchorage the vehicle. Doing so increases the risk
E91595
of death or serious injury.
(7-seat vehicles)
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four
directions, corresponding with the movement
of the adjustment control, to suit your driving
position.
Move the control up or down to adjust the
height of the steering wheel.
E92262
Move the control forwards or rearwards to
The steering wheel position can be adjusted in move the steering wheel further away or closer
FRONT OF to your body.
VEHICLE
two directions.
E80631
Move the lever, located under the steering
wheel, fully downwards (see inset).
Child safety locks are fitted to the rear doors. Adjust the steering wheel up or down, in or out.
Insert the starter key into the keyhole and turn Move the lever fully up to lock.
outwards to activate the child safety lock.
E81522
With the child safety locks engaged, the rear
Provision is made in the second row seats for
doors cannot be opened from inside the
the fitting of up to three child seats of the type
vehicle.
that requires tether strap anchorage points.
Turn the key inwards to disengage the child
safety lock.

81 82
 Steering wheel Steering wheel
Automatic seat movement HORN VOICE CONTROL CRUISE CONTROL
If the control is set to the AUTO position, the Cruise control is operated via the switches on
Activating the voice control system
steering column and the driver’s seat will the steering wheel. See USING CRUISE
automatically move when the starter key is CONTROL (page 163).
removed. This allows greater clearance when
exiting and entering the vehicle.
The position of the steering column and seat
1
will be returned to their previous position next
2
time the key is inserted into the starter switch. E80445

Note: To prevent automatic movement of the

To operate, press either of the horn switches. 3
driver’s seat, turn the control to its clockwise
position.
4
AUDIO CONTROL
E80446
Steering wheel position memory
The finalised steering wheel position is stored To activate voice control: E80444

in memory and assigned to the starter key in
use when the position was set.
When that key is next used, the stored settings
associated with it are recalled.
This enables different steering wheel settings
to be stored on different keys, allowing the
driving position to be easily optimised for more
than one driver.
1 x Briefly pull the control. An audible alert will 1. Set + : Set or increase the speed
be heard, and LISTENING will be displayed
on the main message centre. The system is 2. Set - : Set or decrease the speed
2
now waiting for a voice command. 3. Resume: Resume set speed
3
For general information about voice control. 4. Cancel: Cancels without erasing
4 See USING VOICE CONTROL (page 336). memorised speed
5
E80450

If the steering column is subsequently

adjusted, you can store the new position along 1. Mode select.
with your current seat and mirror position, in 2. Volume up.
place of your previously-stored positions. See 3. Volume down.
MEMORY FUNCTION (page 138).
4. Channel up.
5. Channel down.

83 84
 Lighting Lighting
Lighting

GENERAL INFORMATION
There are three types of headlamp systems:
x Halogen high/low beam main lamp with a
fill-in high beam halogen lamp alongside.
x Bi-xenon high/low beam main lamps with
fill-in high beam halogen lamp alongside.
x An Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS).
See ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM
(AFS) (page 89).
Halogen headlamps
Halogen bulbs are very similar to the standard
light bulbs fitted to side or tail lights. Added
traces of halogen inside the bulb make it 10 to
20% more efficient than a standard light bulb
Daytime running lamps LIGHTING CONTROL High beam headlamps
In certain markets, the side lamps, licence plate
Lamps master switch
lamps and headlamp low beams will illuminate
with the engine running and the lamps master
switch turned off. The instrument pack
illumination remains off.
Unless they are required or
prohibited by law, daytime running
lamps can be disabled or enabled by E81026
a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
With the lamps master switch in position 3 and
Stop lamps 2 3 starter switch in position II, push the column
1
The stop lamps will illuminate while the brake 4 stalk away from the steering wheel to select
pedal is pressed. high beam.
The stop lamps also illuminate when Hill The blue warning indicator in the
AUTO

of similar voltage and wattage. Halogen bulbs
have an operating life of two to three times
longer than a standard bulb.
Bi-Xenon headlamps
Some vehicles are fitted with Xenon low/high
beam headlamp units. Xenon lamps provide
significantly improved visibility, especially
during adverse weather and driving conditions.
Bi-Xenon units use a Xenon bulb for both high
beam and low beam, whilst a halogen bulb is
used for high beam fill-in. A shutter, operated
by a solenoid, changes the direction of the
Xenon light beam, to give either low or high
beam.
The operational life of a Bi-Xenon light is
significantly longer than that of a conventional
or halogen bulb.
Descent Control is braking the vehicle or
during Electric parking brake dynamic
operation. See ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
(EPB) (page 153).
Reversing lamps
Selection of reverse gear will operate the
reversing lamps.
E81025
1. Off
2. Side lamps
3. Low beam headlamps
4. Automatic control lamps
Side lamps
The side lamps and licence plate lamps,
illuminate when the lamps master switch is
turned to positions 2 or 3, regardless of the
position of the starter switch.
A green warning indicator in the
instrument pack will illuminate
when side lamps are on.
Low beam headlamps
The low beam headlamps, illuminate when the
lamps master switch is turned to position 3,
and the starter switch is in position II.
instrument pack will illuminate
when high beam is selected.
To cancel high beam, pull the stalk towards the
steering wheel.
To flash the headlamps on high beam, pull the
stalk towards the steering wheel and release it.
Note: Do not use high beam where it may
dazzle other road users.
Headlamp courtesy delay
The headlamps can be kept on for a short time
after the vehicle is parked. Turn the starter
switch off with the lamps master switch in
positions 2, or 3.
Remove the key from the starter switch and
turn the lamps master switch to position 1. The
headlamps will remain illuminated for up to
240 seconds. This time delay is configurable.
See TRIP COMPUTER (page 115).
The courtesy delay may be cancelled at any
time by turning the starter switch to position I
or II or the lamps master switch to positions 1
or 2.
Note: If Automatic Control Lamps are switched
on, the headlamp courtesy delay will operate
automatically.

85 86
 Lighting Lighting
Automatic control lamps REAR FOG LAMPS ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS HEADLAMP LEVELLING
With the lamps master switch in position 4 and Vehicles with coil suspension have manual
Headlamp beam adjustment - Xenon
starter switch in position II, the side lamps, low headlamp levelling to compensate for uneven
beam headlamps and licence plate lamps will The lever illustrated may be on either side of loading of the vehicle.
illuminate automatically when the ambient light AUTO
the headlamp bulb aperture.
falls below a pre-defined level. When travelling in countries where you must
All of the lamps will go out when the ambient drive on the opposite side of the road, use the
light rises above that level. lever to alter the beam pattern.
AUTO

FRONT FOG LAMPS

E81029
1 2 3

With the side lamps or low beam headlamps

AUTO switched on, pull the switch to position 3 to
E81502
switch on the rear fog lamps.
If front fog lamps are not fitted, the rear fog With the headlamps turned on, rotate the
lamps illuminate with the switch in position 2. thumbwheel up or down to adjust the vertical
An amber warning indicator will E81158 aim of the beams.
illuminate in the instrument pack
1 2 You will need to remove the headlamp unit. See Switch position Setting
E81028 when the rear fog lamps are
REMOVING A HEADLAMP (page 93). Move the 0 Driver only or driver and
switched on.
With the side lamps or low beam headlamps lever down for driving in left-hand drive front seat passenger.
To switch off the fog lamps, return the switch countries and up for right-hand drive
switched on, pull the switch to position 2 to to position 1. 0.5 All seats occupied in a
switch on the front fog lamps. countries.
5-seat vehicle or all seats in
A green warning indicator will front and third rows for a
illuminate in the instrument pack 7-seat vehicle.
when the front fog lamps are 1 All seats occupied in a
switched on. 7-seat vehicle.
To switch off the fog lamps, return the switch 1.5 All seats occupied in a
to position 1. vehicle loaded to its Gross
Vehicle Weight.
2 Driver only in a vehicle
loaded to its Gross Vehicle
Weight.

87 88
 Lighting
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
2
E80817 3 The headlamp units can swivel left or right to
Press the switch to operate the hazard warning
lamps. All of the direction indicator lamps will
flash together.
Use only in an emergency to warn other road
users when the stationary vehicle is causing an
obstruction, or is in a hazardous situation.
Remember to switch off before moving away.
89
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM
(AFS)
Adaptive front lighting system (AFS) is a
lighting system, designed to give the driver
improved visibility. It has two main
components: A swivelling headlamp unit and a
static bending lamp, with a beam set to 45
degrees from the centre line of the vehicle.
improve light spread on bends in the road and
they operate throughout the vehicle speed
range. They also react to braking or
acceleration in the vertical plane, to maximise
headlamp performance. Additional lighting is
supplied by the static bending lamps at speeds
between 30 km/h (18 mph) and 70 km/h (44
mph). If the higher speed is exceeded, the
static bending lamps will only reactivate when
speed reduces to 60 km/h (37 mph). These
headlamps broaden the beam of the headlamps
when cornering.
The system takes inputs from the vehicle's
road speed and steering angle, to determine
the amount of horizontal swivel. The amount of
swivel is highest at low manoeuvring speeds
and movement reduces as speed increases.
Static bending lights operate when the system
detects a steering wheel rotation of 70 degrees
or more.
If reverse gear is selected, the lamps return to
the central position and the unit's swivelling
capability is disabled.
An amber warning indicator will
illuminate in the instrument pack if a
fault is detected with the AFS. Seek
qualified assistance.
Lighting
The AFS advantage Cornering lamps
These lamps broaden the beam of the
1 headlamps when cornering during normal
night driving.
Additional lighting comes from the static
bending lamps which have a beam set to 45
degrees outward from the centre line of the
vehicle.
The system switches on the lamp, if it has
received an input from the vehicle's direction
indicator. As the system is ignition-based, the
lamps will not stay on even if the vehicle is
parked with the direction indicator lever in the
operating position.
Only the lamp on the same side as the
operating direction indicator comes on.
2
Operating the direction indicators will also
activate the relevant lamp.
If reverse gear is selected, the lamps return to
the central position and the unit's swivelling
capability is disabled unless the direction
indicators are operating.
E80820
1. Shows the light spread of a vehicle not
fitted with AFS.
2. Shows the light spread of a vehicle fitted
with AFS.
90
 Lighting
DIRECTION INDICATORS
1
2 E81079
E80816
With the starter switch in position II, move the
lever up or down to operate the direction
indicators.
A green left or right warning
indicator in the instrument pack will
flash when the direction indicator
lamps are operating.
E91464 When the lever is held momentarily up or down
against spring pressure and then released, the
1. Shows the light spread of a vehicle not
indicators will flash three times to indicate a
fitted with cornering lamps.
lane change.
2. Shows the light spread of a vehicle fitted
This feature can be enabled or
with cornering lamps.
disabled by a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
91
Lighting
INTERIOR LAMPS Rear interior lamps
Front interior lamps
E81080
Each lamp can be switched on or off by
pressing the switch adjacent to the lamp
Each lamp can be switched on or off by required.
pressing the switch adjacent to the lamp
required. Instrument pack illumination
In automatic mode, the lamps will illuminate The level of illumination can be adjusted using
automatically when a door is opened. the instrument pack illumination dimmer
switch.
To enable automatic mode press the centre
switch for more than three seconds. The
message INTERIOR LIGHTS AUTOMATIC will
flash in the message centre.
To de-activate the courtesy lamps automatic
mode by press the centre switch. The message
INTERIOR LIGHTS OFF will flash in the
message centre.
92
 Lighting Lighting
REMOVING A HEADLAMP Removing the headlamp Refitting the headlamp REMOVING A REAR LAMP
It is necessary to completely remove the unit
Removing the grille
1 1 from the vehicle in order to change any of the
bulbs.

1
1

3 3
2

1
E80591

2 1. With the tailgate open, remove two screws

E80618
1. Press down on the four upper clips, and up
on the lower two clips.
E80619
2. Lift the grille clear of the vehicle and place
it where it will not become damaged.
1. Carefully lever up the two locking bars.
2. Disconnect the wiring plug from the back
of the unit and remove the unit from the
vehicle.
3. Place face down on a flat surface covered
in a soft material to prevent damage to the
unit's lenses.
from the edge of the unit nearer the tailgate
aperture.
2. Pull the unit away from the vehicle.
2
3. Disconnect the wiring multi-plug and
E80628 remove the unit from the vehicle. Place
face down on a flat surface covered in a
1. Reconnect the wiring plug.
soft material to prevent damage.
2. Offer up the unit into position.
4. To refit the lamp, reverse the removal
3. Push down on the two locking bars. instructions.
Refitting the grille
1. Refit the grille, aligning the upper and
lower clips with their respective slots, and
press into place.
2. Ensure the clips have sprung into place
securing the grille.

93 94
 Lighting
CHANGING A BULB
CAUTION
Always replace bulbs with the correct
type and specification. If you are in any
doubt contact your Dealer/Authorised
Repairer for advice.
Note: In certain territories it is a legal
requirement to carry spare bulbs. A
replacement bulb kit is available as an
approved accessory from your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
Check the operation of all exterior lamps before
you drive the vehicle.
Bulb access
WARNING
Do not attempt to change any bulb with
the lighting switched on. If the lighting
has just been switched off, give the bulbs time
to cool down. Handling them in a hot condition
may cause personal injury.
95
The headlamp unit contains five lamps and it is
necessary to completely remove the unit from
the vehicle in order to change any of the bulbs.
See REMOVING A HEADLAMP (page 93).
1 2
4 3
E80620
1. Direction indicator
2. Low beam/Xenon
3. High beam
4. Side lamp and cornering lamp
Lighting
Headlamp bulb (Halogen)
CAUTION
Take care not to touch this type of bulb
with your fingers; always use a cloth to
handle them. If necessary, clean the bulb with
methylated spirits to remove fingerprints.
Note: Low beam illustrated in following
procedure.
1. Twist and lift off the domed cap.
3
4 Seek advice about the proper
2 disposal of Xenon lamp units from a
E80623
2. Pull off the electrical connector.
3. Release the spring clip holding the bulb in
place.
4. Remove bulb.
5. Insert the new bulb and repeat the above
procedure in reverse order. When
replacing the cap, align the arrowheads on
the cap and the body of the unit.
96
Headlamp bulb (Xenon)
WARNINGS
Bi-Xenon lamp units operate at very
high temperature. Ensure that the lamp
units have cooled before attempting to touch
them.
Xenon lamp units contain Mercury
which is highly toxic and can be
harmful.
High voltage is required to ignite the
gas and metal vapour which are used to
power Xenon lamps. Contact with this voltage
can cause serious injury.
Replacement or maintenance of Xenon
lamps should only be carried out by
qualified personnel.
Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer or your local authority.
2 1
3 3
4
E80624
 Lighting
1. Twist and lift off the domed cap.
2. Twist the connector cap counterclockwise
to unlock it. Pull clear of the bulb.
3. Release the spring clip holding the bulb in
place.
4. Remove bulb.
5. Insert the new bulb and reverse the above
procedure. Ensure that the lugs on the cap
are in contact with the bulb base.
Cornering bulb
1. Twist and lift off the domed cap.
4 1
3 cap and the body of the unit.
2 2
E80625
2. Twist the bulb holder to unlock.
3. Remove bulb complete with electrical
connector.
4. To release the bulb, squeeze the two
catches, then pull to remove the electrical
connector.
5. Insert the new bulb and reverse the above
procedure. Align the arrowheads on the
cap and the body of the unit.
97
Front side lamp bulb
1. Twist and lift off the domed cap.
3 cap and the body of the unit.
2
E80626
2. Pull out the bulb complete with electrical
connector.
3. Pull the bulb out of the electrical
connector.
4. Insert the new bulb and reverse the above
procedure. Align the arrowheads on the
Lighting
Front indicator lamp bulb 3. Pull the bulb out of the electrical
connector.
4. Insert the new bulb and reverse the above
procedure. Align the arrowheads on the
Front fog lamp bulb
CAUTION
Take care not to touch this type of bulb
with your fingers; always use a cloth to
handle them. If necessary, clean the bulb with
methylated spirits to remove fingerprints.
E80621
1. Remove the headlamp unit locking bar,
and twist and lift off the domed cap.
2
3
E80594 2
1. Using the finger slot at the top of the fog
lamp surround, pull to remove.
2. Remove the three securing screws to
release the lamp unit. Ease the unit out of
2 the front bumper.
E80627
2. Turn the electrical connector
counterclockwise to release it.
98
 Lighting Lighting
Rear lamp bulb Licence plate lamp bulb
2
1

2 1
E80596 3
2 1
8. Align the spring clip above the finger slot
with the upper receiver shape in the 3
bumper and push into place. E81086

9. Push the lower part of fog lamp surround 4 Follow the steps illustrated. Insert a new bulb
into place, applying some upward and refit the components.
pressure.
5
E80595
Side repeater lamp bulb
E80592
3. Twist the bulb holder counterclockwise to
unlock, then pull out the bulb, complete 1. Stop/tail lamp
with electrical connector. 2. Direction indicator
4. To release the bulb, depress the two 3. Tail lamp
catches (solid arrows in inset), then pull to 1
remove the bulb from the holder. 4. Reversing lamp

5. Noting the flat and the tab on the bulb 5. Rear fog lamp
mounting flange. Insert the new bulb. 1. Remove the rear lamp. See REMOVING A 2
6. Reverse the above procedure to REAR LAMP (page 94).
reassemble. 2. Each bulb is now accessible by twisting off
7. Align fog lamp to front bumper and secure its electrical connection cap.
with screws. 3. Fit the rear lamp. See REMOVING A REAR 3
LAMP (page 94).

E81087

Follow the steps illustrated. Insert a new bulb

and refit the components.

99 100
 Lighting Lighting
Stepwell lamp bulb Tailgate lamp bulb Vanity mirror lamp bulb BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
CAUTION
Before attempting to replace a bulb,
1 1 ensure that both the affected lamp and
the vehicle’s ignition system are turned off. If
the circuit remains live a short circuit can
occur which may damage the vehicle’s
2 2 electrical system.

2 Note: All bulbs must be rated at 12 volts.

1 Bulb Watts
Headlamps, low and high beam 55 (H7)
E80597 E80597 E81090 (Halogen)
Headlamps, low and high beam 55 (D2S)
Follow the steps illustrated. Insert a new bulb Follow the steps illustrated. Insert a new bulb Follow the steps illustrated. Insert a new bulb
(Xenon)
and refit the components. and refit the components. and refit the components.
Cornering lamps (Halogen) 35 (H8)
Courtesy lamp bulb Map lamp bulb
Front side lamps W5W
Front direction indicators S8
1 Rear direction indicators P21
Front fog lamps (Halogen) 55 (H11)
1
Side marker lamps W5W
Reverse lamps P21
Rear fog guard lamps P21
Stop and tail lamps P21/5
Number plate lamps W5W
2 Door or puddle lamps W5W
Interior lamps W5W
2
Luggage or footwell lamps W5W
Luggage or tailgate lamps W5W
E81088 E81089
Glovebox lamp W5W
Follow the steps illustrated. Insert a new bulb Follow the steps illustrated. Insert a new bulb Vanity mirror lamp 1.2
and refit the components. and refit the components.

101 102
 Wipers and washers Wipers and washers
Wipers and washers

WINDSCREEN WIPERS
The wipers and washers will only operate when
the starter switch is turned to position I or II.
CAUTIONS
Do not operate the wipers on a dry
screen. The drag on the wiper
mechanism may cause damage.
Before operating in freezing or very hot
conditions, ensure that the wipers have
not stuck to the glass. The drag on the wiper
mechanism may cause damage.
Remove any snow, ice or frost, from the
screen, around the wiper arms, the wiper
blades and from the screen scuttle before
operating the wipers. Snow and ice can cause
damage to the wiper mechanism if left unclear.
Note: If the wiper blades do become stuck, or
jammed, an electronic cut out may temporarily
halt the operation of the wipers. If this
happens, switch off the wipers and the ignition.
Clear any obstructions, and free the wiper
blades before attempting to switch on the
ignition
3 E91450
2 vehicle’s speed increases to over 8 km/h (5
1 restored.
4 With the wiper switch in position 1, wiper
E91447
1. Rain sensor or intermittent variable delay.
2. Normal speed wipe.
3. Pull down and release to operate single
wipe.
4. Pull down and hold to operate at fast speed
until released.
Intermittent variable delay
E91448
With the lever in position 1, rotate the collar
clockwise to decrease the interval between
wipes. Rotate the collar counterclockwise to
increase the interval between wipes.
Speed dependent mode
When speed dependent mode is configured,
the operation of all wiper modes will be
affected by the vehicle's speed.
If the vehicle’s speed drops below 8 km/h
(5 mph) with the wipers operating, the wipers
will switch to the next lowest speed. When the
mph), the original wiper speed setting is
This feature can be enabled or
disabled by a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
Speed dependent intermittent mode
The frequency of intermittent variable delay is
adjusted automatically according to road speed
on vehicles not equipped with a rain sensor.
The intermittent period can be adjusted for
each of the speed dependent modes by rotating
the collar clockwise or counterclockwise.
This feature can be enabled or
disabled by a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
RAIN SENSOR
Rain sensor variable delay
CAUTION
Ensure that the wipers are switched off
before entering an automatic car wash. If
the rain sensitive wipers operate during the car
washing process damage may occur to the
wiper mechanism.
E91449
operation is adjusted automatically according
to information supplied by the rain sensor.
Rotate the collar clockwise to increase or
counterclockwise to decrease the sensitivity of
the rain sensor, and therefore the frequency of
wiper operation.
WINDSCREEN WASHERS
WARNING
If the vehicle operates in temperatures
below 41°F (5°C), use washer fluid with
antifreeze protection. In cold weather, failure
to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection
could result in impaired vision and increase
the risk of an accident.
Some screen wash products are
flammable: do not allow screen wash to
come into contact with sources of ignition.
CAUTION
Only screen wash products which are
approved for automotive use should b e
used and then only in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Push the button (arrowed) to operate the
windscreen washer. The front wipers will
operate if the button is pressed for more than
half a second. When the button is released, the
wipers will complete two further strokes before
parking automatically.
If the button is pressed for less than half a
second, only the washer will operate.

103 104
 Wipers and washers
Note: National or local regulations may restrict
the use of Volatile Organic Compounds
(VOCs), which are commonly used as
antifreeze agents in washer fluid. A washer
fluid with limited VOC content should be used
only if it provides adequate freeze resistance
for all climates in which the vehicle will be
operated.
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS
1
E91451
2
Wiper - intermittent operation
Pull the lever to position 1. The intermittent
delay period will vary according to the delay
switch setting.
Wiper - continuous operation
The rear wiper can be configured to operate
continuously.
This setting can be configured by a
Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.
Washer
Pull the lever to position 2 and hold it. The
wiper and washer will operate until the lever is
released. When the lever is released, the
washer will stop and the wiper will complete a
further two wipe cycles and then return to
intermittent operation.
105
Reversing
If reverse gear is selected while the front
wipers are operating, the rear wiper will
operate automatically.
Tailgate open disable
If the tailgate is opened while the rear wiper is
operating, the wiper will:
x Stop immediately.
x Not start to move if it is already stationary.
If the tailgate is then closed, the wiper will start
after three seconds.
If the tailgate is open and the vehicle's speed is
above 3 km/h (2 mph), then the wiper will
operate normally.
Wipers and washers
ADJUSTING THE WINDSCREEN HEADLAMP WASHERS
WASHER JETS If the headlamps are on, operating the screen
washer will also power wash the headlamps.
WARNING
Note: If the fluid level sensor detects a low
Do not operate the washer jets during level, the headlamp power wash is inhibited.
adjustment. Washer fluid may cause
irritation to the eyes and skin.
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
Always read and observe the washer
fluid manufacturer’s instructions. CAUTION
Only use cleaning products which have
Front
been approved for use on automotive
glass and rubber. Inappropriate products may
cause damage.
E80573
The wiping edge of the blades should be
E80473
cleaned periodically. Clean the blade edge by
Rear wiping with a soft cloth or sponge, using warm
soapy water.
Also, check the blade rubber for cracks, splits
and roughness. If any damage is found, replace
the blade immediately to prevent damage to the
glass.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
E80474 CAUTION
If jet adjustment is necessary, insert a needle Only fit correct length and type of wiper
blade. Failure to do so may cause
into the opening and gently lever it to the
correct position. The jet spray should hit the damage to the wiper system; it may also affect
the operation of the rain sensor.
centre of the windscreen.
If a jet becomes obstructed, insert a needle into
the opening to clear the blockage.
106
 Wipers and washers Windows and mirrors
Windows and mirrors

Front
E88777
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the screen
and pivot the blade assembly away from
the arm.
2. Press the tab (arrowed in inset), to release
the blade assembly.
3. Slide the blade assembly off the end of the
wiper arm.
4. Carefully replace the arm to its stowed
position.
E88778
5. To replace, position the wiper arm into the
aperture in the middle of the blade
assembly and push firmly into position
until the blade clips into place.
Rear ELECTRIC WINDOWS
WARNINGS
The windows have an anti-trap
protection system. However, before
closing a window care must be taken to ensure
that none of the occupants have any part of
their body in a position where it could be
trapped. Even with an anti-trap system death
or serious injury can occur.
Ensure that all adult passengers are
E88779 familiar with the controls and the
potential dangers of electric windows.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the rear
window. For their safety, when leaving children
in the vehicle always remove the key
2. Press the tab (arrowed in inset), to release from the starter switch.
the blade assembly.
Do not allow passengers to extend any
3. Slide the blade assembly off the end of the part of their bodies through a window
wiper arm. aperture while the vehicle is moving - injury
4. Carefully replace the arm to its stowed from flying debris, branches of trees or other
position. obstructions could occur.
Operating the windows
5 4 2 movement can be stopped by pressing the
E88780
5. To replace, position the blade assembly E80395 3 1
onto the inside of the wiper arm and push
firmly into position until the blade clips 1. Right-hand front window
into place. 2. Left-hand front window
3. Right-hand rear window
4. Left-hand rear window
5. Rear window isolation switch
The windows can be operated when the starter
switch is at position I or II and for up to 40
seconds after the starter switch is turned to
position 0 (provided a front door is not
opened).
Press and hold the front of the respective
switch to lower a window. Lift and hold the
front of the switch to close a window. The
window will stop moving as soon as the switch
is released.
One touch operation (front windows
only)
WARNINGS
Ensure that you remove the remote
control when leaving occupants in the
vehicle. This will prevent unsupervised
operation of the windows, which may result in
injury.
The front windows can be fully opened or
closed with a single press of the switch. Firmly
press or lift (and then release) the front of the
switch, to open or close the window. Window
switch again.
Resetting one touch operation
If the power is disconnected when a window is
open, one touch operation is disabled until the
window position is recalibrated. To recalibrate
the window, close the window and keep the
switch pressed for one second.
Anti-trap mechanism (front windows
only)
To prevent a window trapping vulnerable parts
of the body, the anti-trap sensor detects an
obstruction during window closing. If an
obstruction is detected, the window will stop
and then open slightly.

107 108
 Windows and mirrors
The anti-trap feature can be overridden by
attempting to close the window at intervals of
less than 10 seconds. On the fourth attempt the
window will move up a short distance with
increased force to try and move the
obstruction.
If this fails to move the obstruction, anti-trap
will be disabled until reset.
Resetting anti-trap
To reset anti-trap, close the window and keep
the switch pressed for one second.
Rear window isolation switch
WARNING
If children are carried in the rear seats,
the isolator switch should be used to
prevent operation of the windows. If the
widows are operated by young children there
is a risk of death or serious injury.
E80397
Press the right-hand side of the switch to
isolate the window switches on the rear doors.
Press the left-hand side to restore independent
control.
109
Rear window operation
E80396
The rear windows can be operated from the
switches on the rear doors if the rear window
isolation switch has not been activated.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Note: Depending on the type of mirror lens
used, distances may be difficult to judge
accurately. Objects viewed in the mirror may be
closer than they appear.
Proximity mirror (Japan only)
E80440
The proximity mirror's split lens provides
views along the left side and directly ahead of
the vehicle to reduce blind spots.
Windows and mirrors
Rotate the mirror a few degrees at a time and
then check the view from the driver's seat
before making further adjustments.
ELECTRIC EXTERIOR MIRRORS
CAUTION
Objects viewed in exterior mirrors may
appear further away than they actually
are.
E81038
Mirror glass adjustment
Push the knob as illustrated to tilt the mirror
glass up, down, left or right.
Note: On vehicles fitted with the driver's seat
memory facility, up to three exterior mirror
positions for each starter key can be stored.
A B See MEMORY FUNCTION (page 138).
Folding the mirror body
E81037
A. Right-hand drive vehicles
B. Left-hand drive vehicles
With the starter switch turned to position I or II,
rotate the knob to select either the left or right E81039
mirror.
The door mirrors fold forwards or rearwards
on impact. They can also be folded towards the
side windows into a park position.
110
 Windows and mirrors
E81040
With the rotary knob in the central position,
push it down to fold the mirrors. Push it down
again to unfold the mirrors.
If the mirrors are accidentally knocked out of
position (i.e. with one mirror folded and the
other in the normal position), press the switch
again to re-synchronise them.
Note: On some vehicles you can manually fold
the mirrors towards the side windows.
111
Windows and mirrors
Reverse mirror dipping INTERIOR MIRROR
Vehicles with driver’s seat memory have a
Manual mirror
function which dips the exterior mirrors
whenever reverse gear is selected, giving the
driver a view of the kerb.
When this feature is first used, the mirrors will
dip to a preset position. You can reset the dip
position as follows:
1. Turn the starter key to position I or II. Do
not start the engine.
E80447
2. Select or store a driver’s seat memory
position. See MEMORY FUNCTION Move the lever (forwards or backwards) to
(page 138). counteract the glare from a following vehicle's
3. Select reverse gear. The exterior mirrors headlamps.
will adjust to a preset position. Automatic dimming mirror
4. Adjust the mirrors to the required dipped
position.
5. Perform a memory store procedure on the
currently selected driving seat position.
6. DOOR MIRROR DIP STORED will be
displayed on the message centre
accompanied by a single chime.
E81427
This feature can be enabled or disabled. See
TRIP COMPUTER (page 115). Some rear-view mirrors will automatically
darken to counteract the glare from the
headlamps of a following vehicle. This feature
is temporarily switched off when reverse gear
is selected.
Note: If the rear screen is obscured, or the light
falling on the mirror is otherwise obstructed,
the automatic dimming may not operate
correctly.
112
 Instruments Instruments
Instruments

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW GAUGES Fuel gauge

1 2
EXT 23 C
Tachometer CAUTION
3 4 Indicates engine speed in revolutions per Never allow vehicles to run out of fuel.
minute (x 1 000). In normal driving conditions The resulting misfire may cause serious
the engine is most fuel efficient between 2 000 damage to the catalytic convertor.
and 3 000 rev per min. When the starter switch is turned to position II,
Temperature gauge the pointer quickly rises to show the level of
fuel in the tank.
CAUTION
Serious damage can occur if the vehicle
is driven while the engine is overheating.
At normal operating temperature, the pointer is
positioned midway between the red and blue
segments of the gauge (the precise position
will vary according to climatic conditions).

8 7 6 5
E80510
9
E80508
When the remaining fuel reaches a minimum of
12 litres (3 gallons), the amber low fuel
1. Tachometer warning indicator lamp (arrowed) illuminates.
2. Temperature gauge This should give a range of approximately 80
3. Fuel gauge km (50 miles). See RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
(page 186).
4. Speedometer E80509

5. Total distance (odometer) and trip

recorder If the pointer moves above the mid point, the
engine coolant is becoming too hot. If the
6. Trip recorder reset switch
pointer moves into the red segment and the red
7. Gear selector position display warning indicator lamp (arrowed) illuminates,
8. Main message centre severe engine damage could occur (under
9. Warning indicators panel these circumstances the air conditioning may
switch off and engine performance may reduce
to minimise engine load).
Stop the vehicle as soon as safety permits.
Allow the engine to idle until the warning
indicator extinguishes and the pointer moves
back to its normal position. If the problem
persists, seek qualified assistance
immediately.

113 114
 Information displays Information displays
Information displays

TRIP COMPUTER PERSONALISED SETTINGS When selections are complete, short press i
You can select various trip computer settings button to save any changes and return to the
Note: The clock is set via the audio system. See RANGE 387 km
to suit your personal requirements. Any trip computer display.
CLOCK (page 130).
AV. selections you make are associated with the Note: You cannot make changes while the
FUEL 4.3 l/100km remote control that you used during the vehicle is moving.
process. These choices are then recalled when
AV.
EXT TRIP COMPUTER SELECTION
AM 23 C SPEED 57 km/h the vehicle is next unlocked using that remote
control specifically. See MEMORY FUNCTION SETTINGS
OVERSPEED WARNING (page 138).
TRIP 274.5 Km TRIP DISTANCE MILES/KM
120 Km/h
With the starter key in any position, the vehicle UNITS (odometer)
EXT
stationary and a blank display, a short press FUEL USAGE UNITS MPG
AM 23 C (less than two seconds) of the i button l/100km
activates the SETTINGS display. Km/l
TRIP 274.5 km
EXTERNAL °C or °F
E90924 TEMPERATURE
E90923
SETTINGS OVERSPEED Off
Short presses of the i button (less than two WARNING 20 - 250 km/h or 15 to
After starting the engine and the system check seconds) will scroll through the following ENTER
EXIT 140 mph in 5-unit
is complete, the outside temperature is shown statistics: steps
on the display. If the vehicle is moving, it x Range (with current fuel tank contents).
shows the current trip distance. HEADLAMP OFF 30/60/120/240
x Average fuel consumption. 3 DELAY seconds
Note: The units used can be selected by the
x Average speed. AUTO DOOR LOCK ON/OFF
driver. See PERSONALISED SETTINGS 4
(page 116). x Overspeed warning function (a long press (speed related
turns the function on or off). 1 locking)
x A review of active warning messages. REVERSE MIRROR ON/OFF
2
x Outside temperature. DIP†
x Trip distance (a long press zeroes the trip LAZY ENTRY† ON/OFF
distance recorder and then starts to record
TRIP DISTANCE RESTORE DEFAULT YES/NO
distance). UNITS SETTINGS
KM
NEXT
EXIT BACK
† Vehicles with driver’s seat memory only.
E81030

Press 1 to access the settings that can be

personalised.
Press 1 or 2 to scroll through the menu. Press
3 or 4 to make selections.

115 116
 Information displays Information displays
INFORMATION MESSAGES Information messages Service interval indicator Gear selector display
Information messages are displayed when the
CAUTION starter switch is turned on or off. Where the
Do not ignore warning messages: take message requires action, you need to take
appropriate action immediately. Failure corrective action as soon as possible.
to do so may result in damage to the vehicle.
Languages
The language displayed in the main message
centre is set by the dealer.
E81053 E81054
If navigation is fitted, the language selected for
navigation display will be displayed. If the main When the starter switch is turned to position II, On vehicles with automatic transmission, the
LOW WASHER FLUID and a pre-determined distance or time is display shows the current gear selector
message centre does not support the
navigation language you select, then English is reached, a distance countdown to the next position and indicates when SPORT is
displayed. service due is displayed. A minus sign selected.
E81033
preceding the distance indicates that the On vehicles with manual transmission, the
service interval point has been exceeded by display shows the gear currently engaged.
Driver warning and information messages are
that distance.
displayed in the main message centre when a
fault is detected and also when the starter After approximately five seconds, the display
switch is off. reverts to total distance travelled.
Messages are displayed in order of importance Note: During the service, the repairer will reset
with critical warnings taking priority. Messages the distance display for the next service due.
are grouped into the following categories.
Critical warning messages
Critical warning messages are accompanied by
an audible warning and the message may have
a symbol next to it.
Warnings messages
Warning messages are non-critical, but must
be treated with some urgency. They may also
be accompanied by an audible warning.
All warning messages are displayed
for about four seconds, after which
this symbol is displayed in the main
message centre, indicating that there are
messages to be reviewed. To review messages,
press the i button on the direction indicator
lever until the list of messages is displayed.
The message centre will cycle through the
messages until the i button is pressed again.

117 118
 Climate control Climate control
Climate control

AIR VENTS 1 Face level vents Intake air

2 Driver’s lap vent The ventilation system takes air from the intake
1 3 Centre console rear vent controls grille in front of the windscreen. Always keep
the air intake grille clear of obstructions such
4 Rear upper vent controls
1 as leaves, snow or ice.
5 Rear pillar vent controls
Particulate air filter
Note: To ensure best ventilation and minimum
noise, the vents should be fully open when the The particulate air filter prevents pollen,
2 industrial fall-out, road dust and other particles
air distribution control is set.
from entering the vehicle via the vents.
Third row seats vent
Combined filter
Vehicles fitted with automatic temperature
control have a combined carbon and
particulate air filter, which reduces the level of
3 odours coming into the vehicle through the
2
heater system.

E81008

A fixed vent on the left-hand side rear quarter

3 panel provides airflow to the third-row seat
lower area.

5 4

E81929

119 120
 Climate control
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
1 2
Climate control
Air distribution control
Note: Position the control between two
3 symbols to obtain air flow from both positions.
Windscreen and side window vents
E80977

Face level vents

Foot level vents

E80979

7 6
E80976
1. Temperature control. Rotate to adjust
temperature left or right.
2. Air distribution control. Rotate to select
direction of airflow.
3. Blower control. Rotate the change blower
speed
4. Heated rear screen. Press to switch
on/off.
5. Heated windscreen. Press to switch
on/off.
6. Economy mode. Press to switch on/off.
7. Air recirculation control. Press to switch
on/off.
Note: Each switch illuminates when switched
on.
Note: The vehicle may be fitted with
windscreen heating.
5 4
4 conditioning and reduces fuel
Operation of controls
Manual air conditioning provides air at variable
temperature, direction and flow rate. Air can
also be recirculated.
Temperature controls
For maximum air conditioning, rotate the
temperature controls fully counterclockwise.
This activates the air conditioning and air
recirculation, and sets the blower speed at
maximum and the air distribution to face-level.
Rotate the temperature controls fully clockwise
to provide maximum heating to the foot/screen
vents.
Note: The system will not achieve a
temperature differential from left to right of
more than 4°C (7°F).
Note: When in stationary traffic, with
automatic transmission, select P or N to
increase air conditioning efficiency.
Economy mode
Economy mode switches off air
consumption.
Air recirculation
Air recirculation prevents the entry
of traffic fumes and influences the
dehumidifying and cooling
performance of the air-conditioning system.
Note: The windows can mist up if air is
recirculated for a prolonged period.
General notes
x For the automatic temperature control
system to function efficiently, all windows
and the sunroof should be closed, and the
air intake vents free from ice, snow, leaves
or other debris.
x The air conditioning does not work when
the engine is off.

121 122
 Climate control
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
3 1
4 11
5 8
6 temperature controls fully counterclockwise.
E80975
1. Auto mode. Press to switch on/off.
2. Blower control. Rotate to change blower
speed.
3. Temperature controls. Rotate to adjust
temperature left or right.
4. Air distribution buttons. Press to select
direction of airflow.
5. Air recirculation control - manual. Press
to switch on/off.
6. Air recirculation control - with pollution
sensor. Press to switch on/off.
7. Off. Press to switch off.
8. Economy mode. Press to switch on.
9. Rear environment. Press to control rear
climate control.
10. Heated rear screen. Press to switch
on/off.
11. Heated windscreen. Press to switch
on/off.
12. Defrost mode. Press to switch on/off.
The range of controls available may vary
depending on the vehicle. The variants are
shown as insets to the main illustration.
123
2 3
12
10
7 9
Note: The system may include windscreen
heating.
Note: Each switch illuminates when switched
on.
Operation of controls
The air conditioning system features automatic
temperature and air distribution control and is
programmed to maintain optimum levels of
comfort within the vehicle in all but the most
severe climatic conditions.
Auto mode
Auto mode is suitable for most conditions.
x Press AUTO to switch on.
x Rotate the temperature control to select
the required temperature, left and right.
In Auto mode, air conditioning, air distribution,
blower speeds and air recirculation are
automatic to maintain the interior environment
regardless of conditions outside the vehicle.
Climate control
The air distribution and blower controls can be
operated independently to override Auto mode.
If you do this, the indicator lamp on the AUTO
switch turns off. The circular lamp represents
the blower, the rectangular lamp represents air
distribution. Press AUTO again to return to
Auto mode.
Note: If you use the air distribution and blower
controls independently, the system may not be
able to maintain the temperature.
Temperature controls
For maximum air conditioning, rotate the
This mode activates the air conditioning and air
recirculation. It also sets maximum blower
speed and selects the face-level vents.
Note: The system will not achieve a
temperature differential from left to right of
more than 4°C (7°F).
Note: When in stationary traffic, select P or N
in an automatic transmission vehicle to
maximise air conditioning efficiency.
124
Air distribution control
Note: Position the control between two
symbols to obtain air flow from both positions.
Windscreen and side window vents
E83498
Face level vents
Foot level vents
E80979
Air recirculation - manual
Air recirculation prevents the entry
of traffic fumes and influences the
dehumidifying and cooling
performance of the air-conditioning system.
Note: The windows can mist up if air is
recirculated for a prolonged period.
Air recirculation - with pollution sensor
Press the button once to activate air
recirculation and a second time to
activate automatic air recirculation.
Press the button a third time to switch off.
Automatic air recirculation is useful to prevent
the entry of traffic fumes.
Note: The windows can mist up if air is
recirculated for a prolonged period.
Off
Press to switch the system off; the
indicator lamp in the switch will
illuminate.
Economy mode
Press the ECON button to switch off
air conditioning and reduce fuel
consumption.
 Climate control
Rear environment
The rear environment unit provides
E80983 climate control to the rear
passengers.
x Press the button once to control the rear
heating and air conditioning using the front
controls only. The upper amber lamp is
illuminated.
x Press the button a second time to allow the
rear passengers to have manual control.
The lower amber light is illuminated.
x Off: press the button a third time to switch
off.
Note: Do not obstruct the vent on the side of
the rear quarter panel.
Defrost mode
Use defrost mode if the windscreen
E80986 is misting or covered in ice.
General notes
x For the automatic temperature control
system to function efficiently, all windows
and the sunroof should be closed, and the
air intake vents free from ice, snow, leaves
or other debris.
x The air conditioning compressor will not
work when the engine is off.
125
Climate control
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS
CONTROLS The screen heater(s) will operate for a timed
period before automatically switching off.
Heated windscreen
Heated rear screen
Note: The heated windscreen and
rear screen only operate while
engine is running.
CAUTION
1 2 3 To avoid damage to the heating
elements, do not attach labels to the rear
screen. Also, do not scrape or use abrasive
materials to clean the inside of the rear screen.
Exterior mirrors
The exterior mirrors automatically disperse ice
or mist. The mirror heaters are controlled
E81009 according to the external temperature and
wiper status.
1 Temperature control: rotate clockwise
(red dot) to increase the temperature of
the incoming air.
2 Distribution control:-rotate fully
counterclockwise to direct air to the third
row seats vent-rotate fully clockwise to
direct air to the rear seat upper vents and
the rear pillar vents.
3 Blower control: rotate clockwise to
increase airflow.
Note: The panel is only active when the rear
environment button on the front control panel
is set to manual mode.
126
 Climate control
AUXILIARY HEATER
WARNINGS
If the fuel-burning heater has been used
recently, do not touch the unit’s
exhaust when working in the engine
compartment.
When refuelling the vehicle, turn off the
starter switch to ensure that the
fuel-burning heater is switched off.
When the engine is started in cold weather, the
auxiliary heater is automatically switched on to
provide extra heat to help warm up the engine.
If this occurs, exhaust fumes from the heater
may be seen coming from under the bonnet.
ELECTRIC SUNROOF
WARNINGS
Extreme care must be taken to ensure
that none of the occupants have any
part of their body in a position where it could
be trapped by the closing sunroof. Although an
anti-trap mechanism is fitted, serious injuries
can occur.
For their safety, when leaving children
unattended in the vehicle always
remove the key from the starter switch.
CAUTION
Wherever possible, remove any snow,
ice, dirt and leaves etc. from the sunroof
before closing. Failure to do so may damage
the sunroof mechanism.
127
E81042
The sunroof can be operated when the starter
switch is in positions I or II and for 40 seconds
after position 0 has been selected, provided
that a front door is not opened.
x To open the sunroof to the tilted position,
briefly press the rear of the switch. The
roof will move to its tilted position.
x To fully open the sunroof from the tilted
position, briefly press the rear of the
switch again. While the sunroof is moving,
a further press of the switch will stop the
movement.
x To close the sunroof to the tilted position,
briefly press the front of the switch.
x To close the sunroof fully, press and hold
the front of the switch. Releasing the
switch before the roof is fully closed will
stop movement.
Note: If the starter key is not in position II, the
switch has to be pressed and held to operate
the sunroof.
Climate control
Anti-trap mechanism
WARNING
The anti-trap mechanism does not
operate when closing the roof from the
tilted position. The sunroof can cause serious
injury should a body part become trapped.
Always ensure that the sunroof is free from
obstructions before closing.
If the sunroof encounters resistance while
closing, the operation is interrupted and the
roof opens slightly, to prevent the sunroof
trapping vulnerable parts of the body or other
obstructions.
It is possible to override the anti-trap
mechanism when movement is restricted by
ice or dirt, by pressing and holding the front of
the switch whilst the roof is closing.
Sunroof calibration
If the battery is disconnected when the sunroof
is open, the sunroof may need to be
recalibrated, as follows:
1. With the battery connected, turn the starter
switch to position ll.
2. Press and hold the front of the switch for
20 seconds. The sunroof will start to
move. Continue to hold the switch until the
sunroof completes one full open and
closing cycle. When the sunroof stops
moving, release the switch.
Note: Calibration will not function if the battery
voltage is too low.
128
 Convenience features Convenience features
Convenience features

SUN VISORS INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER CLOCK To adjust the hours, rotate the control. Press
the rotary control to accept the hours setting.
Setting the time - standard audio system The highlight moves on to minutes. Repeat to
set the minutes and press the rotary control to
Clock Cancel accept. OK is highlighted and a further press of
AUTO
Set the rotary control accepts the settings.
Set 12-24 hour display

E80434

Clock Cancel Clock Cancel

The sun visor can be pivoted downwards, or to Set
Set
the side as required to reduce glare. E80432

SUN BLINDS Rotate the dimmer control to vary the level of

instrument pack illumination.

Clock Set
Clock PM 12/24
Set 06 : 15 OK

Clock Clock Set

Set AM 09 : 15 12/24 24h r
E80433 OK

Pull the sunroof blind, across the sunroof

aperture, until it locks in place.
E80429
To open, push vertically on the textured part of
the blind handle. The blind will retract into the Press the MENU OK button. Turn the rotary
panel between the sunroofs. Clock
Set AM 09 : 43 control until Clock Set is highlighted, and press
OK the control again. Rotate the control to scroll
between 12 and 24, then press the control to
E80428 confirm.
Press the MENU OK button, turn the right-hand
rotary control to scroll to the clock menu, then
press the rotary control to select Set.

129 130
 Convenience features Convenience features
Setting the time - premium audio system CIGAR LIGHTER ASHTRAY
09 CAUTION
Do not use the ashtrays for disposing of
Cancel waste paper or other combustible items.
PTY Seek Time
FM Scan Set AM 09 The resulting fire may cause death or serious
1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6
injury.

32
News
Clock
1 2 3 4 5 6
Time E80426
Set AM 09 32
1 2 3 4 5 6 Push the centre of the faceplate to reveal the
lighter.
12 24
E80431 With the starter switch turned on, press the
lighter in to heat up. When it has reached the
Time To adjust the hours, rotate the control. Press correct temperature it will partially eject.
12/24 12 the rotary control to confirm.
1 2 3 4 5 6
x Only hold the cigar lighter by the handle.
Once the hours have been confirmed, the x Do not plug accessories into the cigar
minutes can be set in the same way. The E80423
lighter socket. Use the auxiliary power
E80430 display will return to the main menu. sockets provided. Push the bottom edge of the ashtray cover to
Press the MENU OK button. Use the rotary open (left inset).
control to highlight Clock, then press the To remove the ashtray, open fully, then pull the
control to select. Rotate the control to scroll ashtray forwards.
between 12 and 24, then press the control to
confirm.

131 132
 Convenience features Convenience features
AUXILIARY POWER SOCKETS Rear auxiliary power sockets CUP HOLDERS
CAUTIONS
1
Only Land Rover approved accessories
should be plugged into a power sockets.
Using any other equipment may damage the
vehicle's electrical systems. If you are in any
doubt contact your Dealer. 1
The engine should be running when 5 5
using accessories for long periods.
Failure to do so can discharge the battery. 2 2
E80421
Note: Power sockets can be used to power
approved accessories that use a maximum of 2
Raise cover to access the auxiliary power 3 3
180 Watts. socket.
Front auxiliary power socket
5 5

1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465

4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7
PQRS
8
TUV
9
WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
4 4 3

E80422

On 7-seat vehicles, a third power socket is

fitted in the left-hand side trim in the loadspace
E80420
area.
5 4
Pull down the hinged cover to access the
socket.

E80419

1. Front passenger's cup holder

2. Front seat cup holders
3. Second-row seats cup holders
4. Rear compartment cup holders
5. Door bottle holders

133 134
 Convenience features
WARNINGS
The cup and bottle holders should only
be used for soft containers. Containers
which are hard (cans, metal, ceramic, hard
plastic etc.) can cause serious injury or death
if the vehicle is involved in an accident, or
subject to sudden braking or direction change.
Do not drink or use the cup holders
when driving. Doing so can affect
concentration, which may result in loss of
control.
Do not carry open drinks containers.
Hot liquids can cause serious injury
when spilled and may damage the vehicle.
Note: The inner cores of the cup holders can be
removed for cleaning or to make a holder for a
larger drinks container.
135
Convenience features
CENTRE CONSOLE COOL BOX
CAUTION
The cool box should be switched off
when it is not needed to protect the
vehicle's battery.
When fitted, the cool box replaces the centre
console storage area.
E80541
Lift the catch at the front of the lid to access the
storage area.
Card holder
E80549
The cool box is switched on/off using the
switch on the inside front lip of the cool box.
There is a short delay between pressing the
switch, and illumination of the indicator.
If the battery voltage is too low to operate the
cool box with the engine switched off, the
E80542 indicator will not illuminate.
Cooling performance is maximised when the
On the front inside face of the centre console is
cooling tray is used. The tray can be clipped
a feature to hold a credit/toll card.
onto the inside of the main lid when not
CD storage required.
A rubber mat in the bottom of the centre Note: The cool box will continue to operate for
console is designed to hold CD cases. a short period after the starter switch is turned
to position 0.
136
 Convenience features Convenience features
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS MEMORY FUNCTION
WARNING
1 I or II.
Before activating the seat memory,
ensure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of obstructions
and that all occupants are clear of moving
1 parts.
2 pre-set button 2.
2 1
3 message centre and a single chime will
2
E80425
3 When movement is complete, a confirmation
1. Memory store button.
2. Memory pre-set buttons.
3. Seat adjustment controls. See ELECTRIC
SEATS (page 54).
Up to three driver seat, exterior mirror and
4 4
electric steering column positions can be
stored in the memory. The reverse mirror
dipping feature can also be stored. See
EXTERIOR MIRRORS (page 109).
4 3
E80534
Setting a memory pre-set
1. Insert the starter key and turn it to position
2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors.
3. Press the memory store button 1 to
activate the memory function.
4. Within five seconds, press the desired
5. Memory Stored will be displayed on the
sound to confirm.
Recalling a stored seat position
Press the pre-set button associated with the
desired driving position. The seat, mirrors and
steering column positions will move to the
position stored on that pre-set.
message will display in the message centre and
a double chime will sound.
Note: To stop seat movement at any time,
press any seat adjustment control.
Lazy entry
When this feature is enabled, the vehicle stores
the seating and mirror positions for each
remote control. Next time the vehicle is
unlocked using a remote control, the position
of the seat, mirrors and steering column will
adjust to the last used position.
This feature can be disabled or enabled in the
Settings option accessed via the trip computer.
See TRIP COMPUTER (page 115).

1. Glovebox
WARNING
2. Lower glovebox
Ensure that any items stored in the
3. Centre console vehicle are secure and cannot move. If
4. Rear storage bins the vehicle is involved in an accident, subject
to sudden braking or direction change, loose
items can cause serious injury.

137 138
 Starting the engine
Starting the engine
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Never start the engine or leave it
running, when the vehicle is in an
enclosed space. Exhaust gases are poisonous
and can cause unconsciousness and death if
inhaled.
CAUTIONS
Do not run the diesel engine above idle
speed until the oil pressure warning light
extinguishes. This will ensure that the engine
and turbo-charger bearings are properly
lubricated before being run at speed.
Similarly, always allow the engine to idle for 10
seconds before switching off.
STARTER SWITCH
E80362
Starter switch key position functions:
Position 0
x Steering locked.
x Some lighting circuits are operational,
including sidelamps and hazard warning
lamps.
x With the driver’s door open, the seat
memory facility is operational.
Position I
x Steering unlocked.
139
x Clock, audio system and cigar lighter can
now be operated.
x Wipers and washers are operational.
Position II
x All instruments, warning indicators and
electrical circuits are operational.
Position III
x The starting sequence is initiated. Note
that operation of some electrical functions
will be interrupted during engine cranking.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK
WARNING
It is impossible to steer the vehicle
when the steering lock is engaged. Do
not remove the key, or turn it to position 0,
while the vehicle is in motion.
E92012
To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key
into the starter switch and rotate key to
position I. If the key will not rotate, turn the
steering wheel left or right while rotating the
key. When you remove the key, turn the
steering wheel until the lock engages.
Starting the engine
STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Check that the electric parking brake is
applied and that the gear selector is in the
P (Park) or N (Neutral) position (automatic
transmission) or Neutral position (manual
transmission) or the clutch pedal is
depressed.
2. Switch off all non-essential electrical
equipment to maximise the available
battery power for starting.
3. Insert the starter key and turn the switch to
position II.
4. Do not press the accelerator pedal while
starting.
Diesel engines - wait until the glow
plug warning indicator in the
instrument pack extinguishes then
turn the key to position III to start the engine.
Petrol engines - turn the key to position III and
immediately release it. The starter will
automatically switch off when the engine
starts.
In extreme off-road driving conditions, it may
be desirable to start the engine with a gear
engaged, e.g. a steep hill start. Use the
following procedure to start the engine of a
vehicle with manual transmission:
1. Press the clutch and select a gear.
2. Release the clutch.
3. Release the electric parking brake. An
interlock will prevent the engine from
cranking until the park brake is released.
Do not release the electric parking brake
before a gear is selected.
4. Start the engine.
Note: The battery charging and oil pressure
warning indicators should extinguish as soon
as the engine is running.
140
In temperate climates, do not operate the
starter for longer than 10 seconds. If the
engine fails to start, switch off and wait 10
seconds before re-using the starter.
CAUTION
If the engine fails to start, do not
continue cranking as this will discharge
the battery. It may also damage the catalytic
convertor due to unburnt fuel passing through
the exhaust.
Do not drive if a misfire is suspected, and do
not attempt to clear a misfire by pressing the
accelerator. Seek qualified assistance.
In very cold climates the oil pressure warning
light may take several seconds to extinguish.
Similarly, engine cranking times will also
increase. At -25°C (-13°F) the starter motor
may require continuous operation for as long
as 30 seconds before the engine will start.
Warming-up
In the interests of fuel economy and reduced
engine wear, drive the vehicle straight away.
Harsh acceleration or labouring the engine
before normal operating temperature has been
reached can damage the engine.
Driving
If your vehicle is burning excessive oil (blue
smoke from the exhaust), catalyst efficiency
will progressively reduce. Seek qualified
assistance.
 Starting the engine Transmission
Transmission

DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)
The Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) forms part of
the emissions reduction system fitted to Land
Rover vehicles. The DPF will remove a high
proportion of the harmful carbon microspheres
(soot) before they leave the exhaust. It
achieves this by filtering out the particles,
which are then stored until they are burnt away
and the filter is emptied.
Regeneration
The regeneration procedure produces high
temperatures in the DPF. Heat can be felt
radiating from beneath the vehicle, which is
normal and not a cause for concern. However,
the vehicle should not be parked over
combustible material, particularly during dry
weather. The heat generated could be sufficient
to start a fire when in close proximity to
combustible material such as long dry grass,
paper etc.
Unlike a normal filter which requires periodic
replacement, the DPF has been designed to
regenerate, or clean itself to maintain operating
efficiency. The regeneration process takes
place automatically in most cases. However,
some unfavourable driving conditions mean
that the regeneration process must be initiated
deliberately by the driver.
Regeneration procedure
If DPF FULL, SEE HANDBOOK appears in the
message centre, carry out the following
procedure.
Note: At all times during this procedure you
should observe all relevant speed limits, laws,
and regulations. Always take account of traffic
and weather conditions, and drive with
consideration for other road users.
1. Drive the vehicle until the engine reaches
normal operating temperature. The engine
should not be left idling to achieve working
temperature.
2. Drive the vehicle for a further twenty
minutes, keeping the speed above 48 km/h
(30 mph), and the engine speed between
2 500 and 4 000 rpm.
3. If regeneration is successful the warning
message will disappear. If the message
remains repeat the process.
Note: When driving off-road during the
regeneration process, greater accelerator pedal
use may be required.
Note: If the warning message remains after
following the regeneration process three times,
contact your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer for assistance.
Warning messages
Failure to take appropriate action when a
warning message appears may result in
damage to the engine, DPF system, increased
vehicle emissions, and costly repairs.
If regeneration cannot be achieved
automatically by the system, due to short
journeys for example, the driver will be notified
by a warning message.
DPF FULL, SEE HANDBOOK
If this message appears the driver should carry
out the DPF regeneration procedure as soon as
possible.
DPF FULL VISIT DEALER
If this message appears the vehicle should be
taken to your Land Rover dealer/Authorised
Repairer as soon as possible.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
CAUTION
Selection of reverse gear is prevented
when the vehicle is travelling in excess of
24 km/h (15 mph). Never attempt to engage
gear while the vehicle is in forward motion.
This may result in serious transmission
damage and costly repairs.
E80496
When the gearbox is in neutral, the gear lever
is spring-loaded to lie naturally between 3 and
4 gear positions. Extra pressure will be needed
to move across to engage reverse gear.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, especially with the keys in the
starter switch.
Park P should be engaged and the park
brake applied when the vehicle is
stationary. The vehicle can move unexpectedly
with any other gear position selected, which
may result in death or serious injuries to
people or animals outside of the vehicle.
WARNINGS
Always select P and turn the starter
switch to position 0 before leaving the
vehicle.
Selector lever positions
CAUTIONS
Never select Park P position while the
vehicle is in motion. Doing so may cause
serious damage to the transmission.
Never select Reverse R position while the
vehicle is in forward motion. Doing so
may cause serious damage to the
transmission.
Never select a forward gear while the
vehicle is reversing. Doing so may cause
serious damage to the transmission.
Do not rev the engine or allow it to run
above normal idle speed while selecting
D or R, or while the vehicle is stationary with
any gear selected.
Do not allow the vehicle to remain
stationary for any length of time with a
gear selected and the engine running. Always
select P or N if the engine is to idle for a
prolonged period.

141 142
 Transmission
N - Neutral
Select N when the vehicle is stationary and the
engine is required to idle for a period. The
electric parking brake must be applied.
If the vehicle remains stationary, the selector
lever becomes locked in N and it is necessary
to depress the brake pedal and press the
P selector release button in order to move the
selector lever.
P
P P
R D - Drive
R R
++ N Before selecting drive ensure that the brakes
M N
S D are applied. Select D for all normal driving;
- -
D automatic gear changing occurs on all forward
gears, according to road speed and accelerator
E80497 position.
An illuminated indicator on the selector panel Kick-down in automatic mode
and a number or letter in the instrument pack Press the accelerator pedal to the full extent of
display identify the selected gear. its travel, a click will be felt through the
accelerator pedal. Up to a certain speed, this
P - Park
will cause an immediate downshift to the
This position locks the transmission and lowest appropriate gear, followed by rapid
should be selected before switching the engine acceleration. Once the pedal is relaxed, normal
off. Ensure that the vehicle is stationary, with gear change speeds will resume, dependent
the electric parking brake applied, before upon road speed and accelerator pedal
selecting P. position.
The selector release button must be pressed Note: Moderate accelerator pressure may also
before moving the selector lever into P.
result in a downshift in the transmission,
With the starter key in position II, press the depending on vehicle speed.
selector release button and the foot brake to
Sport mode
move the selector lever out of P.
In Sport mode the transmission will stay in the
Note: The selector lever cannot be moved out
lower gears for longer.
of P unless the starter keys is in position II.
R - Reverse
Before selecting R ensure that the vehicle is
stationary, with the brakes applied. The
selector release button must be pressed before
moving the selector lever into Reverse.
143
Transmission
P P
M M
S ++ N S
M M
S D
E80499
To select Sport mode, move the gear lever
from the D position towards the left hand side
of the vehicle. The word SPORT will appear in
the instrument pack display and the LED to the
side of the selector lever illuminates.
Sport mode can be deselected at any time, by
returning the lever to the D position.
To return to Sport mode after CommandShift
has been selected move the selector into the D
position. Then move it back into Sport mode.
Note: On vehicles fitted with the terrain
response system, Sport mode is only available
when the Terrain Response General program is
selected.
CommandShift™
CommandShift gear selection can be used as
an alternative to fully automatic transmission
and is particularly effective when rapid
acceleration or engine braking are required.
144
P
R
++ N
S D
-
E80500
1. With D selected, move the gear selector
from the D position towards the left-hand
side of the vehicle.
2. The transmission then automatically
selects the ratio most appropriate to the
vehicle's road speed and accelerator
position. Move the selector forward (+) or
backward (-) to manually select a higher or
lower gear. TRANSMISSION
COMMANDSHIFT SELECTED appears in
the message centre.
3. Each forward (+) movement of the selector
lever will change the transmission to a
higher gear, while rearward (-) movement
will change to a lower gear. The selected
gear will be indicated in the instrument
pack display.
4. To deselect CommandShift, move the
selector lever back to the D position.
Note: If a Terrain Response special program is
active, the automatic transmission will go
straight into CommandShift when the lever is
moved to the Sport/CommandShift position.
 Transmission
CommandShift in High range
If CommandShift is selected in high range, gear
1 must be selected to move off from stationary.
Normal sequential gear changing can be
utilised once the vehicle is moving.
CommandShift in Low range
If CommandShift is selected in low range, the
vehicle can move off from stationary in gears 1,
2 or 3.
Kick-down in CommandShift
When in CommandShift, kick-down overrides
the manual gear selection, to provide increased
acceleration.
In high range, with CommandShift selected,
kick-down will cause a downshift to the lowest
gear possible for the current speed.
Transmission
Hill ascent, trailer and high altitude TRANSFER GEARBOX Range change indicators
The lower gears are engaged for longer, to In Hi, the Hi range indicator lamp at the switch
minimise gear changing during hill ascents or CAUTION is illuminated.
towing. This also helps reduce the impact of Do not use auxiliary equipment, such as In Lo, the green warning indicator in
reduced engine torque at high altitudes. roller generators, that are driven by only the instrument pack and the Lo
one or two wheels of the vehicle, as they will range indicator lamp at the switch
Hill descent cause failure of the transfer gearbox. are illuminated.
A low gear will be selected to provide
maximum engine braking. Hi to Lo change illustrated
High temperature
The transmission will select a gear change
pattern designed to aid the cooling process.
Transmission fault
If the transmission develops a fault, F is
displayed in the gear position display and only
limited gears are available. Seek immediate
assistance from your Land Rover Dealer/ E80493

Electronically selected automatic modes Authorised Repairer.

The transfer gearbox allows selection of high
In automatic mode or Sport mode (not Messages or low range gears.
available in CommandShift), the gear change
The following messages could appear in the
points will adjust to suit a variety of driving HIGH range (Hi)
message centre. Market criteria mean that
conditions. Hi should be used for all normal road driving
some messages will not apply to your vehicle
and will therefore not appear. and also for off-road driving across dry, level
terrain.
Message Meaning What to do? E80494
LOW range (Lo)
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that automatic Seek qualified assistance While a range change is in progress, the range
Lo should only be used in situations where low
FAULT transmission has a fault. immediately. indicator lamps will flash as follows:
speed manoeuvring is necessary.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that an automatic Seek qualified assistance Hi to Lo change
Also use Lo for more extreme off-road
FAULT AND transmission fault has occurred and immediately. x The Lo range lamp and indicator flash
conditions. Do not attempt to use the Lo for
OVERHEAT the temperature is too high. during the change and then illuminate
normal road driving.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that automatic Seek qualified assistance constantly.
FAULT LIMITED transmission has a fault and immediately. Range changing x The Hi range lamp extinguishes when the
GEARS AVAILABLE performance may be affected. The recommended method of changing range change is complete.
is with the vehicle stationary. For vehicles x A warning chime will sound and LOW
equipped with a message centre, the messages RANGE ENGAGED is briefly displayed in
displayed will assist the experienced driver in the message centre.
carrying out a range change on-the-move.
Lo to Hi change
x The Hi range lamp and the Lo range
indicator both flash during the change.

145 146
 Transmission
x The Hi range lamp illuminates constantly
when the change is complete.
x Lo range indicator extinguishes when the
change is complete.
x A warning chime will sound and HIGH
RANGE ENGAGED is briefly displayed in
the message centre.
Stationary range changing
With the vehicle stationary, select neutral.
Move the transfer gear switch towards the
range required and release. The switch returns
to the default position and range change status
will be confirmed after several seconds.
Range changing on the move
Note: If the vehicle speed is too high when a
range change is requested, a warning chime
sounds and SPEED TOO HIGH FOR RANGE
CHANGE appears in the message centre.
Automatic Transmission - High to Low
1. With the vehicle slowing down and
travelling at between 40 km/h (24 mph)
and 3 km/h (2 mph) select N.
2. If N is not selected before using the
transfer gear switch, the message SELECT
NEUTRAL FOR RANGE CHANGE is
displayed and a warning chime sounds.
3. Pull the transfer gear switch rearwards to
the Lo position and release.
4. The switch returns to the default position
and range change status will be confirmed
after several seconds. A drive gear cannot
be selected until the range change is
complete.
147
Manual transmission - High to Low
1. With the vehicle slowing down and
travelling at between 20 km/h (12 mph)
and 3 km/h (2 mph) depress the clutch and
select neutral.
2. If neutral is not selected before using the
transfer gear switch, the message SELECT
NEUTRAL FOR RANGE CHANGE is
displayed and a warning chime sounds.
3. Pull the transfer gear switch rearwards to
the Lo position and release.
4. The switch returns to the default position
and range change status will be confirmed
after several seconds. If a gear is selected
before the range change is complete, the
change will cancel and may leave the
transfer box in neutral. An audible warning
will be given.
5. After a failed range change, it will be
necessary to reselect neutral in the
gearbox and repeat the range change
procedure.
Changing from Low to High
With the vehicle travelling no faster than 60
km/h (38 mph), select N or neutral. Press the
front of the transfer gear switch to the Hi
position and release it.
Indication of the range change status is the
same as for the stationary method.
Now select D or the most appropriate manual
gear for the vehicle speed.
Transmission
Transmission warning indicators and
messages
If a fault occurs within the transmission, either
a lamp will illuminate in the instrument pack or
a message will be displayed in the main
message centre.
The transmission warning lamp
illuminates amber when the
operation of the transmission is
limited. Seek qualified assistance as soon as
possible.
The transmission warning lamp illuminates red
when the transmission is unable to function
properly. Stop as soon as safety permits and
turn off the engine. Leave the vehicle with the
starter switch turned off for five minutes and
then turn the starter switch back on. If the red
light is still on, do not use the vehicle.
Note: This warning indicator is not fitted to
vehicles with a message centre.
The transmission temperature
warning lamp illuminates red when
the transmission oil temperature
reaches a pre-determined limit. Stop the
vehicle where safety permits and switch off the
engine. Allow the transmission to cool for one
hour before continuing.
Note: This warning indicator is not fitted to
vehicles with a message centre.
148
 Transmission Brakes
Brakes

Messages PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION If the indicator illuminates red while the vehicle
The following messages could appear in the is being driven, suspect low brake fluid level or
Foot brake a fault with the Electronic Brake Distribution
message centre. Market criteria mean that
some messages will not apply to your vehicle (EBD) system. Stop the vehicle as soon as
WARNINGS
and will therefore not appear. safety permits and check and top up brake fluid
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal if necessary. If the indicator remains
while travelling as this may overheat the illuminated, seek qualified assistance before
Message Meaning What to do?
brakes, reduce their efficiency and cause continuing.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that a fault has Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe excessive wear.
FAULT occurred with the electronic rear to do so. Never allow the vehicle to coast Servo assistance
STOP SAFELY differential. (freewheel) with the engine turned off. The braking system is servo assisted when the
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that a fault has Reduce speed and seek qualified The engine must be running to provide full engine is running. Without this assistance
FAULT occurred with the transfer box assistance immediately. braking assistance. The brakes will still greater braking effort is necessary, resulting in
TRACTION REDUCED control system. Off-road performance will be function with the engine off, but far more longer stopping distances. Always observe the
reduced. pressure will be required to operate them. following precautions:
TRANSMISSION Rear differential temperature has Reduce speed and seek qualified If the red brake warning indicator x Take care when being towed with the
OVERHEAT reached or is approaching the assistance immediately. illuminates, safely bring the vehicle to a engine turned off.
SLOW DOWN overheat threshold. stop, as quickly as possible. Seek qualified x If the engine stops while the vehicle is in
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that a fault has Reduce speed and seek qualified assistance before continuing. motion, bring the vehicle to a halt as
RANGE CHANGE occurred which prevents the assistance immediately. Never place non-approved floor quickly as traffic conditions allow, and do
NOT AVAILABLE transfer box from changing range. matting or any other obstructions not pump the brake pedal. The braking
under the brake pedal. This restricts pedal system may lose any remaining
TRANSMISSION Transfer box control module fault. Reduce speed and seek qualified
travel and braking efficiency. assistance.
TRACTION assistance immediately.
REDUCED The brake system warning indicator Brake pads
SELECT NEUTRAL Alerts driver that range change will Select neutral. illuminates amber and red briefly in Brake pads require a period of bedding in. For
FOR RANGE not occur until neutral is selected on the instrument pack when the the first 800 km (500 miles), you should avoid
CHANGE the transmission. starter switch is turned to position II, and situations where heavy braking is required.
monitors five separate brake functions.
SPEED TOO HIGH Driver has requested range change Reduce speed to 40 km/h (25mph)
x Emergency Brake Assist (EBA) - amber Wet conditions
FOR RANGE when vehicle speed is too high. on automatic transmission or 20
CHANGE km/h (12 mph) on manual x Brake pad wear - amber Driving through water or even very heavy rain
transmission. may adversely affect braking efficiency. Always
x Electric parking brake (EPB) - amber
dry the braking surfaces by intermittent light
x Electronic Brake Distribution (EBD) - red application of the brakes.
x Brake fluid level - red
If the indicator remains amber after starting, or
illuminates whilst driving, suspect a fault with
the Emergency Brake Assist (EBA) system or
worn brake pads. Drive with care and seek
qualified assistance urgently.

149 150
 Brakes Brakes
Messages HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ABS ABS warning indicator
The following messages could appear in the If the ABS warning indicator
message centre. WARNINGS
remains on or illuminates whilst
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) cannot driving, a fault with the ABS system
Message Meaning What to do? overcome the physical limitations of is indicated. Drive with care, avoiding heavy
braking distance. Nor can it overcome the lack brake application, and seek qualified assistance
CHECK Brake fluid in reservoir below Seek qualified assistance
of grip on a road surface, aquaplaning on urgently.
BRAKE FLUID recommended level. immediately.
water for example.
CHECK Brake pads worn beyond the Seek qualified assistance ABS and off-road driving
Braking distance is increased on
BRAKE PADS service limit. immediately. Anti-lock braking will operate in off-road
slippery surfaces. This applies to all
PRESS FOOTBRAKE A switch release has been detected Follow the instructions to achieve a vehicles, even those with ABS. driving conditions, but on certain surfaces
AND PARKBRAKE without brake pedal contact. manual release. reliance on the system is unwise. ABS cannot
The driver should not be tempted to
SWITCH compensate for driver error or inexperience on
take risks when driving, in the hope that
TO RELEASE difficult off-road surfaces.
ABS will correct errors of judgement. In all
PRESS FOOTBRAKE A switch release has been detected Follow the instructions to achieve a cases, it remains the driver's responsibility to Soft surfaces
OR CLUTCH without brake or clutch pedal manual release. drive with due care and attention, paying On soft, deep surfaces such as powdery snow,
AND PARKBRAKE contact. particular attention to the effects of speed, sand or gravel the braking distance will be
SWITCH weather, road conditions etc. increased. This is because the natural action of
TO RELEASE
ABS allows maximum brake pressure, and thus a locked wheel (which cannot happen with ABS
maximum braking efficiency, to be applied. operating) is to build a wedge of surface
This prevents the road wheels locking and material in front of the wheels which reduces
enables the driver to retain steering control the stopping distance.
during heavy braking under most road
conditions. Steep slopes
If the vehicle is stopped on a steep, slippery
During emergency braking conditions, ABS
slope, it may begin to slide even with the
constantly monitors the speed of each wheel
brakes applied. This is because without wheel
and varies the brake pressure to each,
rotation signal for the ABS. Briefly release the
according to the grip available. The constant
brakes to permit some wheel movement, then
alteration of brake pressure can be felt as a
re-apply the brakes to allow ABS to gain
pulsing sensation through the brake pedal.
control.
This is not a cause for concern.
x Do not pump the brake pedal at any time;
this will interrupt operation of the system
and may increase the stopping distance.
x Never place additional floor matting or any
other obstruction under the brake pedal.
This restricts pedal travel and may impair
brake efficiency.

151 152
 Brakes
Emergency Brake Assist (EBA)
If rapid full brake application is made,
Emergency Brake Assist (EBA) automatically
boosts the braking force to the maximum and
helps to stop the vehicle. Also, if the driver
brakes more slowly, but with sufficient brake
pressure to activate Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) on both front wheels, the system
automatically increases the braking force so
that all four wheels are in ABS control,
optimising the performance of the ABS system.
If the brake pedal is released, EBA will cease
operation.
A fault with the EBA system is indicated by
illumination of the amber brake warning
indicator.
Electronic Brake Distribution (EBD)
Electronic Brake Distribution (EBD), balances
braking forces between front and rear axles to
maintain maximum braking efficiency.
For example, under light loads EBD applies less
effort to the rear brakes to maintain vehicle
stability; conversely allowing full braking effort
to the rear wheels when the vehicle is towing or
is heavily laden.
A fault with the EBD system is indicated by
illumination of the red brake warning indicator.
Cornering Brake Control (CBC)
Cornering Brake Control (CBC) is an advanced
form of ABS, which maintains vehicle stability
and steering control during braking whilst
cornering or changing lanes at speed.
153
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB)
WARNING
Do not rely on the Electric Parking
Brake (EPB) to hold the vehicle
stationary if the brake system warning
indicator is illuminated or the EPB warning
indicator is flashing. Seek qualified assistance
urgently.
Note: If the vehicle is used in severe off-road
conditions such as wading, deep mud, etc.,
additional maintenance and adjustment of the
parking brake will be required. Consult your
Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
Applying the electric parking brake
1 2
E81356
1 Right-hand drive vehicles
2 Left-hand drive vehicles
With the vehicle stationary, pull up the lever
(arrowed) and release it. The red EPB warning
indicator in the instrument pack will illuminate.
If the lever is operated while the vehicle is
travelling at less than 3 km/h (2 mph), the
vehicle will be brought to a stop abruptly. The
stop lamps will not illuminate.
Brakes
Applying the electric parking brake
automatically
On manual transmission vehicles the electric
parking brake will be applied automatically
when the starter key is removed. This operation
must only be carried out when the vehicle is
stationary.
This feature can be inhibited by turning the
starter switch on and off, then pressing down
on the lever while removing the starter key.
Dynamic operation
CAUTION
Driving the vehicle with the electric
parking brake applied or repeated use of
the parking brake to decelerate the vehicle may
cause serious damage to the brake system.
In an emergency, with the vehicle travelling at
more than 3 km/h (2 mph), pulling up on the
lever and holding it gives a gradual reduction in
speed. The brake warning indicator will
illuminate accompanied by a harsh sound and
CAUTION PARKBRAKE APPLIED appears in
the message centre. The stop lamps will
illuminate.
Releasing or depressing the lever will cancel
the electric parking brake application.
154
Releasing the electric parking brake
CAUTIONS
The electric parking brake operates on
the rear wheels of the vehicle and hence
secure parking of the vehicle is dependent on
being on a hard and stable surface.
Do not rely on the electric parking brake
to operate effectively if the wheels have
been immersed in mud and water.
To disengage the electric parking brake, the
starter switch must be in position II. Apply
pressure to the foot brake on automatic
transmission vehicles, (clutch pedal in vehicles
with a manual gearbox) while pressing down
on the parking brake lever.
Automatic release - manual gearbox
models
If the vehicle is stationary with the electric
parking brake applied, press the accelerator
and release the clutch to drive away. The
parking brake will release automatically.
Automatic release will operate in first, second
and reverse in high range and first, second,
third and reverse in low range.
To delay automatic release, hold the electric
parking brake lever in the applied position, and
release at the desired point.
The parking brake system gradually reduces
the system load to assist a smooth drive away.
If the reduction in system load causes the
vehicle to move after a valid gear is selected,
full load will be automatically re-applied to the
electric parking brake.
To override the load reducing feature of the
electric parking brake, apply the parking brake
after selecting a gear.
 Brakes
In the event of a failure, the message
PARKBRAKE FAULT. AUTO RELEASE NOT
FUNCTIONAL will be displayed in the message
centre.
Automatic release - automatic
transmission models
If the vehicle is stationary with the electric
parking brake applied and D or R selected,
press the accelerator and drive away. The
parking brake will release automatically.
To delay automatic release, hold the electric
parking brake lever in the applied position, and
release at the desired point.
The parking brake system gradually reduces
the system load to assist a smooth drive away.
If the reduction in system load causes the
vehicle to move after a valid gear is selected,
full load will be automatically re-applied to the
electric parking brake.
To override the load reducing feature of the
electric parking brake, apply the parking brake
after selecting a gear.
In the event of a failure, the message
PARKBRAKE FAULT. AUTO RELEASE NOT
FUNCTIONAL will be displayed in the message
centre.
At the start of a journey, electric parking brake
release times may be extended when changing
from P or N. This is to allow for increased gear
engagement times.
155
EPB warning indicators
The EPB warning indicator illuminates in the
instrument pack for three seconds as a bulb
check when the starter switch is turned to
position II.
If the system detects a fault with the
electric parking brake, the amber
brake system warning indicator will
illuminate and the message PARKBRAKE
FAULT will appear in the message centre.
If the system detects a fault while
EPB is operated, the red warning
indicator will flash and the message
PARKBRAKE FAULT. SYSTEM NOT
FUNCTIONAL will appear in the message
centre.
Note: The red indicator will continue to be
illuminated for at least ten seconds after the
starter switch has been turned off.
When parking a vehicle with an EPB fault,
ensure that it is parked on a level surface and is
secured stationary without reliance on the EPB.
Brakes
Releasing the electric parking brake in
an emergency
WARNINGS
To prevent the vehicle moving, chocks
must be placed on both sides of one of
the wheels or the foot brake must be applied
before releasing the cable.
Emergency release of the electric
parking brake takes considerable
physical effort. If the tools slip, break or are
used incorrectly a serious injury may occur.
Whenever possible, this operation should be
carried out by Roadside Assistance.
If the electric parking brake is applied and the
system develops a fault, the following
procedure can be used to manually release the
parking brake.
E81357
1. Using a suitable lever, remove the
following:
x Left hand drive vehicles, the coin tray on
the opposite side of the gear lever from
the EPB lever.
x Right hand drive vehicles, the cover
behind the EPB lever.
2. Attach the jack handle to the cable loop
(arrowed) and insert the screwdriver shaft
through the jack handle.
3. Pull cable to release the EPB.
The electric parking brake must be applied
using the lever for the system to operate again.
156
 Brakes Parking aid
Parking aid

Messages PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The parking aid alerts the driver to any
The following messages could appear in the obstructions that need to be avoided whilst
message centre. CAUTIONS manoeuvring. When the parking aid is active,
The front parking aid may emit tones if it an indicator lamp in the switch illuminates.
Message Meaning What to do? detects a frequency tone using the same You are made aware of any obstruction, within
band as the sensors. range, by an intermittent tone. As the vehicle
PRESS FOOTBRAKE A switch release has been detected Follow the instructions to achieve a
AND PARKBRAKE without brake pedal contact. manual release. When washing the vehicle do not aim moves closer to the obstruction, the frequency
SWITCH high pressure water jets directly at the of the intermittent tone increases.
TO RELEASE sensors. Do not use abrasive materials or The vehicle is fitted with four ultrasonic
hard/sharp objects to clean the sensors. Only sensors on each of the bumpers. Some
PRESS FOOTBRAKE A switch release has been detected Follow the instructions to achieve a
use approved vehicle shampoo. vehicles are fitted only with rear sensors.
OR CLUTCH without brake or clutch pedal manual release.
AND PARKBRAKE contact. The range of the front sensors, and the two
SWITCH sensors on the corner of the rear bumper is
TO RELEASE approximately 60 cm (2 feet). The sensors in
PARKBRAKE A garage technician has requested a If not required, an ignition reset will the centre of the rear bumper have a range of
BEDDING CYCLE bedding cycle. cancel the function. approximately 1.5 metres (5 feet).
ACTIVE
USING THE PARKING AID
PARKBRAKE FAULT Electric parking brake functions may Seek qualified assistance.
not be available. WARNING
PARKBRAKE FAULT Drive-away release function is not Use manual release. Parking aids may not detect moving
AUTO RELEASE available. objects such as children and animals,
NOT FUNCTIONAL until they are dangerously close. Always
PARKBRAKE FAULT Supports the red warning indicator - Seek qualified assistance manoeuvre with caution and always use your
SYSTEM electric parking brake functions are immediately. mirrors.
NOT FUNCTIONAL not available.
PARKBRAKE FAULT Electric parking brake has lost Follow the instructions to park the CAUTION
TO HOLD VEHICLE vehicle speed information. vehicle. Parking aids are for guidance only and
REMOVE KEY THEN are not intended to replace the driver’s
E80443
APPLY PARKBRAKE visual checks for obstructions when
PARKBRAKE OFF An emergency release operation is Once original faults have been manoeuvring. The parking sensors may not
LIFT SWITCH detected. corrected, apply the switch to detect some obstructions. Obstructions such
TO APPLY reinstate electric park brake. as narrow posts, small objects close to the
ground and some objects with dark,
CAUTION Electric parking brake has been Only use this function in an non-reflective surfaces for example.
PARKBRAKE applied while the vehicle is moving. emergency.
Systems which use the same frequency
APPLIED
band as the front parking sensors may
cause irregular tones to be emitted.

157 158
 Parking aid
The front and rear parking aids are activated
whenever the starter switch in position II and
Reverse gear is selected. If Neutral is selected
from Reverse, both sets of sensors will remain
active. An audible tone will sound after one
second.
If an obstruction is detected by the sensors, an
intermittent tone will sound. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstruction, the
intermittent tone increases in frequency. When
the distance between the sensor and the
obstruction is less than approximately 30 cm
(1 foot), the tone becomes continuous.
The parking aid is automatically switched off
when the vehicles forward speed exceeds 16
km/h (10 mph). If you select P, or activate the
electric parking brake while the vehicle is
stationary, the parking aid will switch off.
Front parking aid - manual operation
2
E80442 3 legal requirement in some countries).
If you are driving into a limited space, you can
manually activate the front parking aid by
pressing the switch on the centre console
(arrowed).
The switch indicator lamp will illuminate and a
short confirmation tone will sound. Press the
switch again to deactivate the parking aid.
Towing
The rear sensors are automatically switched off
when a trailer is attached to the vehicle.
159
System fault
If a system fault is detected, a long
high-pitched tone will sound and the switch
indicator light will flash. If the sensors are
obscured by dirt, ice or snow, clean them. If the
problem persists, seek qualified assistance.
Driving hints
Driving hints
RUNNING-IN
The engine, gearbox, tyres and brakes need
time to bed-in. During the first 800 km (500
miles) it is essential that the vehicle is driven
with consideration for the running-in process.
During this period adhere to the following
advice:
x Limit the engine speed to a maximum of
3000 rpm and the road speed to a
maximum of 110 km/h (68 mph).
x Do not use full accelerator pedal travel and
use the gears to avoid over-revving or
labouring the engine.
x Do not use sport mode during the
running-in period.
x Avoid rapid acceleration and heavy braking
wherever possible.
x Ensure that servicing is carried out on time
and follow any advice regarding use in
arduous conditions.
Note: The advice given for running-in will aid
fuel economy and should be adopted as
general driving practice even after the
running-in period.
GENERAL DRIVING POINTS
Warning indicators
Battery charging - red
Illuminates as a bulb check when
the starter switch is turned to
position II and extinguishes once
the engine is running. If it remains on, or
illuminates whilst driving, there is a fault with
the battery charging system. Seek qualified
assistance urgently.
160
Low oil pressure - red
Illuminates as a bulb check when
the starter switch is turned to
position II and extinguishes when
the engine is started. If the indicator remains
on, flashes on and off, or illuminates whilst
driving, stop the vehicle as soon as safety
permits and switch off the engine immediately.
Check the oil level and seek qualified
assistance if necessary.
Overspeed warning - amber
Illuminates when the vehicle speed
is exceeding the limit set by the
driver. See PERSONALISED
SETTINGS (page 116).
Breakdown safety
If a breakdown occurs:
x Wherever possible, consistent with road
safety and traffic conditions, move the
vehicle off the main highway.
x Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
x If possible, position a warning triangle or a
flashing amber light at an appropriate
distance behind the vehicle to warn other
traffic of the breakdown, (note that this is a
x Your vehicle may be struck by another one.
Consider evacuating passengers through
the doors facing away from traffic, to a
safe area away from the vehicle and
highway.
Extreme driving conditions
Vehicles which operate in extreme conditions,
particularly on dusty, muddy, or wet terrain,
and vehicles which undergo frequent, or deep
wading conditions will require more frequent
servicing. Contact a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer for advice.
 Driving hints
Vehicle stability
WARNING
Many vehicle rollovers occur when a
driver attempts to bring a vehicle back
onto the road after some or all of the wheels
drift onto the verge or shoulder of the road. If
this happens, do not steer or steer sharply or
abruptly to re-enter the roadway. Let the
vehicle slow down as much as possible before
attempting to re-enter the roadway and keep
your wheels as straight as possible.
Measures that reduce the risk of injury and
death from vehicle crashes and roll-over are:
x Limit your speed. Never exceed speed
limits.
x Take bends at a reasonable speed. Avoid
unnecessary braking on bends.
x Drive defensively. Be aware of road and
weather conditions. Avoid risk-taking
behaviour such as following too close,
rapid lane-changing or abrupt
manoeuvring.
x Assume that pedestrians and other drivers
are going to make mistakes and be ready
for them.
x Avoid distractions.
x Before changing lanes, check your mirrors
and use the direction indicators.
x Never operate your vehicle when you have
consumed alcohol, are sleepy or fatigued
or have taken any medication that affects
judgement, reflexes or alertness.
161
Wading
CAUTIONS
The maximum advisable wading depth is
normally 600 mm (24 in). This can be
increased to 700 mm (27 in) if the air
suspension is set to off-road height. Wading at
greater depths may cause damage.
If the vehicle remains stationary for any
length of time in water above the level of
the door sills, severe electrical damage will
occur.
Do not switch off the engine during
wading. If the engine stalls during
wading re-start immediately. Should the
engine stall have it checked by a qualified
technician as soon as possible.
If water enters the engine air intake
during wading, switch off immediately.
The vehicle should be towed from the water
and recovered to a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
After wading in salt water, or driving on
sandy beaches, wash the underbody
components and exposed panels with fresh
water.
Driving hints
REDUCED ENGINE PERFORMANCE
WARNING
If REDUCED ENGINE PERFORMANCE
appears in the message centre a
serious engine management fault has been
registered and reduced engine performance
may be experienced. Immediately reduce
engine power and seek qualified assistance.
Engine Management System (EMS) fault
This warning lamp illuminates when
the engine management system
registers a serious fault. Avoid high
speeds and consult your Dealer/Authorised
Repairer as soon as possible.
Check engine - petrol models only
This warning lamp illuminates when
the starter switch is turned on and
extinguishes as soon as the engine
is started. Illumination at any other time
indicates that the emission performance of the
engine management system is impaired. Seek
qualified assistance.
CAUTION
If the indicator flashes while driving,
immediately reduce engine power to
avoid catalytic converter damage.
162
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
There are two main factors which influence fuel
economy, the way the vehicle is driven, and
maintenance.
Driving tips for economy
x Avoid unnecessary journeys, especially
short start-stop trips.
x Accelerate gently and smoothly from a
stand still.
x Use the gears to avoid labouring, or
over-revving the engine.
x Allow time to brake gently and smoothly.
x Be aware of traffic and road conditions
ahead, and take action in time to avoid
hard braking and acceleration.
x When stationary apply the park brake and
select neutral.
x Turn off the air conditioning when not
needed.
Maintenance and fuel economy
Regular servicing by your Dealer/Authorised
Repairer, along with regular checking by the
driver is essential for vehicle longevity and fuel
economy. The condition of the engine (oils,
filters, spark plugs, settings etc.) tyre
pressures and wheel alignment will all have a
bearing on fuel economy. For this reason it is
essential that the vehicle is checked regularly
by the driver and serviced at the correct
intervals by an approved Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.
Note: If you are in any doubt about the
maintenance requirements, intervals or checks
required, contact your Dealer/Authorised
Repairer for advice.
 Cruise control
Cruise control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control enables you to maintain a
constant road speed without having to keep the
accelerator pedal depressed.
CAUTIONS
Do not use cruise control in traffic
conditions where a constant speed
cannot easily be maintained or on winding or
slippery road surfaces.
Do not use Sports mode when cruise
control is selected.
Note: Cruise control is not available when you
are driving in low range gears or if a Terrain
Response special program has been selected.
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
The driver must always ensure that a
safe speed is maintained within the
speed limit, taking account of traffic and road
conditions.
CAUTIONS
When setting the cruise control to the
speed limit it is important to remember
that it is possible for the vehicle to increase
speed when travelling downhill. This may
result in the vehicle speed exceeding the speed
limit.
Do not use cruise control in traffic
conditions where a constant speed
cannot easily be maintained or on winding or
slippery road surfaces.
163
1 by a single press of button 4. The warning lamp
2
3
4
E80444
1 Set + : Set or increase the speed.
2 Set - : Set or decrease the speed.
3 Resume: Resume set speed.
4 Cancel: Cancels without erasing
memorised speed.
Accelerate until your desired cruising speed is
reached. The speed must be above 30 km/h
(18 mph). Press button 1 to maintain that
speed.
A warning lamp on the instrument
pack illuminates when cruise
control is operating. The speed can
be increased by normal use of the accelerator
e.g. for overtaking. When the accelerator is
released, road speed will return to the
previously set cruising speed.
Note: If the accelerator pedal is pressed for
more than 60 seconds, cruise control will be
cancelled.
Cruise control
Suspending cruise control
Cruise control can be suspended temporarily
on the instrument pack turns off.
Cruise control is also suspended when the
brake or clutch pedal is pressed, when the gear
selector is moved into neutral, or if HDC or DSC
becomes active. To resume cruise control at
the previously set speed, press button 3.
Note: The set cruise speed will not be erased
by pressing button 4. The set speed will only be
erased when the starter switch is turned to
position 0 or the gear selector is moved to P or
R.
Reducing cruising speed
Press and hold button 2; the vehicle will
decelerate. Release the switch when the
desired speed is reached, which then becomes
the new cruising speed.
Tap the (-) button to decrease the cruising
speed step-by-step. Each tap will decrease the
speed by 2 km/h (1 mph).
Increasing cruising speed
Increase the vehicle's speed by normal use of
the accelerator. When the desired speed is
reached, press button 1 to reset the cruise
control.
Alternatively, press and hold button 1; the
vehicle will accelerate. Release the switch
when the desired speed is reached, which then
becomes the new cruising speed.
Tap the (+) button to increase the cruising
speed step-by-step. Each tap will increase the
speed by 2 km/h (1 mph).
164
 Stability control
Stability control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is
unable to compensate for driver errors.
It is the driver's responsibility to drive with due
care and attention, in a manner which is safe
for the vehicle, its occupants and the other
road users.
The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) system
monitors the vehicle's dynamic stability at all
times. If a deviation from the driver’s intended
course is identified, such as understeer or
oversteer, the system can apply the brakes to
individual wheels and manipulate the engine
torque to help regain vehicle stability.
The warning indicator in the
instrument pack illuminates briefly
when the starter switch is turned to
position II.
If DSC is switched off by the driver, the warning
indicator will be constantly illuminated.
If the warning indicator flashes rapidly during
driving, the system has activated and is
regulating the engine output and brake forces.
If the warning indicator flashes slowly, and
continues flashing at all times, a fault has been
detected. Any such fault will deactivate DSC, so
drive with care and seek qualified assistance as
soon as possible.
USING STABILITY CONTROL
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is activated
automatically each time the engine is started,
and is automatically selected by some of the
Terrain Response programs.
Note: In the majority of driving situations, and
particularly on-road, it is recommended that
you do not turn DSC off.
165
Deactivating DSC
CAUTION
Driving with DSC deactivated can put
additional loads on the brakes, as the
engine torque output is not limited during slip
events. Wherever possible, drive with DSC
activated.
In some driving conditions it may prove helpful
to deactivate DSC to improve mobility. These
conditions include:-
x Rocking the vehicle out of a hole or deep
rut.
x Starting on a loose surface, such as snow.
x Driving in deep sand or mud.
x Driving on tracks with deep longitudinal
ruts.
2
E81084 3 For this reason, whever possible drive with
To deactivate DSC, press and briefly hold the
DSC switch on the instrument pack (the DSC
warning indicator will illuminate continuously).
Deactivating DSC also reduces the level of
Electronic Traction Control intervention and
may lead to an increase in wheelspin.
Reactivating DSC
To reactivate DSC, press and briefly hold the
DSC switch on the instrument panel. DSC will
also automatically reactivate after an ignition
cycle if it was previously deactivated.
Traction control
Traction control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
In conditions where one or more wheels has a
tendency to spin, Electronic Traction Control
(ETC) works with the Dynamic Stability Control
(DSC) system to improve mobility.
If a wheel starts to spin, ETC brakes that wheel
and may reduce the engine output until it
regains grip.
The warning lamp on the instrument
pack illuminates briefly as a bulb
check when the starter switch is
turned to position II.
The warning lamp flashes if ETC or DSC is
activated and continues to flash until the
vehicle regains traction and stability.
The indicator lamp will be constantly
illuminated if DSC is manually deactivated.
Deactivating DSC also changes the level of ETC
intervention. When a wheel starts to spin, ETC
will still brake that wheel, however, the engine
torque output will not be limited by the system.
This may improve vehicle mobility in certain
situations, but will also increase levels of
ground ground damage and load upon brakes.
DSC activated.
If the warning indicator flashes slowly and
continues flashing at all times, a fault has been
detected. Any such fault will deactivate
Traction Control and DSC, so drive with care
and seek qualified assistance as soon as
possible.
166
 Hill descent control (HDC)
Hill descent control (HDC)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Hill Descent Control (HDC) operates in
conjunction with the anti-lock braking system
to provide greater control in off-road situations
particularly when descending severe gradients.
During a hill descent, if engine braking is
insufficient to control the vehicle speed, HDC
automatically operates the brakes to slow the
vehicle and maintain a speed relative to the
selected gear range and the accelerator pedal
position.
In vehicles with manual transmission, HDC
should only be used in first and reverse gears
in high range and all gears in low range. Once
the vehicle is moving, the clutch pedal should
be fully released.
In vehicles with automatic transmission, HDC
should only be used in D, R and CommandShift
1 in high range and in D, R and all
CommandShift gears in low range. When in D,
the vehicle will automatically select the most
appropriate gear.
Note: If Terrain Response is fitted, some of its
program and range combinations will activate
or deactivate HDC automatically.
167
USING HDC
WARNING
Do not attempt a steep decent if HDC is
inoperative or warning messages are
displayed.
E81081
Press and release the button (arrowed) to
select HDC.
The green HDC indicator lamp
illuminates. To deselect, press and
release again. The indicator lamp
will flash if all operating conditions are not met
(vehicle in neutral, clutch pedal pressed,
vehicle speed above HDC operating range).
You can select HDC at speeds below 80 km/h
(50 mph), but full HDC function is not active
until the vehicle speed falls below 50 km/h (30
mph).
If the vehicle speed exceeds 80 km/h (50 mph),
HDC will deselect and the green HDC indicator
will extinguish.
If HDC is selected and the vehicle speed rises
above 50 km/h (30 mph) in high range, HDC
function is suspended and the green HDC
indicator will flash. A message will also appear
in the message centre.
If HDC is deselected when HDC is operating,
the system fades out, allowing the vehicle to
gradually increase speed.
Hill descent control (HDC)
In low range, HDC controls the vehicle speed
more aggressively. Use low range when
descending steep slopes.
When driving off-road, you can select HDC
permanently to ensure that control is
maintained. ABS and traction control are still
operational.
Note: HDC is automatically deselected if the
starter switch is turned off for more than six
hours.
With HDC selected, gear changes can be
performed in the normal way.
Hill Descent Control in action
1 centre, if available.
2
E81082
While HDC is controlling the vehicle speed,
descent speeds can be varied using the
steering-wheel-mounted cruise control
switches. To reduce the descent speed, press
and hold switch 2. Release the switch when the
desired speed is reached.
To increase the descent speed, press and hold
switch 1. Release the switch when the desired
speed is reached.
Alternatively, you can adjust the descent speed
by tapping switch 1 or 2. Each tap of the switch
will adjust the descent speed by approximately
0.5 km/h (0.3 mph).
168
If you depress the brake pedal when HDC is
active, HDC is overridden and the brakes will
perform as normal (a pulsation might be felt
through the brake pedal). If the brake pedal is
then released, HDC will start operating at the
reduced speed.
Note: Each gear has a pre-defined minimum
descent speed.
The descent speed will only increase if the
gradient is sufficiently steep to cause the
vehicle to accelerate as the braking effect is
reduced. On a shallow slope, pressing switch 1
may result in no speed increase.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) faults
Faults in the HDC system may be displayed by
the amber warning lamp or via the message
If an HDC fault occurs, HDC will fade-out and
then deselect, or deselect immediately
(depending on the type of fault and whether or
not HDC is in operation). The indicator will
extinguish and the message SYSTEM NOT
AVAILABLE will appear in the message centre
or the HDC fault amber indicator will illuminate.
Consult your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer as soon as possible.
The HDC amber indicator is fitted to
models that have no message
centre and it has two functions.
1. Illuminates continuously if there is a fault
in the HDC system. If a fault is detected
while the system is active, HDC will fade
out. Do not attempt a steep descent when
HDC is unavailable, alternatively use a very
low gear and/or the foot brake.
2. Flashes if the brake temperatures reach a
pre-determined limit. HDC will fades out
and then becomes temporarily inactive.
HDC will not be available until the brakes
reach an acceptable temperature.
 Hill descent control (HDC) Terrain Response
Terrain Response

Note: HDC fade-out gradually decreases the Messages PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Note: Changing from one special program to
HDC function with the effect that the rate of hill The following table lists the messages relating another will result in the changes to the driving
descent will increase. HDC will be disabled to Hill Descent Control (HDC) that could appear experience. For instance, the engine revs
completely once the descent is complete. in the message centre. Some messages will not produced by the current throttle position might
apply to your vehicle and will therefore not increase or decrease slightly in the new
appear. program, or the suspension could change
height. Try experimenting with the different
Message Meaning What to do? features in an environment that is safe and will
not affect other road users.
HDC FAULT Hill Descent Control system fault. Drive with care and do not attempt
SYSTEM to descend steep slopes. Seek
USING TERRAIN RESPONSE
NOT AVAILABLE qualified assistance immediately.
E80899
HDC HDC not operative because of incorrect Select correct gear if HDC is
NOT AVAILABLE gear selection. HDC is fully functional in required. In Low range, HDC The Terrain Response™ system is permanently
IN THIS GEAR 1st and Reverse gears in manual operates in all gears for manual active, continuously providing benefits in
transmissions and 1, R and D in and automatic transmissions. traction and driveability. Further benefits are
automatic in High range. It operates in all available for specific off-road driving
gears in Low range. conditions by the selection of one of the special
HDC HDC unavailable, speed threshold Reduce vehicle speed. programs.
NOT AVAILABLE exceeded. Maximum HDC operating For each special program, the system
SPEED TOO HIGH speed is 50 km/h (30 mph), maximum optimises the vehicle set-up for the prevailing
speed for HDC selection is 80 km/h (50 conditions. E80901
mph).
The systems comprising Terrain Response are: Rotate the control to select the required special
HDC HDC switched off while brake system is Wait until message disappears x Engine management. program.
TEMPORARILY cooling. before descending steep slopes.
x Gearbox management. Four special programs are available:
NOT AVAILABLE
SYSTEM COOLING x Intelligent differential control. x Grass/gravel/snow (also includes ice)
x Dynamic stability, traction control and Hill x Mud/ruts
Descent Control (HDC) systems.
x Sand
x Air suspension.
x Rock Crawl
Terrain Response provides a variable throttle
When the starter switch is turned on, the
response, ranging from very cautious (large
indicators around the control are illuminated,
pedal movement has a minimum effect on
with the active program highlighted in amber.
engine power) when driving in slippery
The special program indicator will also be
conditions, to very responsive (engine power is
displayed on the message centre if it is active
allowed to rise more quickly) when driving over
sand.

169 170
 Terrain Response
E80902
If the starter switch is turned off when a special
program is selected, the program will remain in
the system memory for six hours and resume
when the starter switch is turned back on (with
the exception of Grass-Gravel-Snow which
remains selected indefinitely).
The message centre will confirm that the
previously selected special program is still
selected.
It is possible to have the Terrain Response
system configured so that if the
Grass-Gravel-Snow program is selected and
the starter switch is turned off, the system will
change back to the General program after six
hours as the other special programs do.
Consult your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.
Terrain Response general (special
programs off)
The General setting is suitable for
E80903
surfaces that match typical road
surfaces, including dry cobbles,
tarmac or wooden planks.
All systems, except Hill Descent Control
(HDC), will adopt settings based on the
conditions. HDC will remain active if it was
manually selected. The suspension will also
change from raised to normal ride height when
the vehicle starts moving.
Grass-Gravel-Snow
Choose this program for icy
surfaces and surfaces which are
firm but have a coating of loose
material, for example, grass, snow, gravel,
pebbles or sand.
HDC will engage automatically in low range,
but can be manually de-selected. See USING
HDC (page 167).
Start off in a higher gear than usual, second
gear in high range or third gear in low range.
Manual transmission vehicles: when
Grass-Gravel-Snow program is selected, it is
confirmed once in the message centre.
Using the vehicle with snow chains fitted may
affect operation of Terrain Response. See
USING SNOW CHAINS (page 246).
Note: If the vehicle cannot obtain forward
traction in deep snow, switch off Dynamic
Stability Control (DSC). DSC must be switched
on as soon as conditions permit. See USING
STABILITY CONTROL (page 165).
Mud-Ruts
Choose this special program for
muddy, or deeply rutted, ground
that is soft and uneven. Unevenness
of the ground could be caused by roots,
brushwood or small logs.
Low range is recommended for this program. If
low range is not selected, the message centre
will prompt you.
If the Mud-Ruts program and low range are
selected together, the vehicle ride height will be
raised automatically.
Sand
Choose this program for sand and
other dry, yielding ground. Also use
for deep gravel.
Terrain Response
Where the sand is damp or wet, select
Mud-Ruts special program.
Note: If the sand is extremely soft and dry and
of a depth that allows the wheels to sink, switch
off Dynamic Stability Control (DSC). DSC must
be switched on as soon as conditions permit.
See USING STABILITY CONTROL (page 165).
Rock Crawl
Use this special program on rocky
E80907
terrain and other solid ground,
which demands high levels of wheel
displacement and careful vehicle control. This
program can be used for crossing river beds
strewn with submerged rocks.
You can only select Rock Crawl in low range. If
you try to select it in high range, you are
prompted to select low range. This program
will optimise the vehicle suspension and
traction system to provide good low-speed
control.
Wading
When driving through water less than 600 mm
(24 inches) deep, select the Terrain Response
program suitable for the surface beneath the
water.
Increased suspension height
When a special program requires increased
suspension height, the system will
automatically raise the suspension, unless
there is a trailer attached plugged into the
trailer socket.
Driver override options
The following two systems controlled by
Terrain Response can also be operated by the
driver.
x Air Suspension
x Hill Descent Control
In some special programs, the Terrain
Response system will switch on HDC and, in
low range, the system will automatically raise
the suspension to off-road height.
You can cancel both the HDC and ride height
selections at any time. If HDC or a specific ride
height has not been selected by the system,
you can select them at any time.
HDC and ride height selections will be
confirmed through the message centre and by
the individual system information indicators,
irrespective of whether the system or driver
selected them. Use of special programs may
prompt warnings and other information to be
displayed on the message centre.
Note: Use the CommandShift function on the
gearbox to lock the vehicle in a particular gear.
Inappropriate program selection
CAUTION
Selecting an inappropriate special
program will impair the vehicle's
response to the conditions and reduce the life
of the suspension and drive systems.
If you try to select an inappropriate special
program, such as choosing Rock Crawl while
in high range, the relevant indicator lamp will
flash amber and an audible chime will sound.
The message centre will provide further
information.
If the appropriate action is not taken within 60
seconds, the warnings will cease and the
message centre will show the active program.
If the system becomes partly inoperable, it may
not be possible to select some special
programs. A warning will be given when
selection of an affected program is attempted.

171 172
 Terrain Response Terrain Response
If the system becomes totally inoperable, all of Messages Message Meaning What to do?
the special program indicators will be switched The following table lists the messages relating RECOMMEND Low range is recommended for Select low range.
off and the message centre will display a to Terrain Response that could appear in the LOW RANGE Mud-Ruts special program.
relevant message. message centre. IS SELECTED
The suspension system provides an automatic FOR MUD-RUTS
levelling function. See ADJUSTING THE PROGRAM
SUSPENSION (page 177).If low range is
RECOMMEND Mud-Ruts program is being used Raise suspension manually to
needed, it would be beneficial to increase
RAISING in high range. Suspension raised off-road height or select low range.
ground clearance.
SUSPENSION TO automatically in low range.
OFF ROAD HEIGHT
Message Meaning What to do?
IN DEEP MUD-RUTS
CAUTION! Terrain Response system Raise suspension manually to
RECOMMEND In slippery conditions start off in a Select second/third gear.
RISK OF selected off-road height but you off-road height if possible and
STARTING IN higher gear than usual.
GROUNDING WITH have manually lowered the appropriate.
2ND/3RD GEAR
SUSPENSION AT vehicle (or the system cannot
FOR SLIPPERY
NORMAL HEIGHT raise the vehicle).
CONDITIONS
HDC FAULT HDC system fault. Drive with care and do not descend
RESET SUSPENSION Suspension still in extended If vehicle is clear of obstacle, select
SYSTEM steep slopes. Seek qualified
HEIGHT IF CLEAR mode. required suspension.
NOT AVAILABLE assistance.
OF OBSTACLE
HDC HDC not operative because of Select correct gear if HDC is required.
SELECT LOW RANGE Vehicle is not in low range, so Select low range.
NOT AVAILABLE incorrect gear selection. See
TO ACTIVATE Rock Crawl cannot be used.
IN THIS GEAR USING HDC (page 167).
ROCK CRAWL
HDC HDC unavailable, speed threshold Reduce vehicle speed.
SELECT NEUTRAL Range change will not occur until Select neutral.
NOT AVAILABLE exceeded. Max HDC operating
FOR RANGE neutral is selected.
SPEED TOO HIGH speed is 50 km/h (30 mph), max
CHANGE
speed for HDC selection is 80
km/h (50 mph). SLOW DOWN OR Vehicle will automatically Slow down or accept height change.
VEHICLE lower/raise if vehicle speed
HDC TEMPORARILY HDC off while brake system is Wait until message disappears before
WILL LOWER/RAISE increases.
NOT AVAILABLE cooling. descending steep slopes.
SYSTEM COOLING SPEED TOO HIGH Vehicle speed is too high for Reduce speed to 40 km/h (25mph) on
FOR RANGE requested range change. automatic transmission or 20 km/h
PROGRAM CHANGE Temporarily impossible to select If conditions change within 60
CHANGE (12 mph) on manual transmission.
IN PROGRESS a new program. Due to ABS or seconds, the chosen program is
DSC activity or the overheating of selected. SYSTEM FAULT There is a fault on the Terrain Full Terrain Response programs are
the electronic differentials. If differentials are overheated, wait for SOME PROGRAMS Response system. not available, so drive with care. Seek
further information. NOT AVAILABLE qualified assistance immediately.
When differentials have cooled, try to SYSTEM FAULT There is a fault on the Terrain Full Terrain Response programs are
reselect the special program. SPECIAL PROGRAMS Response system. not available, so drive with care. Seek
NOT AVAILABLE qualified assistance immediately.

173 174
 Terrain Response Air suspension
Air suspension
Message Meaning What to do? PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
TRAILER CONNECTED Vehicle has not achieved off-road If a trailer is connected, do nothing. Operation
OFF ROAD HEIGHT height as trailer is attached. If something else is attached (e.g. bike
NOT SELECTED rack), raise vehicle to off-road height +70mm
AUTOMATICALLY manually. 55mm
If nothing is connected, check trailer
socket for faults.
0mm
50mm
E80695
The air suspension system maintains the
correct vehicle height by controlling the
quantity of air in the vehicle's air springs.
Unless otherwise stated, height changes may
only be made while the engine is running and
the driver and passenger doors are closed.
When the air suspension system lifts the
vehicle, it uses compressed air stored in its
reservoir. The suspension will rise more slowly
if this reservoir is depleted, usually due to
repeated raising and lowering of the
suspension.
Off-road height
This is 55 mm (2.2 in.) higher than the normal
(on-road) height. It provides improved ground
clearance and approach, departure and
break-over angles. See TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS (page 269).
Off-road height can be selected at any speed up
to 40 km/h (24 mph). When the system is at
off-road height, the system selects on-road
height if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 km/h (30
mph).
Note: If Terrain Response is in use, some of its
programs/range combinations will adjust
suspension height automatically
175
Note: If the trailer socket is in use, increased
suspension height control is inhibited.
Extended mode
If the vehicle becomes grounded while at
off-road height, and traction control is
activated, the system automatically uses
Extended mode to provide additional height.
Extended mode cannot be selected manually.
Access height
WARNING
Ensure that the vehicle is clear of
people and obstacles before lowering
the suspension. The difference between
off-road height and access height is 105 mm
(4.1 in).
Access height is 50 mm (2.0 in.) lower than
On-road height. It may ease entry, exit and
loading of the vehicle.
The suspension rises from access height
automatically when the vehicle speed exceeds
10 km/h (6 mph).
If you selected access height directly from
off-road height, the system will return to
off-road height when the vehicle speed exceeds
10 km/h (6 mph). Otherwise, the system will lift
the suspension to on-road height.
High speed height
If the vehicle exceeds 160 km/h (100 mph) for
longer than five seconds, the suspension ride
height lowers by 20 mm (0.75 in). This action
is automatic and cannot be over-ridden
manually. Ride height will return to normal
when vehicle speed remains below 130 km/h
(80 mph) for at least 30 seconds.
176
 Air suspension
Crawl mode
Crawl mode locks the vehicle at Access height
and enables it to be driven at low speeds. This
gives increased roof clearance, for example, in
multi-storey car parks.
Crawl mode can only be selected when the
vehicle speed is below 10 km/h (6 mph). When
the vehicle is in this mode, On-road height will
be selected automatically if the vehicle speed
exceeds 40 km/h (24 mph).
Suspension warning indicator
The suspension warning lamp in the
instrument pack illuminates both
red and amber briefly as a bulb
check when the starter is turned to position II.
If the lamp illuminates amber, a suspension
fault has been detected, but the vehicle can still
be driven normally.
If the lamp flashes red, a serious suspension
fault has been detected and the vehicle should
be driven carefully until qualified assistance
can be obtained.
The warning lamp illumination is accompanied
by a warning chime.
177
Air suspension
ADJUSTING THE SUSPENSION Access height Crawl mode (locked at Access height)
If access height is selected while vehicle speed
1 2 is above 20 km/h (12 mph), indicator lamps 5 1
and 7 flash while the system waits for the
vehicle to slow. The access height request is
3 cancelled if the vehicle does not slow
sufficiently within one minute.
4
When the vehicle slows down to 20 km/h
5 (12 mph), indicator lamp 4 will extinguish as
the system goes to the part-lowered height.
5
6 Indicator 5 will be lit and indicator lamp 7 will
continue to flash. 6
The vehicle must slow down to 8 km/h
7 E80691
E80690 (5 mph), within one minute to prevent access
height cancellation. Indicator lamps 5 and 7
1. Raise/lower switch When the suspension is at on-road or access
will be lit. When access height is reached,
indicator lamp 7 will extinguish. height and the vehicle speed is below 35 km/h
2. Raising indicator
(22 mph), press the raise/lower switch 1 in the
3. Off-road indicator Access height may be selected up to down direction for one second. Indicator lamps
4. On-road indicator 40 seconds after the starter switch is turned 5 and 6 will illuminate to confirm the selection,
off, if the driver's door has not been opened
5. Access indicator and a chime will sound.
within this time.
6. Lock indicator Locked at access height can be cancelled by
pressing the raise/lower switch in the up
7. Lowering indicator
direction for one second. Indicator 6 will
Suspension height indicators extinguish.
Indicator lamps 2 or 7 illuminate to show the Note:
direction of movement. They will extinguish When locked at access height is cancelled, the
when the height change is complete. suspension will rise to on-road height if the
If a height change is requested but disallowed, vehicle speed is greater than 10 km/h (6 mph).
such as attempting to raise the height of the
Access height from off-road height
vehicle with the engine not running, indicator
lamps 2 and 7 will flash twice and a chime When the suspension is at off-road height,
sounds. A message is displayed on the press switch 1 down, then press it again before
message centre. indicator 7 goes out.
A flashing indicator lamp 2 or 7 indicates that The system will return the suspension to
the system is in a waiting state or that it will off-road height automatically if the vehicle is
override the driver's choice if the speed criteria driven above 10 km/h (6 mph).
are exceeded.
178
 Air suspension
Automatic height change warnings
2 Suspension freeze
4
7 5
E80692
When the suspension is at off-road height,
access or locked at access (crawl) height, the
suspension height will change automatically
when vehicle speed exceeds predetermined
levels.
When the suspension is at off-road height or
locked at access height, it warns the driver that
the vehicle is approaching a speed threshold. A
chime will sound, a message will be displayed
on the message centre and the on-road
indicator 4 and either 2 or 7 will flash.
The off-road height speed warning is shown
above. If the vehicle slows down, the warning
will disappear.
Door open override
If a door is opened during a height change
while the vehicle is at rest, the height change
will be restricted.
179
2 1
3 3
4 If the system is attempting to change the
E80693 7 E80694
The indicator lamp for the target height 3, 4 or
5 will remain lit and the lifting indicator lamp2
or the lowering indicator lamp 7 will flash.
The height change will resume if all of the
doors are closed within 90 seconds.
If the doors are not closed within this time, the
raising indicator 2 or the lowering indicator 7
will extinguish and the indicators showing the
heights above and below the current position
will be illuminated.
Selecting a new height using the raise/lower
switch 1, or driving off will reset the system.
Extended mode
If the vehicle is grounded and traction control
is activated, Extended mode is activated
automatically to raise the vehicle clear.
Air suspension
When extended mode is activated, indicator
lamp 3 flashes. A message is displayed on the
message centre.
To exit extended mode, either press the
raise/lower switch 1 briefly up or down or drive
the vehicle at a speed greater than 5 km/h (3
mph) for 30 seconds.
Note:
Extended mode cannot be selected manually.
Additional lift whilst in extended mode
When extended mode is invoked and the
automatic lifting of the vehicle has been
completed, the driver can select an additional
lift in order to clear the obstacle. This can be
particularly useful when extended mode has
been invoked on soft surfaces.
To request additional lifting, wait for the raising
indicator 2 to extinguish then press and hold
the switch 1 for three seconds whilst pressing
the brake pedal. A chime will sound to confirm
that the request has been accepted. Indicator 2
will be illuminated while the vehicle is being
lifted.
180
To exit extended mode briefly press either the
raise or lower switch. Alternatively, the vehicle
will automatically lower if driven at a speed
greater than 5 km/h (3 mph) for 30 seconds.
suspension height and it detects that the
suspension is prevented from moving by an
obstruction, all movements are frozen.
The indicators operate in the same way as
described in extended mode and the same
message will be displayed on the message
centre. As in extended mode, to exit this freeze
state, either press the switch 1 up or down, or
drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 20
km/h (12 mph).
Remote operation
WARNING
The remote control will operate
normally from inside the vehicle. It is
therefore important to keep it out of reach of
children at all times.
When operating the remote control from
inside vehicle, ensure that a responsible adult
checks for obstructions under the vehicle and
supervises the lowering process.
Care should be taken with all suspension
height changes when a trailer is attached to the
vehicle.
The remote control can be programmed to
operate the air suspension.
 Air suspension Air suspension
AIR SUSPENSION MESSAGES Message Meaning What to do?
When a message centre is fitted to the vehicle, SUSPENSION START Vehicle height can only be raised with Start the engine.
messages relating to the air suspension ENGINE TO RAISE the engine running.
system may be displayed. VEHICLE
SUSPENSION WILL Air suspension compressor is cooling Wait for suspension to carry
Message Meaning What to do?
RAISE WHEN SYSTEM and lifting will resume at the correct out lifting sequence.
CAUTION! RISK OF When the Terrain Response system Raise suspension manually to COOLED temperature.
GROUNDING WITH would normally have provided off-road off-road height if possible and
SUSPENSION AT height, but you have manually lowered appropriate.
NORMAL HEIGHT the vehicle (or the system cannot raise
the vehicle).
RECOMMEND RAISING In deep ruts you should raise the vehicle Raise suspension manually to
SUSPENSION TO OFF to off-road height. In low range, this is off-road height.
ROAD HEIGHT IN DEEP automatic. If mud/ruts program is used
MUD-RUTS in high range, it must be done manually
RESET SUSPENSION Suspension still in extended mode. If the vehicle is clear, select the
HEIGHT IF CLEAR OF required suspension.
OBSTACLE
SLOW DOWN OR Vehicle will automatically lower/raise if Choose to slow down or accept
VEHICLE WILL vehicle speed increases. height change.
LOWER/RAISE
SUSPENSION CLOSE Air suspension height change is Close all doors.
DOOR TO CHANGE prevented because a door is open.
HEIGHT
SUSPENSION FAULT A fault has been detected in the air Seek qualified assistance
suspension system. System operates immediately.
normally.
SUSPENSION FAULT A major fault has been detected in the Drive slowly until fault can be
MAX SPEED 50 km/h air suspension system and control lost. rectified.
(MAX SPEED 30 mph)
SUSPENSION FAULT A fault has been detected in the air Seek qualified assistance
NORMAL HEIGHT suspension system. Only normal height immediately.
ONLY is available.
SUSPENSION FAULT Major component failure. Stop vehicle immediately and
STOP SAFELY STOP seek qualified assistance.
ENGINE
SUSPENSION SPEED A height change has been requested but Reduce vehicle speed.
TOO HIGH TO CHANGE speed is too high to allow.
HEIGHT

181 182
 Fuel and refuelling
Fuel and refuelling
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Petroleum gases are highly flammable,
have a low flash point and are
explosive, especially in confined spaces. Avoid
exposing the gases to any potential sources of
ignition as the resulting fire and explosion may
cause serious injuries and/or death.
Only use containers specifically
designed for carrying fuel and always
remove them from the vehicle to fill them.
Failure to do so may result in spillage and
cause a fire.
Switch off the engine when refuelling,
as it is both a source of extreme
temperatures and electrical sparks. The
resulting fire and explosion may cause serious
injury and death.
If your vehicle is equipped with a fuel
burning heater, ensure it is switched off
when refuelling. The resulting fire and
explosion may cause serious injury and death.
Switch off any personal electronic
devices such as mobile phones, or
music players. They have the potential to
cause electrical sparks. The resulting fire and
explosion may cause serious injury and death.
Do not smoke, use a naked flame, or
cause sparks. The resulting fire and
explosion may cause serious injury and death.
Do not overfill the fuel tank. Overfilling
may cause spillage when the vehicle is
driven. Spillage may also occur if the fuel
expands in high ambient temperatures.
183
FUEL QUALITY
CAUTION
Do not use leaded fuels, lead substitutes
or fuel additives. Doing so can cause
damage to the engine, fuel and emission
control systems.
Only use high quality fuel as using a
lower quality can cause damage to the
engine, fuel and emission control systems.
Fuel system cleaning agents should not
be used, unless approved by Land Rover.
Unapproved products maybe harmful to fuel
system components on your vehicle.
D
Pb
DIESEL
TIGHTEN UNTIL CAP CLICKS
OR ENGINE LIGHT MAY COME ON
SEE OWNERS GUIDE
E80367
The correct fuel specification for your vehicle is
shown on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Fuel and refuelling
Petrol engined vehicles
CAUTIONS
Do not use leaded fuels, lead substitutes,
or fuel additives. Doing so can cause
damage to the engine, fuel, catalytic converter
and emission control systems.
Only use high quality fuel, as using lower
quality fuels can cause damage to the
engine, fuel, and emission control systems.
Fuel system cleaning agents should not
be used, unless approved by Land Rover.
Unapproved products may be harmful to fuel
system components on your vehicle.
Only use Unleaded 95 RON fuel to EN 228
specification. Unleaded fuel no lower than 90
RON may also be used.
Octane rating
The RON value (octane rating) and type of
petroleum available at garage forecourts will
vary in different parts of the world.
During manufacture, engines are tuned to suit
the fuel supplies commonly available in the
country for which the vehicle is destined.
However, if a vehicle is later exported to a
different country, or is used to travel between
different territories, the owner should be aware
that the available fuel supplies may not be
compatible with the engine specification.
Using petrol with a lower octane rating than 91
RON, however, can cause persistent, heavy
engine knock (a metallic rapping noise). If
severe, this can lead to engine damage.
If heavy engine knock is detected when using
the recommended octane rated fuel, or if
constant engine knocking is present while
maintaining a steady speed on level roads,
contact your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer for advice.
184
Note: Occasional, light, engine knock
experienced while accelerating or climbing hills
is acceptable.
ALTERNATIVE FUELS FOR PETROL
ENGINES
Ethanol fuels
CAUTIONS
This vehicle is not suitable for use with
fuels containing more than 10% Ethanol.
Do not use E85 fuels (85 % Ethanol
content). Equipment necessary for the
use of fuels containing more than 10% Ethanol
is not fitted to this vehicle. If E85 fuels are
used, serious engine and fuel system damage
will occur.
Fuels containing up to 10% Ethanol (grain
alcohol) may be used. Ensure the fuel has
octane ratings no lower than those
recommended for unleaded fuel. Most drivers
will not notice any operating difference with
fuel containing Ethanol. If a difference is
detected, the use of conventional unleaded fuel
should be resumed.
Methanol
Some fuels contain Methanol (Methyl or wood
alcohol). If you use fuels containing Methanol
the fuels must also contain co-solvents and
corrosion inhibitors for Methanol. Also, do not
use fuels that contain more than 3% Methanol
even if they contain co-solvents and corrosion
inhibitors. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use
of such fuels is not the responsibility of Land
Rover, and may not be covered under the
warranty.
 Fuel and refuelling
Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether (MTBE)
Unleaded fuel containing an oxygenate known
as MTBE can be used provided the ratio of
MTBE to conventional fuel does not exceed
15%. MTBE is an Ether based compound,
derived from Petroleum, which has been
specified by several refiners as the substance
to enhance the Octane rating of fuel.
Reformulated gasoline
Several petroleum companies have announced
the availability of reformulated fuels. These
fuels are specially designed to further reduce
vehicle emissions. Land Rover fully supports
all efforts to protect and maintain ambient air
quality and encourages the use of reformulated
gasoline where available.
DIESEL ENGINED VEHICLES
CAUTIONS
The maximum allowable Bio-diesel mix
is 5%, meeting EN 590 specification.
If the fuel tank is accidentally filled with
petrol, do not attempt to start the engine.
Seek qualified assistance immediately.
The quality of diesel fuel is variable depending
on geographic location. Always use premium
or the highest quality fuel available in your
locality. High quality fuel ensures a longer life
for your engine components. Lower grade fuel
contains higher levels of sulphur which is
detrimental to engine components. If low
quality fuel is used, light coloured smoke may
be evident at the exhaust.
Only use Diesel or Automotive Gas Oil (AGO) to
EN 590 specification.
Note: Land Rover vehicles are capable of
running with up to a 5% blend of bio-diesel in
accordance with European Standard EN590.
185
Note: The use of commercial vehicle diesel
pumps with a higher fill rate, may result in
premature pump cut-off and fuel spillage.
Sulphur content
CAUTIONS
When a Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) is
fitted the maximum Sulphur content
must not excced 0.005%. Using an incorrect
fuel will cause serious damage to the DPF. For
more information about DPF - See DIESEL
PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF) (page 141).
In some countries diesel will contain higher
levers of Sulphur, and will require reduced
service intervals to offset the effects on engine
components. If in doubt contact a local Land
Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer for advice.
Vehicles without DPF
The Sulphur content of diesel used in Land
Rover vehicles without DPF should not exceed
0.3%.
Fuel and refuelling
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
CAUTION
Avoid running out of fuel. Doing so can
cause damage to the vehicle’s engine,
fuel and emission control systems. pump.
Note: If the vehicle does run out of fuel,
seeking qualified assistance is advisable.
Note: If the vehicle runs out of fuel it will be
necessary to add a minimum of 4 litres (0.8
gallons) of fuel in order to restart the engine. In
some circumstances it will be necessary to
drive a short distance, typically 1.6 - 5 km (1 -
3 miles) in order for the vehicles monitoring
systems to register the additional fuel.
E80510
When the remaining fuel reaches a minimum of
12 litres (three gallons), the amber low fuel
warning indicator illuminates. The remaining
fuel should give a range of approximately 80
km (50 miles).
186
FUEL FILLER FLAP
WARNINGS
Take careful note of all warnings and
instructions given on the label affixed to
the inside of the filler flap. Failure to do so may
result in injury or death.
Open the fuel filler cap slowly and allow
the pressure to release before fully
removing the cap to avoid fuel spillage due to
rapid expansion.
CAUTION
Do not force the fuel filler cap open, it
may fail to close properly and you will
need to seek qualified assistance.
When replacing the fuel filler cap make sure
that it is tightened until it clicks three times.
Failure to do so may result in the engine
warning light illuminating due to evaporative
emission levels increasing.
E80363
The fuel filler is located behind the rear
right-hand wheel arch. An arrow on the fuel
gauge points to that side of the vehicle.
 Fuel and refuelling
E80364
With the vehicle fully unlocked (all doors and
the tailgate), press the left side of the fuel filler
flap to open.
The fuel filler flap springs open revealing the
filler cap.
Note: The doors and tailgate must be unlocked
before you can open the fuel filler cap.
E80365
The filler cap is secured to the vehicle by a
strap. For your convenience a holder is
provided on the flap to store the cap whilst
refuelling.
187
REFUELLING
WARNINGS
When refuelling ensure that all
windows, doors and the sunroof are
fully closed, particularly if young children or
animals are in the vehicle. Fuel vapour
contains harmful chemical compounds, some
of which may cause cancer.
Do not attempt to fill the tank to its
maximum capacity. If the vehicle is to
be parked on a slope, in direct sunlight, or high
ambient temperature, expansion of the fuel
could cause spillage.
CAUTIONS
When replacing the fuel filler cap, tighten
it until it clicks three times. Failure to do
so may cause the engine warning indicator to
illuminate due to increased evaporative
emission levels.
Do not leave the remote handset in the
vehicle while refuelling. Always lock the
vehicle if it is to be left unattended.
Filling station pumps are equipped with
automatic cut-off sensing to avoid fuel
spillage. Fill the tank slowly until the filler
nozzle automatically cuts-off the supply. Do
not attempt to fill the tank beyond this point.
Check the fuel pump information
carefully to ensure that you are putting
the correct fuel into the vehicle. Filling the
vehicle with the incorrect fuel can cause
serious engine and fuel system damage.
If the fuel tank is accidentally filled with
the wrong type of fuel, do not start the
engine. It is essential that you seek qualified
assistance. Running the engine can cause
serious engine and fuel system damage.
Fuel and refuelling
CAUTIONS
Filling station pumps used for diesel
commercial vehicles deliver fuel at a
higher rate than normal. The higher fill rate can
cause premature cut-off and may cause fuel
spillage. Therefore it is recommended that
only standard light vehicle pumps are used.
1 2
E82173
Insert the pump nozzle 1 into the filler neck,
pushing the spring-loaded cover 2 aside.
Filling station pumps are equipped with
automatic cut-off sensing to avoid fuel spillage.
Fill the tank slowly until the filler nozzle
automatically cuts-off the supply. Do not
attempt to fill the tank beyond this point.
When refuelling is complete, replace and fully
tighten the fuel filler cap.
188
FUEL CUT-OFF
If the supplementary restraint system is
activated during an accident, the fuel supply to
the engine may be stopped. If this happens, the
system must be reset before attempting to
restart the engine.
Resetting the fuel cut-off system
WARNING
The fuel cut-off should never be reset if
you can smell fuel, or a leak can be
seen. Doing so can lead to a fire which may
cause serious injury or death.
If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the system as
follows:
1. Turn the starter switch to position 0 and
wait for one minute.
2. Turn the starter switch to position II and
wait for 30 seconds.
3. Make a further check for fuel leaks.
4. If no leak is found, start the engine as
normal.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNING
Exhaust system temperatures can be
extremely high - do not park on ground
where combustible materials such as dry
grass or leaves could come into contact with
the exhaust system.
CAUTION
Catalytic converters can be easily
damaged through improper use,
particularly if the wrong fuel is used, or if an
engine misfire occurs.
 Fuel and refuelling Load carrying
Load carrying

FUEL CONSUMPTION GENERAL INFORMATION REAR LOADSPACE HATCHES

Fuel consumption figures WARNING
The fuel consumption figures shown below have been calculated using a standard testing Ensure that any items stored in the
procedure (the new EC test procedure from Directive 99/100/EC), and produced in accordance with vehicle are secure and cannot move. If
the Passenger Car Fuel Consumption (Amendment) Order 1996. the vehicle is involved in an accident, or
Under normal use, a vehicle's actual fuel consumption figures may differ from those achieved subject to sudden braking or direction change,
through the test procedure, depending on your driving technique, road and traffic conditions, loose items can cause serious injury or death.
environmental factors, vehicle load and vehicle condition.
Weights and load capacities
Variant Urban Extra urban Combined CO2 emissions Information and values for the maximum
weights can be found in the Weights section.
l/100km (mpg) l/100km (mpg) l/100km (mpg) g/km See TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (page 269). E80967

V6 Diesel (manual) 11.1 (25.4) 8.1 (34.9) 9.2 (30.7) 244 Note: It is the driver's responsibility to ensure
V6 Diesel (automatic) 13.1 (21.6) 8.5 (33.2) 10.2 (27.7) 270 that the maximum weights are not exceeded, There are access hatches on both sides of the
and that the load is distributed correctly within rear loadspace.
V8 Petrol 20.9 (13.5) 12.1 (22.3) 15.0 (18.8) 354
the vehicle. On 7-seater models the right-hand side hatch
Urban cycle gives access to the toolkit and the left-hand
LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTS hatch gives access to the tow bar.
The urban test cycle is performed from a cold start and comprises a series of accelerations,
decelerations and periods of steady speed driving and engine idling. The maximum speed during Ensure that the hatch is securely fitted before
the test is 50 km/h (30 mph) with an average speed of 19 km/h (12 mph). driving.

Extra-urban cycle LUGGAGE COVERS

The extra-urban cycle test is performed immediately after the urban test. Approximately half of the
test comprises steady-speed driving, while the remainder is a series of accelerations, decelerations WARNING
and engine idling. The maximum test speed is 120 km/h (75 mph) and the average speed 63 km/h Never place objects on top of the
(40 mph). The test is performed over a distance of 7 km (4.4 miles). luggage cover. During an accident or
sudden manoeuvre loose objects can cause
Combined serious injury or death.
The combined figure is an average of the urban and extra-urban test cycle results, which has been
weighted to take account of the different distances covered during the two tests. CAUTION
For additional information on fuel consumption figures and exhaust emissions, visit the Vehicle When retracting the cover make sure
E80966
Certification Agency (VCA) website at http://www.vcacarfueldata.org.uk/. nothing is left on top. Some items, such
Note: as paper or fabrics, may become trapped and
To assist in safely securing large items of jam the mechanism.
These figures should not be compared with the figures produced using the ECE/EEC procedure luggage, four fixing points are located in the
previously required by The Passenger Car Fuel Consumption Order 1983. Because of the changes If the cover is damaged, this may prevent the
rear loadspace floor.
in the test procedure, even the urban figures would differ if the same car were subjected to both cover from operating correctly and cause
tests. Note: A range of approved luggage retention further damage.
accessories are available from your Land
Rover/Authorised Repairer.

189 190
 Load carrying
E80969
Operating the luggage cover
1. Pull the rigid portion of the blind to unroll
the cover.
2. Engage the end pieces into the recessed
features moulded into the loadspace sides.
Stowage of luggage cover
WARNING
When fitting the luggage cover in
position ensure that the paddle returns
to the flush (horizontal) position. Failure to do
so may allow the luggage cover to move
during an accident or sudden manoeuvre.
191
E80970
1. Disengage the ends from the recess and
fully retract the cover into the tray unit.
2. Fold the rigid portion of the blind back
under the unit and press until the edge
engages and is retained.
Removal and refitting of luggage cover
WARNING
Do not store the loadspace cover loose
in the vehicle.
Note: It is easier to remove/refit if the second
row seat backs have been tipped forward.
Load carrying
E80971
The luggage cover cartridge can be placed at
either end of the loadspace. The foremost
fitting is close behind the second row of seats;
the rearmost is behind where the third row of
seats are in a 7-seat vehicle.
1. Pull up the paddle at the right-hand end of
the cartridge; this disengages the locking
bolt. Lift the right-hand end of the unit and
pull it away from the opposite loadspace
side.
2. Installation of the cartridge is the reverse
of the removal procedure above.
5-seat vehicle
When the luggage cover is removed, it must be
stored away from the vehicle.
192
7-seat vehicle
WARNING
Never fit the luggage cover behind the
second row of seats if the third row is to
be occupied.
CAUTIONS
Remove the stowed unit before moving
the seats.
Do not attempt to raise the second-row
seats into the upright position, or tip
them forward for third-row access, while the
luggage cover is in this stowed position as
damage will result.
To fit the blind, the third row seats must be
folded down.
E81919
If the luggage cover is removed from a 7-seat
vehicle and both the second and third rows of
seats are down, the cover can be stowed in the
gap between the second and third row seats.
Lower the cover into the gap and engage the
receivers onto the studs protruding from the
outboard portions of the outboard second-row
seat-backs.
 Towing
Towing
TOWING A TRAILER
E80894
WARNINGS
Never exceed the maximum weights for
either the vehicle or trailer. Doing so
can cause accelerated wear and damage to the
vehicle. It can also adversely affect vehicle
stability and braking, which in turn can lead to
loss of control and increased braking distance
resulting in a rollover or crash.
To preserve handling and stability, only
fit Land Rover approved towing
accessories.
Never use towing eyes or lashing points
to tow a trailer. They have not been
designed for this purpose and doing so may
cause them to fail resulting in injury or death.
When towing, do not exceed 100 km/h
(60 mph), or 80 km/h (50 mph) if the
temporary spare wheel is in use.
The nose weight, plus the combined
weight of the vehicle's load carrying
area and rear seat passengers, must never
exceed the specified maximum rear axle load.
Exceeding allowable vehicle and axle loads will
increase the risk of tyre and suspension
failure, increase vehicle brake stopping
distance and adversely affect vehicle handling
and stability. This may result in a crash or
rollover.
193
CAUTIONS
An equalising or other form of weight
distributing hitch should not be used
with your vehicle.
To avoid excessive clutch wear at low
speeds, use low range on manual
transmission vehicles when manoeuvring
heavy trailers or performing hill starts.
When preparing your vehicle for towing,
pay attention to any instructions
provided by the trailer manufacturer.
Note: It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure
that the towing vehicle and trailer are being
used correctly in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations and any
applicable legislation.
The trailer warning indicator lamp
illuminates as a bulb check when the
starter switch is turned to position II
and extinguishes when the engine is started.
If the lamp does not flash with the direction
indicators, the trailer bulb may be faulty.
Towing
Trailer socket
Only connect approved electrical circuits,
which are in good condition, to the appropriate
vehicle socket. Connecting incorrect or faulty
circuits may seriously damage the vehicle’s
electrical circuits.
The vehicle's electrical system is configured to
support all towing requirements and the
electrical socket fitted will comply with legal
requirements for the specific territory.
All towing circuits are independently fused in
the tow hitch fusebox. See FUSE BOX
LOCATIONS (page 253).
Note: Rear parking sensors are automatically
disabled when a trailer electrical connection is
made.
Diesel engine vehicles
The diesel engine management system
incorporates sensors to determine optimum
performance. It is also designed to protect the
engine when arduous conditions are
encountered during towing. When ambient
temperature exceeds 40°C (104°F) the engine
coolant may increase above normal operating
level. If this occurs, the management system
will initiate a series of actions to restore normal
operating condition. The actions may include;
x A message centre message;
x Engine performance reduction
x Air conditioning system cycling. The
system temperature output will fluctuate
between hot and cold in order to dissipate
engine heat. If engine overheating persists
the air conditioning will move to
continuous heat output.
It is advisable to bring the vehicle and
trailer to a convenient stop and allow the
engine to idle until normal operating
temperature is restored. Do not turn off the
engine.
194
 Towing Towing
Fixed - tow ball Multi-height drop plate - tow bar

D
H I

D F E
G
B
C

A
B
A
E81325

Tow ball dimensions

Ref. Dimension Metric Imperial
A Wheel centre to centre of tow ball 1,190 mm 46.9 in.
B Ground to centre of tow ball 409 mm 16.1 in.
C Centre of tow ball to tow bar attachment 170 mm 6.7 in. J K

D Centre of tow ball to tow bar attachment 124 mm 4.9 in.

Note:
Dimensions refer to towing equipment
officially released by Land Rover.
E81326

195 196
 Towing
Tow ball dimensions
Ref. Dimension
A Wheel centre to centre of tow ball
(horizontal)
B Centre of outer attachment points to
centre of tow ball (horizontal)
C Centre line of housing bayonet slot tip
radius to centre of tow ball (horizontal)
D Centre of inner attachment points to
centre of tow ball (horizontal)
E Centre of inner attachment points to
centre of tow ball (vertical)
F Centre of upper tow ball plate bolt to
centre of tow ball (vertical)
G Centre of lower tow ball plate bolt to
centre of tow ball (vertical)
H Centre of outer attachment points to
centre of tow ball (horizontal)
I Centre line of housing bayonet slot tip
radius to centre of tow ball (vertical)
J Distance between inner attachment
point centres
K Distance between outer attachment
point centres
197
Towing
LEVELLING x Ensure that a suitable breakaway cable or
To optimise stability, it is essential that the secondary coupling is used. Refer to the
Metric Imperial
trailer is loaded so that it remains parallel to the trailer manufacturer's instructions for
1,210 mm 47.64 in. guidance.
ground, and with the towing hitch and trailer
drawbar set at the same height. See TOWING x Ensure that the tow ball is secure.
403.6 mm 15.89 in. A TRAILER (page 193). This is particularly x Check the operation of all trailer lights.
important when towing twin axle trailers. Set
192.4 mm 7.57 in. the height of the drawbar hitch point so that the WARNING
trailer is level when connected to the loaded Do not loop the breakaway cable over
108 mm 4.25 in. vehicle. the tow ball as it may slide off.
Australia only
20 mm 0.79 in.
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
x Tyre pressures - Increase rear pressures
x The trailer should be parallel to the ground
of towing vehicle to those for Maximum
when loaded.
36 mm 1.42 in. Gross Vehicle Weight conditions.
x When calculating the laden weight of the
x Nose weight - Must be a minimum of 7%
trailer, remember to include the weight of
70 mm 2.76 in. of gross caravan/trailer weight, up to a
the trailer, plus the weight of the load.
maximum of 350 kg (722 lb).
x If the load can be divided between the
167.3 mm 6.59 in. x Hitch height - Must be set with the engine
vehicle and trailer, loading more weight
running, so that the caravan/trailer is level
into the vehicle will generally improve
when connected to the vehicle.
174.3 mm 6.86 in. stability. Do not exceed the vehicle's
weight limits. See TECHNICAL
180.5 mm 7.10 in. SPECIFICATIONS (page 269).
x Ensure that all applicable regulations and
822.5 mm 32.38 in. legislation are complied with when loading
and towing a trailer.
x Increase rear tyre pressures of the towing
vehicle to those for maximum vehicle
loading conditions. See TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS (page 269).
x Ensure trailer tyre pressures are set to
trailer manufacturer's recommendations.
x If the vehicle is loaded to maximum Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) the nose weight is
limited to 150 kg (330 lbs).
x If it is necessary to increase the nose
weight, up to a maximum of 250 kg (550
lbs) the vehicle load should be reduced
accordingly. This ensures that the GVW,
and maximum rear axle load are not
exceeded.
198
 Towing Towing
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS DETACHABLE TOW BALL
WARNING Fitting the tow ball
Do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW), maximum rear axle weight, 1 4
maximum trailer weight, or nose weight.
Exceeding any of these limits could cause
instability and loss of control. See TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS (page 269).
Towing weights
Maximum permissible towed weights On-road Off-road
Unbraked trailers 750 kg (1 654 lb) 750 kg (1 654 lb)
Trailers with overrun brakes 3 500 kg (7 716 lb) 1 000 kg (2 205 lb)
Nose weight 150 kg (330 lb) -
2 3
Maximum towing/load limits
Gross Train Weight (Weight of Vehicle 6 680 - 6 730 kg 14 727 - 14 837 lb
plus Trailer with Overrun Brakes)
Roof load (including the weight of roof 75 kg 165 lb
rack)
5
Note: When towing the maximum permissible
Gross Vehicle Weight can be increased by a
maximum of 100 kg (220 lb) provided that the
road speed is limited to 100 km/h (60 mph).
Note: When calculating rear axle loading,
E82307
remember that the trailer nose weight, the load
in the vehicle’s luggage area, weight on the 1. Remove the protective cover from the tow 5. Turn the key counterclockwise to lock the
roof rack and the weight of the rear seat ball mounting and stow it in the tow ball tow ball before towing. Remove the key
passengers must all be added together. stowage area. and store in a safe place.
2. The tow ball can only be installed when the
Towing weights - Australia only
green locking lever is in the unlocked
Australian regulations specify that the weight position.
of a trailer must not exceed 1.5 times the
3. Insert the tow ball into the mounting and
towing vehicle's weight.
push firmly upwards until the tow ball
locks into position.
4. The red marker must be completely
covered by the green locking lever.

199 200
 Towing Towing
Removing the tow ball TOW BALL STOWAGE 7-seat models
WARNING
4
The tow ball is heavy, care must be
taken when handling it. When handling
the tow ball, hold the bottom of the
component. Locking into position occurs
automatically and causes the locking lever to
rotate under spring pressure.
Your vehicle is fitted with a towing housing
which will accept a detachable tow ball. The
2 following illustrations show a UK and Rest of
the World tow ball.
3 E82306
Note: An Australian tow ball is visually
The tow ball is stowed under an access cover
different, but is stowed in the same place.
in the loadspace floor (5-seat models) or
5-seat models behind an access cover on the left-hand side of
the loadspace (7-seat models).

E82308
E82305

1. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to

unlock.
2. Pull the handle outwards and rotate
counterclockwise until a click is heard. The
marker on the handle must show red.
3. Carefully lower the tow ball and place it in
its stowage area and fully secure it.
4. Replace the protective towing cover in the
tow ball mounting. Press the bottom of the
cover to fix it in position.
Note: The key can not be removed when the
tow ball has been detached.

201 202
 Vehicle care
Vehicle care
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
CAUTIONS
Some high pressure cleaning systems
are sufficiently powerful to penetrate
door/window seals and damage trim and door
locks.
Never aim the water jet directly at the engine
air intake, heater air intakes, body seals (door,
sunroof, windows etc.), or at any components
which may be damaged (lights, mirrors,
exterior trim etc.).
Do not use a power wash system in the
engine bay area as it may damage fragile
components, electrical systems etc.
Ensure that you read and comply with all
warnings and product instructions
supplied with any cleaning products.
Never use cleaning products that are not
approved for use on vehicles.
Substances which are corrosive such as
bird droppings, tree resin, dead insects,
tar spots, road salt and industrial fall out can
damage the vehicle's paintwork. Any such
deposits should be removed as soon as
possible to prevent damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork.
203
Washing the vehicle
E79400
Remove heavy deposits of mud and dirt with a
hose before washing the vehicle.
Wash the vehicle frequently using a sponge
and generous quantities of cold or lukewarm
water containing a suitable car shampoo. Rinse
thoroughly and dry with a chamois leather, or
synthetic substitute.
Occasionally treat the paint surface with an
approved polish, but do not apply it to the
unpainted areas of the bumper mouldings.
Note: In hot weather, do not wash the vehicle
in direct sunlight.
Vehicle care
Cleaning after off-road driving
CAUTION
Ensure that the areas around air intakes
and the front grille are clean and clear of
debris. Pay particular attention to the lower
grille and radiator. Failure to do so may cause
the engine to overheat, leading to severe
engine damage.
Ensure that the vehicle and underside is
cleaned soon as possible after off-road driving.
Further information on cleaning after off road
use is available in the Off-Road Driving
handbook. This can be found on-line at
http://www.ownerinfo.landrover.com.
E81976
Using a hosepipe, direct clean water through
the front bumper (where arrowed) to remove
any build up of mud on the radiator and air
conditioning condenser.
Removing tar spots
Use white spirit to remove tar spots and
stubborn grease stains from paintwork. Ensure
that after using white spirit, the area is washed
immediately with soapy water to remove all
traces of spirit.
204
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used on highways to
control snow and ice, as well as accumulations
from off-road driving or wading in salt water
can collect on the vehicle's underbody. If these
materials are not removed, accelerated
corrosion can occur. Regularly flush the
underbody with plain water, and pay particular
attention to areas where mud and debris
collect.
If damage or corrosion is detected, please have
the vehicle checked by a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer as soon as
possible.
Polishing
Occasionally treat the paint surface with an
approved polish containing the following
properties:
x Very mild abrasives to remove surface
contamination without removing or
damaging the paint.
x Filling compounds that will fill scratches
and reduce their visibility.
x Wax to provide a protective coating
between the paint and the elements.
Note: Do not apply car polish to the unpainted
areas of the bumper mouldings - polish will
become ingrained in the textured finished.
Glass and mirrors
CAUTION
Never use abrasive cleaning products or
metal ice scrapers on the mirrors or the
front/rear screens.
The rear screens and mirror glass should only
be cleaned using soapy water and a soft cloth.
This will avoid damaging the reflective surface
of the mirror and heating elements and antenna
in the rear screen.
 Vehicle care
CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS
CAUTION
Do not use non-approved or acid-based
wheel cleaners. These can damage the
wheel coating which mat lead to corrosion of
the wheel rims.
The alloy road wheels are covered with a
protective anti-corrosion coating. To prevent
corrosion it is essential that this coating is not
damaged.
When removing or fitting tyres always advise
the tyre fitter to treat the alloy wheels with great
care. Tyre levers must not be used.
Wash the wheels with soap and water: This
should be done more frequently when the
wheels are exposed to heavy dirt deposits, salt,
clay etc. If you are unsure how often to clean
the wheels in particular conditions, seek advice
from your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
Land Rover approved wheel cleaner should be
used to remove heavy soiling.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING
Ensure that you read all of the
instructions and information provided
with all cleaning products. Some products
may be harmful to health if used incorrectly.
CAUTION
Some products, if used incorrectly, can
cause damage to the interior surfaces of
the vehicle.
Plastic and cloth
WARNING
Do not polish the instrument panel.
Polished surfaces are reflective and
may interfere with the driver's view.
205
Clean plastic or cloth-faced surfaces with warm
water and a non-detergent soap, then wipe
clean with a soft cloth.
Leather
CAUTIONS
Only use cleaning products specifically
designed for use on leather. Do not use
chemical, alcohol or abrasive materials, as
they will cause rapid deterioration of the
leather. The use of products which are not
approved, will invalidate your warranty.
Some materials/fabrics are prone to
dye-transfer which can cause unsightly
discolouration of lighter coloured leathers.
Affected areas should be cleaned and
re-protected as soon as possible.
Leather should be cleaned and protected at
least every six months.
Land Rover recommend the use of leather
cleaning kit BAC500490. Use only in
accordance with the instructions.
Note: Some materials/fabrics are prone to dye
transfer which can cause unsightly
discolouration of lighter coloured leathers.
Affected areas should be cleaned and
re-protected as soon as possible.
Carpet and fabrics
Clean with only a dilute solution of an approved
upholstery cleaner. It is advisable to test all
cleaners on a concealed area before use.
Instrument pack, clock and audio unit
Only use a soft dry cloth to clean the
instrument pack, clock, and audio equipment.
Do not use cleaning fluids or sprays.
Vehicle care
Seat belts REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE
Regularly inspect the paintwork for damage.
WARNING
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in
Do not allow any water, cleaners, or the paint/bodywork should be repaired
fabric from cloths to enter the seat belt
promptly. Bare metal will corrode quickly and,
mechanism. Any substance which enters the if left untreated can result in expensive repairs.
mechanism may affect the performance of the
Minor chips and scratches can be touched up
seat belt in an impact.
using materials and advice available from your
Extend the seat belts fully, then use warm Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer. Larger
water and a non-detergent soap to clean. Allow areas of damage will require professional
the seat belts to dry naturally whilst fully repair and you should consult your Land Rover
extended. Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
Note: Whilst cleaning the seat belt, take the
opportunity to examine the webbing for
damage/wear. Any wear or damage should be
rectified by a Land Rover Dealer/Approved
Repairer.
Airbag module covers
WARNING
Airbag covers should only be cleaned
using a slightly dampened cloth, and a
small amount of upholstery cleaner. Do not
allow the airbag covers, or surrounding areas,
to become contaminated with liquids. Any
substance which enters the mechanism can
prevent correct deployment of an airbag
during an impact.
206
 Maintenance
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Regular systematic maintenance is the key to
ensuring the reliability and efficiency of your
vehicle.
Maintenance is the owner's responsibility and
you must ensure that owner maintenance
operations, oil services, inspections and brake
fluid and coolant changes are carried out when
required and according to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
The routine maintenance requirements for your
vehicle are shown in the Service Portfolio book.
Most of this necessary maintenance requires
specialised knowledge and equipment, and
should be entrusted to a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
Service Portfolio
The Service Portfolio book includes a Service
Record section, which allows for a recording of
all the servicing and inspections that are
carried out on the vehicle. This section of the
book also has an area for brake fluid changes
to be recorded.
Ensure your service provider signs and stamps
the book after each service and inspection.
207
Owner Maintenance
CAUTION
Any significant or sudden drop in fluid
levels, or uneven tyre wear, should be
reported to a qualified technician without
delay.
In addition to the routine maintenance, a
number of simple checks must be carried out
more frequently. These checks are detailed in
the following sections.
Daily checks
x Operation of lamps, horn, direction
indicators, wipers, washers and warning
indicators.
x Operation of seat belts and brakes.
x Look for fluid deposits underneath the
vehicle that might indicate a leak.
Weekly checks
x Engine oil level. See ENGINE OIL CHECK
(page 212).
x Engine coolant check. See ENGINE
COOLANT CHECK (page 213).
x Brake fluid level. See BRAKE FLUID CHECK
(page 215).
x Power steering fluid level. See POWER
STEERING FLUID CHECK (page 216).
x Screen washer fluid level. See WASHER
FLUID CHECK (page 217).
x Tyre pressures and condition.
x Operate air conditioning.
Note: The engine oil level must be checked
more frequently if the vehicle is driven for long
periods at high speeds.
Maintenance
Driving in arduous conditions
When a vehicle is operated in extremely
arduous conditions, more frequent attention
must be paid to servicing requirements.
For example: If your vehicle experiences deep
wading conditions, even daily servicing could
be necessary to ensure the continued safe and
reliable operation of the vehicle.
Arduous driving conditions include:
x Driving in dusty and/or sandy conditions.
x Driving on rough and/or muddy roads
and/or wading.
x Driving in extremely hot conditions.
x Towing a trailer or driving in mountainous
conditions.
Contact your Dealer for advice.
Emission control
Your vehicle is fitted with various items of
emission and evaporative control equipment,
designed to meet specific territorial
requirements. You should be aware that
unauthorised replacement, modification or
tampering with this equipment by an owner or
repair shop, may be unlawful and subject to
legal penalties.
In addition, engine settings must not be
tampered with. These have been established to
ensure that your vehicle complies with
stringent exhaust emission regulations.
Incorrect engine settings may adversely affect
exhaust emissions, engine performance and
fuel consumption. They may also cause high
temperatures, which will result in damage to
the catalytic converter and the vehicle.
208
Road testing dynamometers (rolling
roads)
Because your vehicle is equipped with anti-lock
brakes and four-wheel drive, it is essential that
any dynamometer testing is carried out only by
a qualified person, familiar with the
dynamometer testing and safety procedures
practised by Land Rover Dealers/Authorised
Repairers.
Safety in the garage
WARNINGS
If the vehicle has been driven recently,
do not touch exhaust and cooling
system components until the engine has
cooled.
Never leave the engine running in an
unventilated area - exhaust gases are
poisonous and extremely dangerous.
Do not work beneath the vehicle with
the wheel changing jack as the only
means of support.
Keep your hands and clothing away
from drive belts, pulleys and fans.Some
fans may continue to operate after the engine
has stopped.
Remove metal wrist bands and
jewellery, before working in the engine
compartment. Do not touch electrical
leads or components while the engine is
running, or with the starter switch turned on.
Do not allow tools or metal parts of the
vehicle to make contact with the battery
leads or terminals.
 Maintenance Maintenance
Fuel system OPENING AND CLOSING THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW
WARNINGS BONNET
Under no circumstances should any Opening the bonnet
part of the fuel system be dismantled or
replaced by anyone other than a suitably
qualified vehicle technician. Failure to comply 3 3
with this instruction, may result in fuel spillage
with a consequent serious risk of fire.
Keep sparks and naked lights away 1 1 2
from the engine compartment.
Wear protective clothing, including,
where practicable, gloves made from 1 2
an impervious material. 4
5
Poisonous fluids
Fluids used in motor vehicles are poisonous 6
and should not be consumed or brought into
contact with open wounds. These include;
battery acid, antifreeze, brake, clutch and E89409
E80332
power steering fluid, petrol, diesel, engine oil 1 Engine oil filler cap
and windscreen washer additives. 1. Pull the bonnet release handle located on
2 Engine oil dipstick
For your own safety, always read and obey all the left-hand side of the vehicle.
3 Brake fluid reservoir
instructions printed on fluid container labels. 2. Lift the bonnet safety catch lever located
below the centre point of the words LAND 4 Power steering fluid reservoir
Used engine oil ROVER, and raise the bonnet. 5 Cooling system reservoir
Prolonged contact with engine oil may cause
Closing the bonnet 6 Washer reservoir
serious skin disorders, including dermatitis
and cancer of the skin. Always wash
WARNING WARNING
thoroughly after contact.
Do not drive with the bonnet retained by While working in the engine
It is illegal to pollute drains, water
the safety catch alone. compartment, always observe the
courses or soil. Use authorised
Lower the bonnet until the safety catch safety precautions listed under Safety in the
waste disposal sites to dispose of
engages. Using both hands, press the bonnet garage. See GENERAL INFORMATION
used oil and other chemicals.
down until the catches click. (page 207).
Check that both catches are fully engaged by Do not drive the vehicle if there is a possibility
attempting to lift the front edge of the bonnet, that leaked fluid will come into contact with a
which should be free from any movement. hot surface, such as the exhaust. A resulting
fire may cause death or serious injury.

209 210
 Maintenance Maintenance
1. Engine oil filler cap (black) 6. Power steering fluid reservoir cap UNDER BONNET COVERS ENGINE OIL CHECK
(black) Check the oil level weekly, when the engine is
Removal
cold and with the vehicle resting on level
ground.
The oil consumption of an engine is influenced
by many factors. Under high loads an engine
will consume more oil than usual. Diesel
E83865
engines usually consume slightly more oil than
E89410 petrol engines.

2. Engine oil dipstick (yellow) Checking the oil level

Note: If you need to check the oil level when
the engine is hot, switch off the engine and let
the vehicle stand for five minutes to allow the
oil to drain back into the sump. Do not start the
engine.

E80386
E89412

1. Press the two tabs to release the front edge

3. Brake fluid reservoir cap (yellow) MAX
of the cover.
2. Lift the front edge of the cover and slide
forwards. MIN
Fitting

E83862 CAUTION
Before refitting the engine covers, ensure
4. Coolant reservoir cap (yellow) that no pipes, cables, or other items have
been trapped between the cover and casing.
1. Slide the rear edge of the cover under the
rubber trim fitted to the scuttle panel.
2. Make sure the front edge of the cover in
E83863 flush to the casing and then press down
until the tabs click into place.
5. Washer fluid reservoir cap (blue)
MAX
MIN
LAN1169
1. Withdraw the dipstick and wipe the blade
clean with a lint-free cloth.
2. Fully re-insert the dipstick and then
withdraw again to check the oil level. Never
allow the oil level to fall below the lower
mark or hole on the dipstick.

E83864

211 212
 Maintenance
As a general guide, if the level on the dipstick:
x Is nearer to the maximum than the
minimum, add no oil.
x Is nearer to the minimum than the
maximum, add half a litre (one pint) of oil.
x Is below the minimum, add one litre (two
pints) of oil and, after five minutes,
re-check the level.
Topping up the oil
CAUTIONS
Your vehicle warranty may be invalidated
if damage is caused by using oil that
does not meet the required specification.
Failure to use an oil that meets the
required specification can cause
excessive engine wear, a build up of sludge
and deposits, and increase pollution. It could
also lead to engine failure.
Overfilling with oil could result in severe
engine damage. Oil should be added in
small quantities and the level re-checked to
ensure that the engine is not overfilled.
1. Remove the oil filler cap.
2. Add oil to maintain the level between the
MIN and MAX marks or holes on the
dipstick. Clean up any oil spilled during
topping-up.
3. Check the oil level again after five minutes.
It is essential to use the correct specification
oil, and to ensure it is suitable for the climatic
conditions in which the vehicle is to be
operated.
Note: The approximate quantity of oil required
to raise the level from MIN to MAX on the
dipstick is 1.5 litres (2.64 pints).
213
Engine oil specification
Variant Specification
Diesel vehicles SAE 5W-30 meeting
specification
WSS-M2C913-B only
Petrol vehicles WSS-M2C913-B ¹
¹ If you are unable to find an oil that meets the
specification defined by WSS-M2C913-B, you
must use an SAE 5W-30 oil meeting
specification ACEA:A3/B3.
Land Rover recommends:
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
If the fluid in the coolant reservoir
drops below the recommended
level, an amber warning indicator
lamp in the instrument pack illuminates. Stop
the vehicle and check the coolant level.
On vehicles with a message centre, the
message LOW COOLANT LEVEL or COOLING
SYSTEM FAULT MONITOR GAUGE is
displayed.
Checking the coolant level
CAUTION
Running the engine without coolant will
cause serious engine damage.
The coolant level in the expansion tank should
be checked at least weekly (more frequently in
high mileage or arduous operating conditions).
Always check the level when the system is
cold.
Maintenance
E80387
Ensure the coolant level is maintained between
the level indicator marks located above and
below COLD FILL RANGE, on the side of the
expansion tank. This should be viewed by
standing in front of the vehicle. Ignore any
coolant visible in the top section of the tank.
If the level has fallen appreciably, suspect
leakage in the system, or overheating, and
arrange for the vehicle to be examined by a
qualified technician.
Topping up the coolant
WARNINGS
Never remove the filler cap when the
engine is hot - escaping steam or
scalding water could cause serious personal
injury.
Avoid spilling antifreeze onto a hot
engine - a fire may result.
Unscrew the filler cap slowly, allowing
the pressure to escape before removing
completely.
214
CAUTION
When travelling in territories where the
water supply contains salt, always
ensure you carry a supply of fresh (rain or
distilled) water. Topping up with salt water will
cause serious engine damage.
Top-up to the upper level indicator mark
located above COLD FILL RANGE, on the side
of the expansion tank. Use only a 50% mix of
water and Castrol SF antifreeze.
Ensure the cap is tightened fully after top-up is
completed by turning the cap until the ratchet
cap clicks.
Note: In an emergency - and only if the
approved antifreeze is unavailable - top-up the
cooling system with clean water, but be aware
of the resultant reduction in frost protection.
Do not top-up or refill with conventional
antifreeze formulations. If in doubt consult a
qualified technician.
Antifreeze
WARNINGS
Antifreeze is poisonous and can be fatal
if swallowed - keep containers sealed
and out of the reach of children. If accidental
consumption is suspected, seek medical
attention immediately.
If the fluid comes into contact with the
skin or eyes, rinse immediately with
plenty of water.
CAUTIONS
The use of non-approved antifreeze will
have an adverse effect on the engine
cooling system and therefore engine
durability.
 Maintenance
CAUTIONS
Antifreeze will damage painted surfaces;
soak up any spillage with an absorbent
cloth immediately and wash the area with a
mixture of car shampoo and water.
Antifreeze contains important corrosion
inhibitors. The antifreeze content of the coolant
must be maintained at 50% ± 5% all year round
(not just in cold conditions). To ensure that the
anti-corrosion properties of the coolant are
retained, the antifreeze content should be
checked once a year and completely renewed
every ten years, regardless of distance
travelled. Failure to do so may cause corrosion
of the radiator and engine components.
The specific gravity of a 50% antifreeze
solution at 20°C (68°F) is 1.068 and protects
against frost down to -40°C (-40°F).
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNINGS
Brake fluid is highly toxic - keep
containers sealed and out of the reach
of children. If accidental consumption of fluid
is suspected, seek medical attention
immediately.
If the fluid comes into contact with the
skin or eyes, rinse immediately with
plenty of water.
Take care not to spill the fluid onto a hot
engine - a fire may result.
Do not drive the vehicle with the fluid
level below the MIN mark.
If the quantity of fluid in the brake
reservoir drops below the
recommended level, a red warning
indicator in the instrument pack will illuminate
or the message CHECK BRAKE FLUID will be
displayed in the message centre.
215
Note: If the warning indicator illuminates, or
the message is displayed while the vehicle is
being driven, stop the vehicle as soon as safety
permits by gently applying the brakes.
Check and top-up the fluid level if necessary.
Checking the fluid level
WARNING
If brake pedal travel is unusually long
or if there is any significant loss of
brake fluid, seek qualified assistance
immediately. Driving under such conditions
could result in extended stopping distances or
complete brake failure.
With the vehicle on level ground, check the
fluid level at least once per week (more
frequently in high mileage or arduous
operating conditions).
E80388
Look at the level through the side of the
transparent reservoir without removing the
filler cap.
The brake fluid level must be between the MIN
and the MAX marks.
The fluid level may fall slightly during normal
use as a result of brake pad wear but should
never be allowed to fall below the MIN mark.
Maintenance
Topping up the fluid Checking the fluid level
CAUTIONS CAUTIONS
Brake fluid will damage painted surfaces. Do not start the engine if the fluid level
Soak up any spillage with an absorbent has dropped below the MIN mark. Severe
cloth immediately and wash the area with a damage to the steering pump could result.
mixture of car shampoo and water. Seek qualified assistance immediately if
Only use new fluid from an airtight there is a large or sudden drop in the
container. Fluid from opened containers fluid level.
or fluid previously bled from the system will If loss is slow, the reservoir may be topped-up
have absorbed moisture, which will adversely to the upper level mark to enable the vehicle to
affect performance, and must not be used. be driven to a repair facility for examination.
1. Clean the filler cap before removing to However, it is recommended that you seek
prevent dirt from entering the reservoir. qualified assistance before driving the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the electrical lead. Check and top-up the fluid with the vehicle on
3. Unscrew the cap (1/8 turn) and remove. level ground, engine switched off and the
system cold. Ensure that the steering wheel is
4. Top-up the reservoir to the MAX mark
not turned after stopping the engine.
using Shell DOT4 ESL brake fluid. If Shell
DOT4 ESL is not available, a low viscosity
DOT4 brake fluid that meets ISO 4925
class 6 and Land Rover LRES22BF03
requirements may be used.
5. Replace the cap and reconnect the
electrical lead, ensuring that the lead
points to the centre-line of the vehicle.
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK
WARNINGS
Power steering fluid is highly toxic.
Keep containers sealed and out of reach E80389
of children. If accidental consumption of fluid
Look at the level through the side of the
is suspected, seek medical attention
transparent reservoir without removing the
immediately.
filler cap.
If the fluid comes into contact with the
The fluid level should be between the MIN and
skin or eyes, rinse immediately with
the MAX marks.
plenty of water.
Do not spill the fluid onto a hot engine -
a fire may result.
216
 Maintenance Maintenance
Topping up the fluid CAUTIONS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTIONS Body panels may suffer discolouration as Lubricants and fluids
a result of screen wash spillage. Take
Power steering fluid will damage painted
care to avoid spillage, particularly if an Part Variant Specification
surfaces. Soak up any spillage with an
undiluted or high concentration is being used.
absorbent cloth immediately and wash the Engine oil Diesel vehicles SAE 5W-30 meeting specification WSS-M2C913-B
If spillage occurs, wash the affected area
area with a mixture of car shampoo and water. only
immediately with water.
Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX Engine oil Petrol vehicles WSS-M2C913-B ¹
If the quantity of fluid remaining in
mark. Main gearbox oil Manual Castrol MTF BOT338
the washer reservoir drops to less
1. Clean the filler cap before removing to than one litre, an amber warning transmission
prevent dirt from entering the reservoir. indicator in the instrument pack will illuminate Main gearbox oil Automatic Shell ATF M1375.4
2. Remove filler cap. or the message LOW WASHER FLUID will be transmission
3. Using Texaco Cold Climate PAS fluid, displayed in the message centre. Transfer gearbox oil All vehicles Shell TF 0753
top-up the reservoir until the fluid level is Front differential oil All vehicles SAF XO
between the MIN and MAX marks.
Rear differential oil Non-locking SAF XO
4. Replace the filler cap.
Rear differential oil Electronic locking Castrol SAF Carbon Mod Plus
WASHER FLUID CHECK Power steering fluid All vehicles Texaco Cold Climate PAS fluid
Brake fluid All vehicles Shell DOT4 ESL ²
WARNINGS
Screen washer All vehicles Screen wash with frost protection
Some screen wash products are
inflammable, particularly if high or Coolant All vehicles 50% mixture of Castrol SF antifreeze and water.
undiluted concentrations are exposed to
sparking. Do not allow screen wash fluid to ¹ If you are unable to find an oil that meets the specification defined by WSS-M2C913-B, you must
come into contact with naked flames or use an SAE 5W-30 oil meeting specification ACEA:A3/B3.
sources of ignition. E80390 ² If Shell DOT4 ESL is not available, a low viscosity DOT4 brake fluid that meets ISO 4925 class 6
If the vehicle is operated in and Land Rover LRES22BF03 requirements may be used.
The washer reservoir supplies both front and
temperatures below 4°C (40°F), use a
rear screen washer jets and headlamp washer
washer fluid with frost protection. In cold
jets.
weather, failure to use a washer fluid with frost
protection, could result in impaired vision and Check and top-up the reservoir level at least
increase the risk of a vehicle crash. once per week. In cold climates, always top-up
with screen washer fluid to prevent freezing.
CAUTIONS Operate the washers to check that the nozzles
are clear and properly directed.
Do not use an antifreeze or vinegar/water
solution in the washer reservoir -
antifreeze will damage painted surfaces, while
vinegar can damage the windscreen washer
pump.

217 218
 Maintenance Vehicle battery
Vehicle battery

Capacities Adjustments BATTERY WARNING SYMBOLS WARNINGS

CAUTION
Item
The quoted capacities are approximate Brake pedal free travel Not adjustable
and provided as a guide only. All oil
Clutch pedal free travel Not adjustable
levels must be checked using the dipstick or
level plugs as applicable.
Item Variant
Fuel tank Diesel vehicles
Petrol vehicles
Engine oil (dry fill) Diesel vehicles
V8 Petrol vehicles
V6 Petrol vehicles
Engine oil refill and filter change Diesel vehicles
V8 Petrol vehicles
V6 Petrol vehicles
Engine oil MIN to MAX on dipstick Diesel vehicles
V8 Petrol vehicles
V6 Petrol vehicles
Manual gearbox All vehicles
Automatic gearbox All vehicles
Transfer box All vehicles
Front differential All vehicles
Rear differential - non-locking All vehicles
Rear differential - electronic locking All vehicles
Washer reservoir All vehicles
Cooling system (fill from dry) Diesel vehicles
V8 Petrol vehicles
V6 Petrol vehicles
Cooling system (refill) Diesel vehicles
V8 Petrol vehicles
V6 Petrol vehicles
On the battery label, the warning signs are as Do not connect any 12 volt equipment
Setting follows: directly to the battery terminals. Doing
No smoking, no naked flames, no so may cause a spark, which can result in an
sparks. The battery may emit explosion.
explosive gas. The cell plugs and vent pipe must be in
Keep away from children to prevent place at all times when the battery is
Capacity the risk of injury. connected to the vehicle. Ensure that the vent
82 litres (18 gallons) Shield eyes with suitable eye pipe is clear of obstructions and not kinked.
protection to reduce the risk of Failure to do so may cause a pressure build up
86 litres (19 gallons)
injury from acid splashes. in the battery, which can result in an explosion.
6.55 litres (11.53 pints) Do not expose the battery to a naked
Battery acid is extremely corrosive
8.0 litres (14.10 pints) flame or spark as the battery produces
and toxic.
6.4 litres (12.08 pints) explosive, flammable gas.
Explosive gas may cause explosion
5.45 litres (9.6 pints) Never jump start (boost) or charge, a
or fire.
frozen battery. Doing so can result in an
7.7 litres (13.5 pints)
explosion.
5.7 litres (10 pints) BATTERY CARE
Remove all metal jewellery before
1.5 litres (2.64 pints) WARNINGS working on, or near the battery, and
1.5 litres (2.64 pints) Do not allow the battery electrolyte never allow metal objects or vehicle
1.4 litres (2.46 pints) (fluid) come into contact with your skin components to come into contact with the
or eyes. It is both corrosive and toxic, and the battery terminals. Metal objects can cause a
1.6 litres (2.6 pints) spark and/or short circuit, which can result in
resulting injuries can be severe. If any
Filled for life electrolyte does come into contact with your an explosion.
1.5 litres (2.64 pints) skin or eyes, immediately rinse the affected Do not allow the battery posts or
0.66 litres (1.2 pints) area with clean, cold water. Immediate medical terminals to come into contact with
advice will be required. your skin. They contain lead and lead
1.16 litres (2.0 pints)
If battery electrolyte comes into contact compounds which are toxic. Always wash
1.61 litres (2.8 pints) your hands thoroughly after handling the
with your skin and/or clothes you
5.0 litres (8.8 pints) should remove the affected clothing and flush battery.
18.0 litres (31.7 pints) the skin with copious amount of water. Seek
medical assistance immediately. CAUTIONS
14.0 litres (24.63 pints)
If battery electrolyte comes into contact Do not allow battery electrolyte to come
17.0 litres (29.91 pints) into contact with fabric or painted
with your eyes, flush with copious
8.0 litres (14.1 pints amounts of clean cold water. Seek medical surfaces. Battery electrolyte is both corrosive
9.5 litres (16.7 pints) assistance immediately and continue to flush and toxic and can damage a wide range of
with water. materials. If battery electrolyte comes into
8.5 litres (15 pints)
contact with any surface, wash it down
If swallowed, battery electrolyte can be
immediately with copious amounts of clean
fatal. Seek medical assistance
water.
immediately.

219 220
 Vehicle battery
Your vehicle is fitted with a low maintenance
battery.
In hot climates more frequent checks of the
battery electrolyte level and condition are
required. If necessary, the battery cells can be
topped up using distilled water.
The exterior of the battery should be wiped
clean occasionally to remove any dirt or
grease.
If a new battery is to be fitted, it must be the
same type as the original. The use of
unapproved batteries is not recommended and
could invalidate the vehicle warranty.
We recommend that the battery charge is
checked frequently if the vehicle is used mostly
for short distance trips or if it is not used for
long periods of time.
Note: The service life of the battery is
dependent on its condition of charge. It must
always be sufficiently charged for the battery to
last an optimum length of time.
Check and replenish battery electrolyte
E81572
Unscrew the six cell plugs and store carefully.
Check that the surface of the liquid
(electrolyte) is level with the plastic level
indicator 1. If necessary, top up with distilled
water, but never overfill. Refit the six cell plugs.
221
Note: In normal climates this check must be
carried out at least once a year. During hot
weather or in hot climates the electrolyte level
must be checked at least every three months.
Note: If light is required to inspect the
electrolyte level, use only a small electric
flashlight, never a naked flame.
USING BOOSTER CABLES
WARNINGS
During normal operation batteries emit
explosive hydrogen gas - ensure sparks
and naked flames are kept away from the
engine compartment.
Make sure both batteries are of the
same voltage (12 volts), and that the
booster cables have insulated clamps and are
approved for use with 12 volt batteries.
Do not connect positive (+) terminals to
negative (-) terminals.
Do not attempt to start the vehicle if the
electrolyte in the battery is suspected of
being frozen.
Do not disconnect the discharged
battery.
Take care when working near rotating
parts of the engine. Ensure cables are
kept well clear.
CAUTIONS
Do not use a 24 volt booster start
system. These produce excessive
voltage and can damage the vehicles electrical
system.
Do not push or tow start a vehicle with a
discharged battery.
Vehicle battery
Boosting from another vehicle
If a donor vehicle is to be used, park it so that
the battery location is adjacent, but make sure
the two vehicles do not touch. +
Apply the electric parking brake and ensure
that the transmission of both vehicles is set in
neutral (Park for vehicles with automatic +
transmission).
Turn off the starter switch and all electrical
equipment in both vehicles. +
Note: Before connecting booster cables
ensure that the battery connections on the
disabled vehicle are correct and that all
electrical equipment has been switched off.
+
Boosting procedure
WARNINGS
Do not connect the black cable to the
negative terminal of the discharged
battery. If in doubt, seek qualified assistance. E80818
Ensure that each connection is securely
made and that there is no risk of the The discharged battery is in the shaded vehicle
clips accidentally slipping or being pulled from in the illustration above.
the connection points/battery terminal - this Always make sure the cables are connected in
could cause sparking, which could lead to fire the order shown below:
or explosion.
1. Connect one end of the positive booster
cable to the positive (+) terminal on the
donor vehicle’s battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
booster cable to the positive (+) terminal
on the disabled vehicle’s battery.
3. Connect one end of negative (-) booster
cable to the negative (-) terminal on the
donor vehicle’s battery.
222
 Vehicle battery
4. Connect the other end of the negative (-)
booster cable to a suitable earth point on
the disabled vehicle. The earth point
should be at least 0.5m (20 in.) away from
the battery and as far as possible from any
fuel or brake pipes.
5. Check that the cables are clear of any
moving components and that all four
connections are secure.
6. Start the vehicle of the donor vehicle and
allow it to idle for a few minutes.
7. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
8. Allow both vehicles to idle for two minutes.
9. Switch off the donor vehicle.
Disconnecting the cables
WARNINGS
To avoid serious injury, use extreme
caution when removing the booster
cables as the engine will be running on the
previously disabled vehicle. This means that
you will be working close to components
which are moving at high speed, carry high
voltage, or may be hot.
Note: Do not switch on any electrical circuits
on the previously disabled vehicle until after
the booster cables have been removed.
The engine should be running on the
previously disabled vehicle and the engine
switched off on the donor vehicle. Disconnect
the booster cables in the exact reverse order to
that used for connection.
CHARGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY
WARNINGS
Ensure that the correct type and rating
of charger is used. Using an unsuitable
charger may damage the battery and could
cause the battery to explode.
223
WARNINGS
Always charge the battery in a well
ventilated area away from any naked
flames, sparks or other ignition sources.
During charging the battery can produce a
highly explosive and flammable gas.
CAUTIONS
The battery must be disconnected and
removed from the vehicle before
charging. Failure to do so could result in
damage to the vehicle’s electrical system.
Always follow the instructions supplied
with the battery charger. Failure to do so
may result in damage to the battery.
Always heed the following precautions:
x Before charging, disconnect and remove
the battery from the vehicle. Charging the
battery with the cables connected may
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
x The battery charger leads must be securely
clamped to the battery terminals before
switching on the battery charger. Do not
move the leads after the charger is
switched on.
x Switch off the battery charger before
disconnecting the leads from the battery
terminals.
After charging, leave the battery for one
hour before reconnecting it. This will
minimise the risk of fire or explosion.
Note: Be aware that a battery will take longer to
charge in a cold environment.
1. Disconnect the battery and remove it from
the vehicle.
2. Connect the battery charger in accordance
with the charger manufacturer’s
instructions.
3. Once the charge is complete switch off the
power to the charger.
Vehicle battery
4. Disconnect the charger leads from the
battery.
5. Allow the battery to stand for an hour
before connecting to the vehicle. This will
allow any explosive gases to dissipate and
reduce the risk of explosion.
Battery warning indicator
The red warning indicator lamp in
the instrument pack illuminates as a
bulb check when the starter switch
is turned to position II and extinguishes once
the engine is running. If it remains on, or
illuminates while driving, a fault with the
battery charging system is indicated. Seek
qualified assistance urgently.
224
CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY
WARNINGS
Always remove the starter key before
disconnecting the battery. Failure to do
this may cause a failure of the airbag SRS.
Use caution when lifting the battery out
of, or into, the vehicle. It is heavy and
may cause injury when lifting or dropped.
Do not tilt the battery more than 45
degrees as it may cause damage and
may cause the electrolyte to leak out. Battery
electrolyte is highly corrosive and toxic.
If the battery leads are connected to the
wrong terminals, the electrical system
may be damaged.
CAUTIONS
Do not rest the battery on any part of the
vehicle as it may cause damage due to its
weight.
Do not run the engine with the battery
disconnected. Doing so may damage the
charging system.
1. Ensure that all electrical circuits are
switched off, all windows are closed and
the alarm is disarmed.
2. Remove the remote control from the
vehicle and wait two minutes to allow the
systems to power do fully.
3. Undo the negative clamp and lift the cable
and clamp clear of the battery terminal.
4. Undo the positive clamp and lift the cable
and clamp clear of the battery terminal.
5. Undo the battery clamp and lift the battery
clear of the vehicle.
 Vehicle battery Wheels and tyres
Wheels and tyres

Effects of battery disconnection REFITTING THE VEHICLE BATTERY GENERAL INFORMATION

Disconnecting the battery can affect a number
of vehicle systems, especially if there is
insufficient battery power prior to
disconnection. For example, the alarm system
may trigger depending on its state when the
battery was disconnected. If the alarm does
sound, use the remote control in the normal
way to disarm the security system. The
windows may need resetting to enable the
one-shot feature to operate correctly. See
ELECTRIC WINDOWS (page 108).
Battery replacement
Ensure that the battery sits with its terminal
posts towards the rear of the vehicle, and that
the clamping plate is secure. Tighten the
clamping plate nuts until the clamping plate is
free from movement (do not over tighten).
Replacement batteries
WARNINGS
Fit only a battery of the correct type and
rating. Fitting an incorrect battery may
result in a fire or damage to the electrical
system. If you are in any doubt when fitting a
battery, seek qualified assistance.
Petrol vehicles H7 75 amp/hr
Diesel vehicles H8 90 amp/hr
Battery disposal
Recycle used batteries. However,
batteries are hazardous and must be
disposed of correctly.
Note: Used batteries must be disposed of
correctly as they contain a number of harmful
substances. Seek advice on disposal from your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer or your local
authority.
WARNINGS
Remove all metal jewellery before
working on, or near, the battery, and
never allow metal objects or vehicle
components to come into contact with battery
terminals. Metal objects can cause a spark
and/or short circuit, which can result in an
explosion.
CAUTIONS
Ensure that when fitting a battery to the
vehicle, the terminals and battery clamps
are clean and lightly coated with petroleum
jelly. This will ensure good electrical
connections are made and help prevent
corrosion.
Always follow the battery manufacturer’s
instructions. Failure to do so may result
in damage to the vehicle and/or the electrical
system.
A new battery should be supplied with plastic
terminal covers. Leave the covers in place
when fitting the battery. Remove them one at a
time to fit the battery cable clamps.
Refitting is an exact reversal of the removal
procedure. If you are in any doubt about fitting
a battery, seek qualified assistance before
attempting to fit the battery.
Tyre markings
3 4 5 6
2 7 8
1
9
15
10
14
13 11
12
E80640
1. P indicates that the tyre is for passenger 7. The speed rating denotes the maximum
use. speed at which the tyre should be used for
2. The width of the tyre from sidewall edge to extended periods. †
sidewall edge in millimetres. 8. Tyre manufacturing standard information,
3. The aspect ratio, also know as profile, which can be used for tyre recalls and
gives the sidewall height as a percentage other checking processes. Most of this
of the tread width. If the tread width is 205 information relates to the manufacturer,
mm, and the aspect ratio is 50, the sidewall place of manufacture etc. The last four
numbers are the date of manufacture. For
height is102 mm.
example, if the number was 3106, the tyre
4. R indicates that the tyre is of Radial ply
was made in the 31st week of 2006.
construction.
9. M+S or M/S indicates that the tyre has
5. The diameter of the wheel rim given in
been designed with some capability for
inches.
mud and snow.
6. The load index for the tyre. This index is
not always shown.

225 226
 Wheels and tyres
10. The number of plies in both the tread area,
and the sidewall area, indicates how many
layers of rubber coated material make up
the structure of the tyre. Information is
also provided on the type of materials
used.
11. Wear rate indicator. A tyre rated at 400 for
example, will last twice as long as a tyre
rated at 200.
12. The traction rating grades a tyre's
performance when stopping on a wet road
surface. The higher the grade the better the
braking performance. The grades from
highest to lowest are, AA, A, B, and C.
13. The maximum load which can be carried
by the tyre.
14. Heat resistance grading. The tyres
resistance to heat is grade A, B, or C, with
A indicating the greatest resistance to heat.
This grading is provided for a correctly
inflated tyre, which is being used within its
speed and loading limits.
15. The maximum inflation pressure for the
tyre. This pressure should not be used for
normal driving.
† Speed ratings
Rating Speed (mph)
Q 99
R 106
S 112
T 118
U 124
H 130
V 149
W 168
Y 186
227
TOOL KIT
5-seat vehicles
E80452
On 5-seat vehicles, the tool kit is located under
a panel set in the loadspace floor.
Note: Tool types and positions, may vary from
the illustrations.
7-seat vehicles
E80453
On 7-seat vehicles, the tool kit is stowed
behind an access cover in the loadspace area.
Note: Take careful note of the stowage position
of each of the tools as it is important to return
them to their correct position after use.
Wheels and tyres
Tool kit contents 8. Locking wheel nut adapter
9. Jack adapter (coil suspension)
WARNINGS
10. Wheel change jack (coil suspension)
After use the tool kit should be returned
to its storage area and correctly Care of the jack
stowed. Do not leave the tool kit, or its The jack requires occasional maintenance.
components, loose in the storage area as they Examine the jack for wear, damage. Clean and
can prove hazardous during an impact or grease the moving parts, particularly the screw
sudden manoeuvre. thread, to prevent corrosion.
To avoid contamination, the jack should always
1 be stowed in its fully closed position.
2
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
3 4
WARNINGS
The spare wheel is heavy and if handled
incorrectly may cause injury. Use
6
5 extreme caution when lifting or manoeuvring
7 the wheels.
Always secure the spare wheel, or the
8 removed wheel, in the correct position
using the retaining bolt. Failure to do so may
9 cause the spare wheel to move in the event of
a sudden manoeuvre or accident, leading to
death or serious injury.
3 Wheel changing safety
4
10 4 Before raising the vehicle or changing a wheel,
ensure that you read and comply with the
following warnings.
WARNINGS
E80454 Always find a safe place to stop, off of
the highway and away from traffic.
1. Screwdriver handle
Ensure that the vehicle is on firm level
2. Screwdriver blade
ground.
3. Jack screw rotating hook
Disconnect any trailer/caravan from the
4. Extension piece vehicle.
5. Wheel nut brace Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
6. Wheel chocks
7. Wheel change jack (air suspension)
228
 Wheels and tyres Wheels and tyres

WARNINGS Spare wheel Spare wheel access - 7-seat vehicle

Ensure that all passengers and animals
are out of the vehicle and in a safe place
away from the highway.
Place a warning triangle at a suitable
distance behind the vehicle, facing
towards oncoming traffic.
Ensure that the front wheels are in the
straight ahead position and engage the
steering lock.
Apply the parking brake and engage P
(Park) in vehicles fitted with an
automatic transmission,
Apply the parking brake and engage 1st
or reverse gear in vehicles fitted with a
manual transmission.
Remove the spare wheel before using
the jack to avoid destabilising the
vehicle when raised.
Ensure that the jack is on firm level
ground.
Never place anything between the jack
and the ground, or the jack and the
vehicle.
Always chock the wheels using suitable
wheels chocks. Place the chocks on
Note: Switch on the hazard warning lamps to
WARNING
alert other road users.
The wheels are extremely heavy. Take
Before changing a wheel, ensure the following:
care when manoeuvring the spare
wheel.
x Front wheels are in the straight-ahead Always remove the spare wheel before jacking
position. up the vehicle.
x Electric parking brake is applied.
x P (Park) is selected on an automatic Spare wheel access - 5-seat vehicle
transmission vehicle or any gear on a
manual transmission vehicle.
x Turn off the starter switch and remove the
key.
x Engage the steering lock.
E80457
Note: Before removing the spare wheel, make a
note of the position that it is stowed in. The
wheel which is to be removed from the vehicle
must be correctly stowed in its place.
E80456

both sides of the wheel diagonally opposite the

wheel to be changed.
If jacking the vehicle on a slight slope is
unavoidable, place the chocks on the
downhill side of the two opposite wheels.
Take care when lifting the spare wheel,
and removing the punctured wheel. The
wheels are heavy and can cause injuries if not
handled correctly.
Take care when loosening the wheel
nuts. The wheel brace may slip off if not
properly attached and the wheel nuts may give
way suddenly. Either unexpected movement
may cause injury.

229 230
 Wheels and tyres
Lowering the spare wheel
E80458
E80467
1. Open the spare wheel access hatch in the
loadspace area.
x 5-seat vehicles, remove the jack from
the tool tray.
2. Lift the cap covering the spare wheel-hoist
winch nut.
3. Fit the wheel nut brace to the wheel-hoist
winch nut and rotate counterclockwise to
lower the spare wheel. The mechanism has
been designed for use with the wheel nut
brace. Do not use power tools.
4. Continue to turn the wheel-hoist winch nut
until the wheel is on the ground and the
cable is slack. Do not attempt to turn the
winch nut beyond the physical stop.
231
Note: 7-seat vehicles: The wheel-hoist winch
nut is close to the back of the rear seats. Turn
the wheel nut brace as far as possible
counterclockwise and then rotate the handle
over the top of the nut and continue to turn it.
Releasing the wheel
E80459
1. Hold the cable and tilt the lifting lug until it
can be lifted through the hole in the wheel,
as shown in the illustration.
Wheels and tyres
Using wheel chocks
WARNING
Before raising the vehicle, chock the
road wheels in two places.
The wheel chocks are stowed in the tool kit.
E80455
1. If possible, position the vehicle on level
ground, chocking both sides of the wheel
diagonally opposite the one to be removed.
Note: If jacking the vehicle on a slight slope is
unavoidable, place the chocks on the downhill
side of the two opposite wheels.
232
Raising the vehicle (Air suspension)
WARNINGS
Always remove the spare wheel before
jacking up the vehicle.
The jack is designed for wheel changing
only. Never work beneath the vehicle
with the jack as the only means of support.
Always use the vehicle support stands before
putting any portion of your body beneath the
vehicle.
Always place the jack on firm, level
ground.
Always position the jack from the side
of the vehicle, in line with the
appropriate jacking point.
Always use the complete, two-piece,
jack lever throughout to minimise any
chance of accidental damage or injury.
CAUTION
Only jack the vehicle using the jacking
points described, or damage to the
vehicle could occur.
Note: Before positioning the jack under the
vehicle, ensure that the air suspension is set to
off-road height.
Note: Your vehicle is fitted with a tilt sensor
which activates the alarm if the vehicle is tilted
in any direction after it has been locked. If you
wish to have the doors locked while jacking up
the vehicle, lock the doors by pressing the lock
button on the remote control twice within three
seconds.
 Wheels and tyres Wheels and tyres
Jacking points Operating the jack Positioning the jack
WARNING
Never work beneath the vehicle, or
place any part of your body beneath the
vehicle with the jack as the only means of
support. Always use suitable vehicle support
stands which are approved for the weight of
the vehicle.
Ensure that the jack is correctly located
onto the jacking points.
1. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel
nut brace to slacken the wheel nuts half a
turn counterclockwise.
2. Position the jack beneath the jacking point,
ensuring that the pin on the jack head
aligns with the hole in the chassis.
3. Turn the jack lever clockwise to raise the
jack cradle until it engages with the jacking
point. Ensure that the base of the jack is in
full contact with the road surface.

E80462

1. Attach the jack cranking lever to the jack.

Fit the wheel nut brace onto the end of the
cranking lever.
E80460

233 234
 Wheels and tyres Wheels and tyres
Raising the vehicle (Coil suspension) Jacking points
WARNINGS
Always remove the spare wheel before
jacking up the vehicle.
Never work beneath the vehicle with the
jack as the only means of support.
Always use approved vehicle support stands
before putting any portion of your body
beneath the vehicle.
The jack is designed for wheel changing
only.
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle
using any position other than the
jacking points illustrated.
Due to the nature of coil suspension
systems, it is not possible to raise the
wheel clear of the road surface by jacking
under the chassis.
Always place the jack on firm, level
ground.
Always position the jack from the side
of the vehicle, in line with the
E80463
appropriate jacking point.
Note: Your vehicle is fitted with a tilt sensor
which activates the alarm if the vehicle is tilted
fore and aft, or side to side, after it has been
locked. If you wish to have the doors locked
while jacking up the vehicle, lock the doors by
pressing the lock button on the remote control
twice within three seconds.

235 236
 Wheels and tyres
Operating the jack
E80464
1. Attach the jack cranking lever to the jack
using the adapter. Fit the wheel nut brace
onto the end of the cranking lever.
Positioning the jack
WARNING
Never work beneath the vehicle, or
place any part of your body beneath the
vehicle with the jack as the only means of
support. Always use suitable vehicle support
stands which are approved for the weight of
the vehicle.
Ensure that the jack is correctly located
onto the jacking points.
237
E80465
1. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel
nut brace to slacken the wheel nuts half a
turn counterclockwise.
2. Position the jack beneath the relevant
suspension arm.
3. Turn the jack lever clockwise to raise the
jack cradle until it engages with the jacking
point. Ensure that the base of the jack is in
full contact with the road surface.
Wheels and tyres
Wheel changing Wheel nut tightening sequence
1. Read and observe the warnings in Wheel
changing safety.
2. Loosen the wheel nuts half a turn 3
(counterclockwise). 1
3. Position the jack under the relevant jacking
point.
4. Raise the vehicle using the jack with a slow 5
steady operation. Avoid rapid, jerky
actions as they may cause the vehicle/jack
to become unstable. 4
5. Remove the wheel nuts and place them
together where they cannot roll away. 2
E83968
6. Remove the wheel and place to one side.
Do not lay the wheel on its face as this may
damage the finish. With all wheels on the ground and the jack
removed, fully tighten the wheel nuts in the
7. Fit the spare wheel to the hub.
sequence shown to 140 Nm (103lb.ft)
8. Re-fit the wheel nuts and lightly tighten
Note: If it not possible to torque the wheel nuts
them. Ensure that the wheel is making
when a wheel is replaced, the wheel nuts
contact with the hub evenly.
should be set to the correct torque as soon as
9. Ensure that the space under the vehicle is possible.
clear of obstructions and lower the vehicle
slowly and smoothly.
10. With all the wheel on the ground and the
jack removed, fully tighten the wheel nuts.
11. If an alloy spare wheel is to be fitted, using
a suitable blunt tool, knock the centre cap
out of the removed wheel. Using hand
pressure only, press the centre cap into the
newly fitted spare wheel.
12. Check and adjust the tyre pressure as soon
as possible.
Note: During jacking, the air suspension
system may enter an automatic freeze state.
See AIR SUSPENSION MESSAGES (page 181).
238
 Wheels and tyres
Temporary spare wheel
WARNINGS
You must comply with the instructions
given on the warning label affixed to the
temporary spare wheel. Failure to do so may
result in incorrect use of the temporary spare
wheel. This may cause vehicle instability
and/or tyre failure.
Drive with caution while the temporary
spare wheel is fitted and ensure that an
original size wheel and tyre are fitted as soon
as possible.
Do not drive the vehicle with more than
one temporary spare wheel fitted.
Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph) while
the temporary spare wheel is fitted.
The tyre pressure in the temporary
spare wheel/tyre should be 420 kPa
(4.2 bar/60 lbf/in²).
The use of snow chains is not permitted
on a temporary spare wheel.
DSC must be switched on while the
temporary spare wheel is in use.
239
Locking wheel nuts
Vehicles may be equipped with a locking wheel
nut on each wheel. These can only be removed
using the special adapter provided in the tool
kit.
Note: A code number is stamped on the
underside of the adapter. Ensure the number is
recorded on the Security Information card
supplied with the literature pack. Quote this
number if a replacement is required. Do not
keep the Security Information card in the
vehicle.
E80466
Insert the adapter firmly onto the locking wheel
nut.
Using the wheel nut brace, unscrew the wheel
nut and adapter.
Be sure to return the locking wheel nut adapter
to the correct storage position.
Wheels and tyres
Stowing the changed wheel 5. Check that the wheel has returned to the
same position as the spare wheel as
WARNING previously noted. If in any doubt, unwind
Do not stow the wheel while the vehicle the winch slightly and repeat the previous
is still raised on the jack. step.
The wheel must be securely retained in its
correct position by the winch mechanism
or it could become loose.
6. Replace the locking cap over the
wheel-hoist nut. As the underside of this
cap is exposed to the same conditions as
the underside of the vehicle, ensure that it
is firmly in place.
Note: If, for any reason, the spare wheel is not
to be fitted back in its hoist, the wheel hoist
should be rewound as follows.
Position the lifting lug level on the cable and
wind up the wheel hoist mechanism until it
clutches out.
E80459
1. Place the wheel under the rear of the
vehicle with its style surface uppermost.
2. Place the lifting lug through the wheel
aperture and locate it in position.
3. Winch up the wheel using the wheel-hoist
mechanism.
Do not use power tools on the wheel-hoist
winch.
4. Continue to wind up until the mechanism
clutches out. This is confirmed by a clear
physical indication from the wheel nut
brace and an audible noise.
240
 Wheels and tyres
TYRE CARE
WARNINGS
Defective tyres are dangerous. Do not
drive the vehicle if a tyre is damaged,
excessively worn, or incorrectly inflated.
Doing so may lead to premature tyre failure.
Avoid contaminating the tyres with
vehicle fluids as they may cause
damage to the tyre.
Avoid spinning the tyre. The forces
released can damage the structure of t
the tyre and cause it to fail. Doing so may lead
to premature tyre failure.
If wheel spin is unavoidable due to loss
of traction (in deep snow for example)
do not exceed the 50 km/h (30 mph) point on
the speedometer. Doing so may lead to
premature tyre failure.
Note: Tyre condition should be checked after
the vehicle has been used off-road. As soon as
the vehicle returns to a normal, hard, road
surface stop the vehicle and check for damage
to the tyres.
All of the tyres (including the spare) should be
checked regularly for damage, wear and
distortion. If you are in any doubt about the
condition of a tyre, have it checked immediately
by a tyre centre, or your Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.
Tyre wear
Good driving practise will improve the mileage
you obtain from your tyres and avoid
unnecessary damage.
x Always ensure that the tyre pressures are
correctly adjusted.
x Always observe the posted speed limits
and advisory speeds for bends.
x Avoid pulling away quickly, or hard
acceleration.
241
x Avoid making fast turns or braking
sharply.
x Where ever possible, avoid potholes, or
obstacles on the road.
x Do not drive up kerbs, or rub the tyres
against them when parking.
Wear indicators
WARNINGS
Wear indicators show the minimum
tread depth recommended by the
manufacturers. Tyres which have worn to this
point will have reduced grip and poor water
displacement characteristics.
CAUTIONS
If tread wear is uneven across a tyre, or
the tyre wears excessively, the vehicle
should be checked by your Dealer/Authorised
Repairer as soon as possible.
E80377
When the tread has worn down to
approximately 2 mm, wear indicators start to
appear at the surface of the tread pattern. This
produces a continuous band of rubber across
the tread as a visual indicator.
To maintain performance and grip the tyre
must be replaced as soon as the wear indicator
becomes visible. Sooner, if legislation requires
replacement at a greater tread depth.
Note: Tread depth should be checked
regularly, in some cases more frequently than
the service intervals. For advice on checking
tyres contact your Dealer/Authorised Repairer,
or tyre dealer.
Wheels and tyres
Age degradation
Tyres degrade over time due to the effects of
ultraviolet light, extreme temperatures, high
loads and environmental conditions. Tyres
should be replaced at least every six years, but
they may require replacement more frequently.
Even if unused, the spare tyre should be
replaced at the same time as the four road
tyres.
Punctured tyres
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with a
punctured tyre. Even if the punctured
tyre has not deflated, it is unsafe to use as the
tyre may deflate suddenly at any time.
Not all punctures result in the tyre deflating
immediately. Therefore, it is important to check
the tyres for damage and foreign objects,
regularly.
When driving, if a sudden vibration or change
to the vehicle’s handling is noticed, reduce
speed immediately. Do not brake hard or make
any sudden manoeuvres or direction changes.
Drive slowly to an area off the main highway
and stop the vehicle.
Note: Driving the vehicle to a safe area may
cause damage to the punctured tyre, but
occupant safety is far more important.
Inspect the tyres for signs of punctures,
damage or under inflation. If any damage or
deformity is detected, the tyre should be
replaced. If a spare tyre is not available, then
the vehicle should be recovered to a tyre
centre, or to your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
242
Replacement tyres
WARNINGS
Do not fit cross-ply tyres.
Do not fit tyres that require inner tubes.
Do not swap tyres around the vehicle.
Tyres bed in to the specific
characteristics of each wheel position.
Swapping them around may affect the
vehicle’s handling and traction.
Always fit replacement tyres of the
same type and wherever possible of the
same make and tread pattern.
Replacement wheels should be genuine
Land Rover parts. This will maintain the
designed driving characteristics both on and
off road.
If the use of tyres not recommended by
Land Rover is unavoidable, ensure that
you read and fully comply with the tyre
manufacturer’s instructions. Failure to do so
may lead to tyre failure due to incorrect fitment
or use.
Ideally, tyres should be replaced in sets of four.
If this is not possible, replace the tyres in pairs
(front and rear). When tyres are replaced, the
wheels should always be re-balanced and
alignment checked.
The correct tyre specification for your vehicle
can be found on the tyre information label.
 Wheels and tyres
High performance wheel and tyre
combinations
CAUTIONS
This vehicle may be fitted with a high
performance wheel and low aspect ratio
tyre combination designed to give enhanced
dry road performance with consideration for
aquaplaning resistance.
Low profile, high speed rated tyres have
a softer tread compound. If driven
aggressively they may suffer increased tread
wear and a shorter life than can be expected
from other tyre types.
This wheel and tyre combination is
susceptible to damage if driven off road.
This combination has less performance in
snow or ice conditions than M and S tyres.
High performance tyres must be replaced with
winter tyres when weather conditions dictate.
Directional tyres
E80378
243
Directional tyres must be fitted so that they
rotate in the direction that the arrow is pointing
when the vehicle is moving forward.
Tyre pressures
WARNINGS
Never drive your vehicle if the tyre
pressures are incorrect. Under-inflation
causes excessive flexing and uneven wear to
the tyre. This can lead to sudden tyre failure.
Over-inflation causes a harsh ride,
uneven tyre wear and poor handling.
pressure checks should only be carried
out when tyres are cold and the vehicle
has been stationary for more than three hours.
A hot tyre at or below the recommended cold
inflation pressure is dangerously
under-inflated.
If the vehicle has been parked in strong
sunlight or used in high ambient
temperatures, do not reduce tyre pressures.
Move the vehicle into the shade and allow the
tyres to cool before re-checking the pressures.
Tyre pressures (including the spare) should be
checked at least once a week with normal
on-road use, but should be checked daily if the
vehicle is used off-road. Always check the tyre
pressures before setting off on a long journey.
Use a reliable gauge to check the pressures
when the tyres are cold. Driving as short a
distance as 3 km (1 mile) can warm the tyres
up sufficiently to affect the tyre pressures.
If it is necessary to check the tyres when they
are warm, you should expect the pressures to
have increased by up to 30 - 40 kPa (0.3- 0.4
bar) (4 - 6 lbf/in²). Do not reduce the tyre to
cold inflation pressures under these
circumstances. Allow the tyres to cool fully
before adjusting the pressures.
Wheels and tyres
Checking the tyre pressures Use this procedure to check and adjust tyre
pressures:
WARNING
1. Remove the valve cap.
Tyre pressures must be checked
2. Firmly attach a tyre pressure gauge/inflator
regularly using an accurate pressure
to the valve.
gauge when the tyres are cold. Failure to
properly maintain your tyre pressures could 3. Read the tyre pressure from the gauge,
and add air if required.
increase the risk of tyre failure resulting in loss
of vehicle control and personal injury. 4. If air is added to the tyre, remove the gauge
from the valve and re-attach it to check that
the pressure is correct. Failure to remove
and re-attach the gauge to the valve could
MAX. cause the gauge to show an incorrect
DISCOVERY
XXX/XXRXX XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX
XXX/XXRXX (kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)
XXX/XXRXX reading.
XXX/XXRXX XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX
(kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)
L7MTA
5. If too much air is added, remove the gauge
MAX. XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX
TXXX/XXRXX
(kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)
from the valve and allow air out of the tyre
XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX
(kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)
RTC500XXX
by pressing the centre of the valve.
Reconnect the gauge to the valve and
check that the air pressure is correct.
6. If the pressure is still not correct, repeat
A B
this process and re-check.
7. Refit the valve cap. Ensure that the valve
caps are firmly screwed down to prevent
water or dirt entering the valve. Check the
E80376
valves for leaks when checking the tyre
pressures.
A Left-hand drive vehicle
Note: It is an offence in certain countries to
B Right-hand drive vehicle
drive a vehicle with incorrect tyre pressures.
The correct tyre pressures are shown on the
Note: It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure
label attached to the driver's door sill.
that the tyre pressures are correct.
244
 Wheels and tyres
Pressure compensation for ambient
temperature changes
E80321
If the ambient temperature drops, the tyre
pressures will decrease, which may cause
under inflation. This may happen when
travelling to, or through, areas of significantly
lower temperature.
Under inflation causes the tyre sidewall height
to reduce, which in turn results in uneven tyre
wear, and a risk of tyre failure.
Tyre pressures may be adjusted before setting
off on a journey to, or through, areas of low
temperature. Alternatively, the tyre pressures
can be adjusted when low temperature areas
are reached.
Note: If the tyre pressures are to be adjusted in
the lower temperature area, the vehicle should
be left standing for a least one hour prior to
adjustment.
Tyre pressures should be increased by 0.14 bar
(14 kPa, 2 lbf/in²) for each 10°C (20°F)
temperature decrease.
245
Flat spots
If the vehicle is stationary for a long period
when the ambient temperature is high, the
tyres may form flat spots. When the vehicle is
driven these flat spots will cause a vibration
which will steadily disappear as the tyres
regain their original shape.
E80322
In order to minimise flat spotting, tyre
pressures can be increased. Increase tyre
pressures by 0.14 bar (14 kPa, 2 lbf/in²) for
each 10°C (20°F) temperature increase above
20°C (68°F).
Long term storage
Flat spotting can be minimised during long
term storage by increasing the tyre pressures
to the maximum indicated on the tyre sidewall.
Note: The tyre pressures must be reduced to
the correct pressure before the vehicle is
driven.
Wheels and tyres
USING WINTER TYRES x Only Land Rover approved traction devices
If winter tyres are fitted to the vehicle, the tyre should be used on the vehicle. Only Land
manufacturer’s instructions must be followed. Rover approved traction devices have been
Pay particular attention to instructions tested to ensure that they do not cause
regarding: damage to the vehicle. Contact your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer for
x the maximum speed that the vehicle can be
information.
driven at and
x Always read, understand, and follow the
x the correct tyre pressures.
snow chain manufacturer’s instructions.
Pay particular attention to the maximum
USING SNOW CHAINS speed and fitting instructions.
WARNINGS x Avoid tyre/vehicle damage by removing
Only use traction devices in heavy snow the traction devices as soon as the
conditions, on hard road surfaces. conditions allow.
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) must
be switched off when using traction
devices. DSC limits wheel spin which is
required to maintain traction in deep snow
conditions.
Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) when
traction devices are fitted.
Do not fit traction devices to a
temporary spare wheel.
Land Rover approved traction devices may be
used to improve traction on a hard road surface
in heavy snow conditions. They should not be
used in off-road conditions.
If it is necessary to fit traction devices, the
following points should be observed:
x Single sided Spike-spyder traction devices
can only be fitted to the front wheels of
vehicle fitted with 17, 18 or 19 inch
diameter wheels.
x The wheels and tyres fitted must conform
to the specifications of the original
equipment.
x No traction devices should be fitted to the
rear wheels.
246
 Wheels and tyres
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNINGS
The Tyre Pressure Monitoring (TPM)
system is not a substitute for manually
checking tyre pressures. The TPM system only
provides a low tyre pressure warning and does
not re-inflate the tyres.
The TPM system cannot monitor
damage to a tyre. Regularly check the
condition of your tyres, especially if the vehicle
is driven off-road.
CAUTION
When inflating tyres, care must be taken
to avoid bending or damaging the TPM
system valves. Always ensure correct
alignment of the inflation head to the valve
stem.
Note: Non-approved accessories may interfere
with the system.
Note: Different types of tyre may affect the
performance of the TPM system. Always
replace tyres in accordance with
recommendations.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a TPM
system which monitors pressure in each tyre,
including the full-size spare tyre. Temporary
spare tyres are not fitted with sensors and are
not monitored.
247
1 Under-inflation reduces fuel efficiency and tyre
2 accompanied by illumination of the warning
E82445
Wheels fitted with a TPM system can be
identified by the appearance of the external
metal lock nut and valve 1. All Land Rover
non-TPM system wheels have a rubber valve
fitted 2.
TPM system operation
The TPM system monitors the pressure of the
tyres via sensors located in each wheel and a
receiver located within the vehicle.
Communication between sensor and receiver
is via Radio Frequency (RF) signals.
Check each tyre regularly when cold, including
the spare. If necessary, inflate tyres to the
recommended pressure.
If the tyre pressure warning lamp
illuminates, stop and check your
tyre pressures as soon as possible.
If necessary, inflate the tyres to the
recommended pressure. If low pressure
warnings occur frequently, the cause must be
found and rectified.
Wheels and tyres
Driving on an under-inflated tyre can cause the
tyre to overheat and lead to tyre failure.
tread life, and may also affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
The TPM system also monitors the full size
spare tyre pressure. If the pressure for the
spare tyre is incorrect, the message CHECK
SPARE TYRE PRESSURE is displayed,
lamp.
Note: The TPM system warnings may be
intermittent under variable climatic conditions.
TPM system malfunction
Your vehicle indicates a TPM system fault by
first flashing and then continuous illumination
of the warning lamp. The message TYRE
PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM FAULT is
also displayed in the message centre. The TPM
system fault sequence will occur every time the
vehicle is started until the fault is rectified.
When a malfunction occurs, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tyre pressure
as intended.
TPM system faults may occur for a variety of
other reasons, including: other radio frequency
systems causing interference or the installation
of incompatible replacement tyres on the
vehicle.
Spare tyre pressure
The full size spare tyre must always be inflated
to the highest pressure for the specified tyre
size.
248
Full size spare wheel and tyre change
The system will automatically recognise any
changes in wheel positions. The vehicle must
be stationary for 15 minutes during the wheel
and tyre change, to ensure that the system can
detect the change. After driving above 25 km/h
(18 mph) any deflation warning should clear
within a few minutes.
Temporary spare wheel and tyre change
If the temporary spare wheel is fitted, the
system will automatically recognise the change
in wheel positions. After approximately ten
minutes of driving above 18 mph (25 km/h),
the message TYRE PRESSURE FRONT (REAR)
RIGHT (LEFT) NOT MONITORED will be
displayed, accompanied by illumination of the
warning lamp.
The warning lamp will first flash and then
illuminate continuously. Extended use of the
temporary spare wheel, will trigger the
message TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM FAULT.
This TPM system display sequence will be
activated at every ignition cycle until the
temporary spare wheel is replaced by a full-size
road wheel.
Note: If in use, always replace the temporary
spare wheel before having a TPM system fault
investigated.
Vehicle loading
You can select different target pressure levels
that correspond to the recommended
pressures for a lightly-laden and a
heavily-laden vehicle. The indicator lamp on
the TPM system button displays the system
status.
 Wheels and tyres Wheels and tyres
If the indicator lamp is illuminated, the system If a tyre needs to be changed Messages
is in lightly-laden mode, if not then the system The following table lists the TPM-related
is in heavily-laden mode. If the vehicle is to be CAUTION
messages that may be displayed in the
used heavily-laden or for towing, the tyre Damage to the vehicle may result if the message centre. Market criteria mean that
pressures must be increased to cope with the following precautions are not taken: some messages will not apply to your vehicle
additional load, and the tyre pressure The valve stem seal, washer, nut, valve core and will therefore not appear.
monitoring system must be set to heavily laden and cap should be replaced at every tyre
mode. change. Message Meaning What to do?
The valve stem seal, washer and nut must be CHECK ALL Pressure in a running tyre Check tyre pressures.
replaced if the valve retention nut is loosened. TYRE PRESSURES decreased to first warning
Sensor units and nuts must be refitted using threshold.
correct torque figures and associated profile. CHECK Pressure in spare tyre Check pressure of spare tyre.
Sensors can be removed from the wheel by SPARE TYRE decreased to warning
unscrewing the valve retention nut. PRESSURE threshold.
E82387 Always have your tyres serviced by a dealer or TYRE PRESSURE Possible loss of RF Seek assistance immediately.
qualified technician. If a TPM system is fitted, NOT MONITORED transmission or defective
1. Press the TPM system button for at least each wheel and tyre assembly, with the sensor battery.
four seconds. The ignition switch must be exception of a temporary spare, is equipped TYRE PRESSURE Pressure in a running tyre too Adjust to correct pressure as
in position ll and the engine not running. with a tyre pressure sensor connected to the TOO HIGH high, threshold reached. soon as possible.
2. To indicate that the system has switched to tyre valve stem. TYRE PRESSURE Pressure in a running tyre Adjust to correct pressure as
heavily-laden mode, the indicator in the Avoid contact between the bead of the tyre and VERY LOW decreased to warning soon as possible.
switch will extinguish, and the message the sensor during removal and refitting of the threshold.
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SET FOR tyre, otherwise the sensor may become TYRE PRESSURE TPM system fault has occurred. Seek qualified assistance
HEAVY LOAD is displayed. damaged and/or inoperable. MONITORING immediately.
3. When the vehicle load is returned to SYSTEM FAULT
normal and the tyre pressures are reset, Replacement sensor fitment procedure
Sensor replacement should be carried out by a TYRE PRESSURES Adjust to correct pressure as
press the button as before to put the
Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer. TOO HIGH soon as possible.
system back into lightly-laden mode. The
indicator lamp in the switch illuminates A replacement sensor must be fitted to a TYRE PRESSURES Adjust to correct pressure as
and the message TYRE PRESSURE running wheel in order to be recognised by the VERY LOW soon as possible.
MONITORING SET FOR LIGHT LOAD is TPM system. Recognition only occurs when TYRE PRESSURE Indicates the system is set to Ensure setting is correct for the
displayed. the vehicle is driven above 25 km/h (18 mph) MONITORING SET FOR HEAVY monitor the tyre pressures for a current tyre pressures and
for at least ten minutes. LOAD heavily-laden condition. loading conditions.
Should the TPM system warning for any wheel TYRE PRESSURE Indicates the system is set to Ensure setting is correct for the
not clear, even after ensuring correct inflation MONITORING SET FOR LIGHT monitor the tyre pressures for current tyre pressures and
and driving for more than ten minutes above 25 LOAD lightly-laden conditions. loading conditions.
km/h (18 mph), consult your Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repair.

249 250
 Wheels and tyres Wheels and tyres
TYRE GLOSSARY Production options weight TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The combined weight of options installed
lb/in2 or PSI Original wheel and tyre combinations
which weigh in excess of 1.4 kg (3 lb) more
Pounds per square inch, an imperial unit of Wheel and tyre specification
than the standard items that they replaced, and
measure for pressure. are not already considered in kerb or accessory Wheel size Tyre size Load index
kPa weights. Items such as heavy duty brakes, high 7J x 17 235/70 R17 H 111
capacity battery, special trim etc.
Kilo Pascal, a metric unit of measure for 8J x 18 255/60 R18 V 112
pressure. Vehicle capacity weight 8J x 19 255/55 R19 V 111
Cold tyre pressure The number of seats multiplied by 68 kg
(150lb) plus the rated amount of load/luggage. Accessory wheels and tyres
The air pressure in a tyre which has been
standing in excess of three hours, or driven for Maximum loaded vehicle weight
less than one mile. The sum of kerb weight, accessory weight,
Maximum inflation pressure vehicle capacity weight, and production
options weight.
The maximum pressure to which the tyre
should be inflated. This pressure is given on Rim
the tyre side wall in lbf/in² and kPa. The metal support for a tyre, or tyre and tube,
Note: This pressure is the maximum allowed upon which the tyre beads are seated.
by the tyre manufacturer. It is not the pressure 1 2
recommended for use. See TECHNICAL Bead
SPECIFICATIONS (page 269). The inner edge of a tyre that is shaped to fit to 3
the rim and form an air tight seal. The bead is
Kerb weight constructed of steel wires which are wrapped,
E82330
The weight of a standard vehicle, including a or reinforced, by the ply cords.
full tank of fuel, any optional equipment fitted, Note: Use the diagram above to record
and with the correct coolant and oil levels. accessory wheel and tyre information.
Gross vehicle weight 1. Front tyre pressure.
The maximum permissible weight of a vehicle 2. Rear tyre pressure.
with driver, passengers, load, luggage, 3. Accessory wheel and tyre specification.
equipment, and tow ball load.
WARNINGS
Accessory weight
Contact your Land Rover
The combined weight (in excess of those items Dealer/Authorised Repairer before
replaced) of items available as factory installed fitting any accessory wheels or tyres. Your
equipment. Dealer will be able to offer guidance regarding
the correct accessories. Fitting incorrect
wheel/tyre combinations can seriously affect
the ride and handling of your vehicle. In
extreme cases this may lead to loss of control
of the vehicle.

251 252
 Fuses Fuses
Fuses

FUSE BOX LOCATIONS Engine compartment fuse box Passenger compartment fuse box Tow hitch fuse box

E80810 E80791
2
Remove the plastic cover by pressing the tabs. The supplementary fuse box that protects the
The fuse values and locations and the circuits tow hitch circuits, is located behind the
protected are shown on the plastic cover. left-hand panel in the luggage compartment.

E80809

The passenger compartment fuse box is fitted

behind the glovebox. To access the fuses, open
the glovebox and then pinch the top of the
3 support stays (arrowed), and lower the
glovebox into the footwell.
A label on the rear of the glovebox shows the
E82383
circuits protected, the fuse values and their
1. Engine compartment fuse box. locations.
2. Passenger compartment fuse box.
3. Tow hitch fuse box.
Note: The engine and passenger compartment
fuse boxes are always fitted on the passenger
side of the vehicle.

253 254
 Fuses Fuses
CHANGING A FUSE FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
CAUTION Engine compartment fuse box
Fit Land Rover approved replacement
F1 XX XX F2
fuses of the same rating and type, or
fuses of matching specification. Using an F3 XX XX F4

incorrect fuse may result in damage to the F5 XX XX F6

vehicle’s electrical system and can result in a
F7 XX XX F8
fire.
Always rectify the cause of the failure F9 XX XX F10

before replacing a fuse. Seek qualified F11 XX XX F12

assistance if necessary.
F13 XX XX F14
A blown fuse is indicated when the electrical
F15 XX XX F16
equipment it protects stops working.
F17 XX XX F18
Always turn the starter switch to position 0 and
switch off the affected electrical circuit before F19 XX F20

removing a fuse. F21 XX F22

E81022
F23 XX XX F24
The fuse removal tweezers are located in the
F25 XX XX F26
passenger compartment fuse box. Place the
tweezers onto the head of the suspect fuse (as F27 XX XX F28

shown), squeeze the middle (arrowed) and pull F29 XX XX F30

E81432
to remove. A break in the wire inside the fuse
indicates that the fuse has blown.
Fuse Ampere rating Colour Circuits protected
Note: Drivers are advised against removing or
replacing the relays (identified as R1-R19 on 1 25 White Fuel pump
the relays) and fusible links (identified as 2 - - -
FL1-FL20 on the fusible links) in the engine 3 5 Tan Air suspension ECU
compartment fuse box. Failure of any of these
4 25 White Diesel EMS (ECM and fuel pump relay control)
items should be investigated by a qualified
technician. 5 10 Red Petrol EMS (purge valve, EGR, inlet manifold
tune valve), E-box fan
6 15 Blue Petrol EMS (ignition coils)
6 15 Blue Diesel EMS (Sensors and glow plug relay
control)
7 25 White Front seat heater
8 25 White Rear seat heater
9 - - -
10 15 Blue Petrol EMS (throttle motor, MAF), cooling fan

255 256
 Fuses Fuses

Fuse Ampere rating Colour Circuits protected Passenger compartment fuse box
10 15 Blue Diesel - cooling fan
11 15 Blue Petrol EMS (rear oxygen sensors) F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10

12 10 Red Heated washer jets

XX

XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
13 10 Red Petrol EMS (ECM, VVTs and fuel pump relay F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22

XX

XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
control)
F23 F24 F25 F26 F27 F28 F29 F30 F31 F32 F33 F34
13 10 Red Diesel EMS (PCV, VCV)

XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX

XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
14 20 Yellow Petrol EMS (front oxygen sensors)
F35 F36 F37 F38 F39 F40 F41 F42 F43 F44 F45 F46 F47 F48
15 30 Green Heated front screen

XX

XX
XX

XX
XX

XX
XX
XX
XX
XX

XX
XX
XX
16 10 Red Heated door mirrors F49 F50 F51 F52 F53 F54 F55

17 15 Blue Petrol EMS (injectors)

XX

XX
XX
XX
XX
XX

XX

17 15 Blue Diesel EMS (MAF, EGR), E-Box fan F56 F57 F58 F59

XX
XX
XX
XX

18 30 Green Heated front screen

F60 F61 F62 F63
19 - - -

XX
XX
XX

XX
20 5 Tan Alternator
F64 F65 F66

21 - - -

XX
XX
XX

22 30 Green Rear blower F67 F68 F69

XX
XX
XX

23 25 White Dynamic Stability Control system

24 20 Yellow Petrol - brake boost pump
XX XX
25 10 Red Lighting switch
XX XX
26 20 Yellow Air suspension ECU
SPARES

XX XX
27 5 Tan Engine Control Module (ECM) E81433

28 20 Yellow Diesel - auxiliary heater

Fuse Ampere rating Colour Circuits protected
29 30 Green Front wipers
1 10 Red Interior lamps - glovebox lamp, vanity mirror
30 10 Red Auto transmission ECU lamp, map lamps, switchable roof lamps.
Electric seats (non memory).
2 10 Red Right-hand side lamps
3 - -
4 10 Red Left-hand side lamps
5 10 Red Reverse lamps
6 10 Red Trailer reverse lamp
7 25 White Driver’s window
8 30 Green Trailer pick-up (battery feed)
9 5 Tan Airbags

257 258
 Fuses Fuses

Fuse Ampere rating Colour Circuits protected Fuse Ampere rating Colour Circuits protected
10 - - - 41 5 Tan Electric Parking Brake (EPB)
11 15 Blue Washer pump 42 30 Green Audio amplifier
12 15 Blue Horn 43 10 Red Radio frequency receiver, Tyre Pressure
13 25 White Heated rear window Monitoring system
14 10 Red Trailer side lamp 44 5 Tan Automatic transmission selector
15 15 Blue Brake lamps, Brake switch 45 - - -
16 10 Red Powerfold mirror 46 30 Green Drivers electric seat
17 20 Yellow Rear right-hand window 47 15 Blue Auxiliary power socket - 3rd row seats
18 5 Tan Rain sensor, ambient light sensor (auto lamps) 48 15 Blue Rear wiper
19 15 Blue Auxiliary power socket - 2nd row seats 49 30 Green Central door locking
20 15 Blue Sunroof 50 10 Red Electric fuel flap actuator
21 25 White Passenger window 51 10 Red Climate control ECU
22 10 Red Trailer pick-up (ignition feed) 52 5 Tan Telephone, traffic message centre
23 - - - 53 15 Blue Multi-media module, audio unit, DVD player,
Video Display
24 5 Tan Transfer box - centre differential, Terrain
Response 54 5 Tan Electric seat - memory, lumbar pump
25 5 Tan Engine Control Module (ECM) 55 15 Blue Cigar lighter
26 5 Tan Battery back-up sounder 56 10 Red Adaptive front lighting (left-hand unit)
27 10 Red Adaptive front lighting, Headlamp levelling 57 10 Red Rear seat entertainment module
28 5 Tan Fuse box engine compartment - ignition 58 10 Red Telephone, touch screen display, multi-media
module, TV tuner
29 30 Green Passenger electric seat
59 10 Red Cubby box cooler
30 - - -
60 5 Tan Engine control module (ECM)
31 20 Yellow Rear left-hand window
61 10 Red Adaptive front lighting (right-hand unit)
32 15 Blue Rear fog lamps
62 5 Tan Low beam, auto lamps
33 5 Tan Mirror adjust, Automatic transmission selector
63 10 Red Diagnostic socket
34 15 Blue Auxiliary power socket - front seats
64 5 Tan Automatic transmission ECU
35 5 Tan Air suspension ECU
65 - - -
36 5 Tan Park Distance Control, Tyre pressure monitoring
system 66 5 Tan HDC switch, Brake switch, Steering angle
sensor, DSC switch
37 5 Tan Dynamic Stability Control
67 5 Tan Auto lamps
38 15 Blue Front fog lamps
68 5 Tan Instrument pack
39 5 Tan Instrument pack
69 5 Tan Automatic dimming interior mirrors
40 5 Tan Key-in sense

259 260

Tow hitch fuse box
E81903
Fuse Ampere rating
1 7.5
2 15
3 15
4 7.5
5 5
6 5
Fuses Status after a collision
Status after a collision
DRIVING AFTER A COLLISION Resetting the fuel cut-off
Before starting or driving WARNING
The fuel cut-off should never be reset if
1 WARNING
you can smell fuel, or a leak can be
2 If the vehicle is involved in a collision it seen. Doing so can lead to a fire which may
should be checked by your Land Rover cause personal injury or death.
3 Dealer/Authorised Repairer, or suitably
4 qualified persons before starting or driving. The fuel system cut-off forms part of the Safety
and Restraint System (SRS) fitted to your
5 If the vehicle has been involved in an accident vehicle. Following an impact, and depending on
6 it should be checked thoroughly before the severity, the fuel pump may be switched
attempting to start the engine or drive the off.
vehicle.
1. Turn the starter switch off, and wait for one
Colour Circuits protected Check for:- minute.
Brown Brake lamp x Fuel leaks. 2. Turn the starter switch on for 30 seconds.
Blue Ignition feed x Fluid leaks.
3. Check the vehicle thoroughly for fuel leaks.
Blue Battery feed x Battery damage. If a leak is detected switch the ignition off
Brown Rear fog lamps x Damage to wiring. immediately.
Tan Right-hand tail lamp x Damage to lights. x The vehicle must not be started if a leak
x Damage to steering, suspension, wheels is present. Seek qualified advice, and
Tan Number plate and left-hand tail lamp
or tyres. have the vehicle recovered.
x Sharp or protruding bodywork. 4. If no leaks are detected, start the vehicle.
x Operation of doors and locks.
When driving
x Condition and operation of seat belts and
When driving a vehicle which has been
SRS components.
involved in a collision use caution and pay extra
x Condition of child seats and their attention to the operation of the vehicle. If any
mounting/attachment points. changes in vehicle operation after the collision
Note: This list is not exhaustive. are noted when compared to it's operation
before the collision, do not continue to drive
the vehicle. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so, and have the vehicle recovered.
Pay particular attention to changes in:-
x Steering.
x Braking.
x Unusual noises.
x Warning lights or messages displayed.
x Problems with electrical systems.
261 262
 Status after a collision
INSPECTING SAFETY SYSTEM
COMPONENTS
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle until all of the
occupant protection systems have been
checked.
Following a collision the seat belt and
Supplementary Restraint System components
should be inspected for damage and/or
deformity. The inspection and any subsequent
repair work should only be carried out by a
Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer, or
other suitably qualified persons.
Components which require inspection
include:-
x Seat belt webbing and mechanisms.
x Seat belt pre-tensioners.
x Airbag covers and modules.
x Seat frames and mounting points.
x Child seats.
x Child seat anchor points.
Note: This list is not exhaustive.
In addition to the physical items checked the
electronic control system and it's associated
wiring should also be checked thoroughly. This
process will include a diagnostic check which
can only be carried out your Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer or suitably
qualified and equipped persons.
263
Vehicle recovery
Vehicle recovery
TOWING POINTS Front towing point cover
WARNING
The towing points at the front and rear
of the vehicle are designed for on-road
recovery only. If they are used for any other
purpose it may result in vehicle damage or
serious injury.
Never use towing points to tow a trailer,
caravan etc. Doing so may result in
vehicle damage or serious injury.
CAUTION
Remove the front towing eye cover
before driving off-road. This will prevent
damage to or loss of cover.
Front towing point
The front towing point can be used to tow your
vehicle.
The front towing point is set behind a
removable cover in the lower front bumper.
Before driving off-road, remove the cover as a
precaution against accidental loss.
E80776
1. Rotate each of the fasteners 90 degrees
counterclockwise with a coin (or similar).
2. To remove the cover, lower the top edge
and then pull the cover forward.
3. Offer up the cover and ensure that the two
lugs on the bottom edge engage with the
holes in the body panel.
4. To secure the cover, turn each fastener 90
degrees clockwise.
Rear towing point
The rear towing point can be used to tow your
vehicle, or another vehicle, in recovery
situations.
Before driving off-road, remove the cover as a
precaution against accidental loss.
264
 Vehicle recovery
Rear towing point cover
1. Rotate each of the fasteners 90 degrees
counterclockwise with a coin (or
something similar) to release the lower
edge.
2. Rotate the cover to release the hooks at the
top.
3. Remove the cover.
4. Position the cover and ensure that the four
hooks on the top edge engage with the
holes in the body panel.
5. To secure the cover, turn each fastener 90
degrees clockwise.
Vehicle recovery
LASHING POINTS Rear lashing points
WARNING
The front and rear lashing points must
be used only for securing the vehicle
during transportation. If they are used for any
other purpose it may result in vehicle damage
and serious injury.
CAUTION
If the vehicle electronics are operational,
the air suspension must be set to access
height before securing the vehicle to a
recovery vehicle or trailer. See ADJUSTING E80780

THE SUSPENSION (page 177). The two pairs of lashing points on the
underside of the vehicle are provided for the
Note: The front and rear lashing points are for
insertion of appropriate hooks. Do not secure
lashing only and must not be used for towing.
lashing hooks to any other part of the vehicle.
Front lashing points
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING
Use extreme caution when moving or
towing the vehicle. Death or serious
E80777 injury may occur.
The recommended method for recovery or
transportation of the vehicle is on a transporter
or trailer designed for the purpose.
Ensure that transportation is carried out by
suitably qualified persons and that the vehicle
is secured correctly.

E80779

265 266
 Vehicle recovery
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR
WHEELS
WARNINGS
Do not remove the starter key or turn
the starter switch to position 0 while the
vehicle is moving as this will lock the steering.
If the engine cannot be run while the
vehicle is being towed, there will be no
power assistance for the steering or brakes.
This will result in greater effort being required
to steer or slow the vehicle and greatly
increased stopping distance.
CAUTIONS
Tow the vehicle only in a forward
direction with four wheels on the ground.
Towing in a reverse direction with two wheels
on the ground will result in serious damage to
the transmission.
The vehicle should only be towed for a
maximum of 50 km (30 miles) at a
maximum speed of 50 km/h (30 mph). Towing
for a greater distance or at a higher speed may
result in serious damage to the transmission.
Do not tow the vehicle if the gearbox
cannot be set in neutral or the rear
electronic differential has failed in the locked
position.
267
Your vehicle has permanent four-wheel drive
and is fitted with a steering lock. The following
procedure must be carried out carefully to
prevent damage to the vehicle:
1. Secure the towing attachment from the
recovery vehicle to the front towing point.
2. With the parking brake applied, insert the
starter key and turn it to position II.
3. Apply the foot brake and place the gear
lever into neutral.
4. Turn the starter switch to position I. Do not
turn the starter switch to position 0.
5. The starter switch may be turned to
position II, to operate the brake lamps and
direction indicators.
6. Release the parking brake before towing
the vehicle.
CAUTIONS
Leaving the ignition switched on for
extended periods will cause the battery to
drain.
After towing on four wheels
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the starter switch to position II and
apply the foot brake.
3. Place the auto selector lever in the Park
position.
4. Turn the starter switch to position 0.
5. Remove the towing attachment and fit the
cover to the front towing point.
WARNINGS
Use extreme caution when detaching
towing equipment. Vehicle movement
is possible which can result in serious injury.
Vehicle identification
Vehicle identification
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLE BUILD DATE PLATE
(VIN) (Australia only)
This is the calendar month and year in which
the body and power train assemblies were
conjoined and the vehicle was driven from the
production line.
The vehicle build date is shown on the tyre
pressure label to the right-hand ‘B’ post.
E82503
As a deterrent to thieves and to assist the
Police, the VIN is stamped on a plate which is
visible through the lowest part of the left side of
the windscreen (this should match the VIN
recorded in the Service Portfolio book). VIN
information may also be found in areas such
as: Bonnet locking platform, Suspension tower
and Door shut faces.
Note: If you need to communicate with your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer, you may be asked
to quote the VIN number.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and
recommended maximum vehicle weights, are
stamped on a plate riveted to the lock side of
the left-hand (right-hand in China) front door
aperture at the bottom. This VIN should match
the VIN recorded in the Service Portfolio and
the VIN visible through the front windscreen.
268
 Technical specifications Technical specifications
Technical specifications

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Weights

V6 Diesel Approximate EEC kerb weights Metric Imperial
Capacity 2720 cm³ (full fuel tank)
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 - Petrol engine vehicles 2 486 - 2 704 kg 5 315 - 5 796 lb
Bore 81.0 mm - Diesel engine vehicles 2 494 - 2 718 kg 5 498 - 5 992 lb
Stroke 88.0 mm Maximum gross vehicle weight 3 180 - 3 230 kg 7 011 - 7 121 lb
Number of cylinders 6 Maximum front axle load 1 450 kg 3 197 lb
Compression ratio 17.3:1 Maximum rear axle load 1 840 - 1 855 kg 4 056 - 4 090 lb

V8 Petrol Note:
Axle weights are non-additive.
Capacity 4394 cm³ The individual maximum axle weights and gross vehicle weight must not be exceeded.
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Bore 88.0 mm
Stroke 90.3 mm
Number of cylinders 8
Compression ratio 10.5:1
Spark plugs NGK IFR5N10
Spark plug gap Non-adjustable

V6 Petrol

Capacity 4009 cm³

Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6
Bore 100.4 mm
Stroke 84.4 mm
Number of cylinders 6
Compression ratio 9.7:1
Spark plugs Motorcraft AGSF 24 PM
Spark plug gap Non-adjustable

269 270
 Technical specifications Technical specifications
Dimensions - Air suspension vehicles Ref. Dimension Metric Imperial
Wading depth
- Standard height 600 mm 24 in.
- Off-road height 700 mm 28 in.
B Minimum ground clearance (off-road 240 mm 9.44 in.
height)
C Maximum gradient, nose up/down
D H
- Continuous operation 35°
G E
- Drive-through 45°
E81324
A F
Turning circle 11.45 metres 37.56 ft
Wheel alignment (Total)
Ref. Dimension Metric Imperial - Front -0.16° ±0.2° -10' ± 12'
A Overall width 2 191 mm 86.26 in. - Rear 0.16° ±0.2° 10' ± 12'
Overall width (mirrors folded) 2 009 mm 79.09 in. Brake pedal free travel Not adjustable
B Overall height Clutch pedal free travel Not adjustable
- Access height 1 837 mm 72.32 in.
- Standard height 1 887 mm 74.29 in.
- Off-road height 1 942 mm 76.46 in.
C Approach angle (at EEC kerb weight and 37.2°
off-road height)
D Ramp breakover angle (at EEC kerb 124.2°
weight and off-road height)
E Wheelbase 2 885 mm 113.6 in.
F Overall length 4 848 mm 190.9 in.
Overall length (including tow hitch - to 4 913 mm 193.4 in.
centre of tow ball)
G Track:
- Front 1 605 mm 63.2 in.
- Rear 1 612.5 mm 63.5 in.
H Departure angle without tow hitch (at 29.6°
EEC kerb weight and off-road height)
Departure angle with tow hitch (at EEC
kerb weight):
- Standard ride height 15.7°
- Off -road ride height 18.5°

271 272
 Technical specifications Technical specifications
Dimensions - Coil spring suspension vehicles Ref. Dimension Metric Imperial
Turning circle 11.45 metres 37.56 ft
Wheel alignment (Total)
- Front -0.16° ±0.2° -10' ± 12'
B - Rear 0.16° ±0.2° 10' ± 12'
Brake pedal free travel Not adjustable
C D H Clutch pedal free travel Not adjustable

G E
E81324
A F

Ref. Dimension Metric Imperial

A Overall width 2 191 mm 86.26 in.
Overall width (mirrors folded) 2 009 mm 79.09 in.
B Overall height 1 887 mm 74.29 in.
C Approach angle (at EEC kerb weight) 32.2°
D Ramp breakover angle (at EEC kerb 134.4°
weight)
E Wheelbase 2 885 mm 113.6 in.
F Overall length 4 848 mm 190.9 in.
Overall length (including tow hitch - to 4 913 mm 193.4 in.
centre of tow ball)
G Track:
- Front 1 605 mm 63.2 in.
- Rear 1 612.5 mm 63.5 in.
H Departure angle without tow hitch (at 24.9°
EEC kerb weight)
Departure angle with tow hitch (at EEC 15.7°
kerb weight)
Wading depth 600 mm 24 in.
Minimum ground clearance (off-road 185 mm 7.3 in.
height)
Maximum gradient, nose up/down
- Continuous operation 35°
- Drive-through 45°

273 274
 Type approvals Type approvals
Type approvals

TYPE APPROVALS
Type approvals
The Declarations of Conformity are from
manufacturers of RF (Radio Frequency)
equipment, whose components are used in the
manufacture of your Discovery 3.
These manufacturers state that their
components comply with relevant rules of the
R and TTE (Radio and Telecommunication
Terminal Equipment) directive.
The directive requires the manufacturer of
short range radio devices to self-certify that RF
parts fitted to Land Rover vehicles are fit for
use and that the declarations are supplied with
the vehicle documentation. If at a future date a
technical inspection is required, the
declarations will provide all necessary
information.
Note: The Declarations of Conformity are
published in the native language of the RF
equipment manufacturer, in compliance with
the R and TTE Directive.

E81268

275 276
 Type approvals Type approvals

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

Trade Name: Model No:
Connaught Electronics Ltd. LQN5752
Canadian 2306A-5752
Tested to comply Model 5752 by Connaught Electronics 0682
FCC Standards 15B Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference that may cause undesired
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE operation of the device.
This declaration is the responsibility of the manufacturer / authorised representative within the
Community:

Supplier
This declaration is the responsibility of the manufacturer / authorised representative within the Connaught Electronics Ltd.
Community: Supplier Address
Dunmore Road,
Supplier Tuam
Connaught Electronics Ltd. Co. Galway,
Ireland
Supplier Address
Dunmore Road,
Tuam This certifies that the following designated product
Co. Galway,
Ireland
T5 RECEIVER 433MHZ PART NO. 5751
...................................
(Product identification)
This certifies that the following designated product
T5 RECEIVER 315MHZ PART NO. 5752 complies with the essential protection requirements of R&TTE Directive 1999/5/ EC on the
...................................
(Product identification) approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to Radio Spectrum Matters, EMC
and Electrical Safety.
complies with the essential protection requirements of R&TTE Directive 1999/5/ EC on the This declaration applies to all specimens manufactured in accordance with the technical
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to Radio Spectrum Matters, EMC documentation described in the annex II. Connaught Electronics Ltd. keep this documentation
and Electrical Safety. at the proposal of the relevant national authorities of any Member State for inspection
This declaration applies to all specimens manufactured in accordance with the technical purpose.
documentation described in the annex II. Connaught Electronics Ltd. keep this documentation Assessment of compliance of the product with the requirements relating to the essential
at the proposal of the relevant national authorities of any Member State for inspection requirements acc. to Article 3 R&TTE was based on Annex IV of the Directive 1999/5/ EC
purpose. and the following standards:
Assessment of compliance of the product with the requirements relating to the essential
requirements acc. to Article 3 R&TTE was based on Annex IV of the Directive 1999/5/ EC Radio Spectrum : ................EN 300 220-1.....................................................................................
and the following standards: (Identification of regulations / standards)

Radio Spectrum : ................EN 300 220-1..................................................................................... EMC : .................EN 300 683 .............................................................
(Identification of regulations / standards) (Identification of regulations / standards)

EMC : .................EN 300 683 ............................................................. Safety : .................EN 60950............................................................................................

(Identification of regulations / standards) (Identification of regulations / standards)

Safety : .................EN 60950............................................................................................

(Identification of regulations / standards) (Place, date) (Signature)

(Place, date) (Signature) Tuam, Ireland

Tuam, Ireland 16/03/2004

16/03/2004

E81269 E81270

277 278
 Type approvals Type approvals

E82489
E82488

279 280
 Type approvals Type approvals

E82491
E82490

281 282
 Type approvals Type approvals
We, the party responsible for compliance, declare under our sole responsibility that the Handset
Integration product RX-1M is in conformity with the provisions of the following Council Directive:
1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at:
http://www.nokia.com/phones/declaration_of_conformity/
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by Land Rover is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective
owners.

E91115

E91116

E82492

283 284
 Audio introduction Audio unit overview
Audio introduction Audio unit overview

RADIO RECEPTION AUDIO UNIT OVERVIEW

Standard audio unit

1 2

18
FM1 14 : 54
17 2 BBC R4
TA PTY NEWS

16
15

14 3

13 4

E81779
Your audio unit receives signals whilst on the
move, and may experience widely differing
reception characteristics. Because of this,
some interference is to be expected from time
to time during a journey.
FM transmitters can only broadcast over a
limited range, and good clear signals will only
be received in the immediate area of the
transmitter. When travelling, occasionally it
may be necessary to re-tune the audio unit to
offset the effects of moving from one
transmitter area to another.
While RDS automatic retuning helps to reduce
the effects of signal changes, some manual
retuning may still be required (especially for
local stations) in areas of weak reception.
The broadcast range for good stereo reception
is within approximately 48 - 64 km (30 - 40
miles) of the transmitter.
FM Signals travel in a straight line, so large
obstacles, such as tall buildings, can shield the
vehicle from the signal causing distortion or
loss of reception (known as dead spots).
Distortion can also occur if FM signals received
directly from the transmitter, mix with signals
deflected by obstructions such as mountains,
hills, and tall buildings. This is known as
multi-path distortion.
Note: Although distortion, interference and
lack of signal clarity are sometimes attributed
to a fault in the radio, this is rarely the case.
E81803 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
1. Radio station pre-sets 10. Manual tuning/scan down button
2. Information display screen x Radio station manual rearward search
3. Audio menu button: x Compact disc scan down
x Access 11. Automatic rearward tuning/search button
x Save x Radio station automatic rearward search
x Close x Compact disc rearward search
4. Audio menu button: 12. On/off and volume control
x Back x Press to switch on/off
x Exit x Rotate to change volume
5. Audio menu control 13. Traffic information (TA) or News button
x Rotate to scroll through options x Short press for traffic announcements
x Press to enable or disable the function x Long press for News announcements
6. Automatic forward tuning/search button 14. Tone and volume settings button
x Radio station automatic forward search x Short press for tone settings menu
x Compact disc forward search x Long press for volume settings menu
7. Manual tuning/scan up button 15. Auxiliary input mode button
x Radio station manual forward search 16. Compact disc player mode button
x Compact disc scan up 17. AM waveband button
8. Compact disc slot 18. FM waveband button
9. Compact disc eject button

285 286
 Audio unit overview Audio unit operation
Audio unit operation

Premium audio unit ON/OFF CONTROL VOLUME CONTROL

1 2

19 1 2
ABC
3
DEF FM A 14 : 54 Audio Volume
6CD-465
2 97.9 Radio 1 16
18 4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO 1 2 3 4 5 6 TA PTY NEWS 1 2 3 4 5 6

FM A 14 : 54
17 7
PQRS
8
TUV
9
WXYZ 2 97.9 Radio 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 TA PTY NEWS
16 0 3

15 4 E81870 E81863

Press the volume control to switch the audio With the engine running, rotate the volume
14 5 unit on. Press again to switch off. control to increase or decrease the audio unit
volume. The volume can be set between 0 and
E81804 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 35. The audio unit can be used with the engine
switched off, but the volume available is
1. Input keypad 9. Compact disc slot
restricted.
x Function (frequency, track number, 10. Compact disc eject button
When the audio unit is turned on, the
telephone numbers, text etc.) 11. Manual tuning/scan down button previously set volume level will be
2. Information display screen x Radio station manual rearward search implemented, provided that is suitable for the
3. Telephone mode button x Compact disc scan down prevailing conditions. If the previously set
4. Audio menu button: volume is too quiet or too loud, a suitable level
12. Automatic rearward tuning/search button
will be implemented automatically.
x Access x Radio station automatic rearward search
x Save In addition to setting the volume of the audio,
x Compact disc rearward search
the volume control is used to adjust the
x Close 13. On/off and volume control following features:
5. Audio menu button: x Press to switch on/off x Automatic Volume control (AVC)
x Back x Rotate to change volume x Information volume offset
x Exit 14. Traffic information (TA) or News button x Navigation volume offset
6. Audio menu control x Short press for traffic announcements x Phone volume
x Rotate to scroll through options x Long press for News announcements x Voice volume
x Press to enable or disable the function 15. Tone and volume settings button x Reset volume settings
7. Automatic forward tuning/search button x Short press for tone settings menu
x Radio station automatic forward search x Long press for volume settings menu
x Compact disc forward search 16. Auxiliary input mode button
8. Manual tuning/scan up button 17. Compact disc player mode button
x Radio station manual forward search 18. AM waveband button
x Compact disc scan up
19. FM waveband button

287 288
 Audio unit operation Audio unit operation
Automatic Volume control (AVC) Information volume offset Navigation volume offset To access the phone volume setting, press the
Tone button for approximately five seconds
until the AVC Level setting is displayed.
OFF Nav. Vol Offset Repeatedly press the Tone button to scroll
Info Vol Offset
INFO
+6 +6 through the menu until Phone Volume is
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

displayed.
AVC Level
4 The current phone volume value will be
1 2 3 4 5 6
displayed. Rotate the volume control to
increase or decrease the value.
Voice volume
E81865 E81866

The information volume offset allows an The navigation volume offset allows you to set Voice Volume
E81864 increased volume level to be set for news and an independent level for the volume of 22
1 2 3 4 5 6

traffic announcements. Navigation announcements.

The automatic volume control adjusts the
volume level to compensate for the changes in
road noise as the vehicle speed increases or
decreases.
Note: The AVC value (0-9) represents the
volume increase, and not the volume level.
If the AVC level is set to zero, there will be no
volume increase. An AVC setting of 1 will
increase the volume by a small amount. An
AVC setting of 9 will increase the volume by a
large amount.
The AVC setting required will depend upon the
expected speed and the expected road
conditions.
To access the AVC Level settings, press the
The figure set determines the number of steps
above the current volume. For example the
information volume offset is 6, and the audio
output is 14, the announcement will be made at
a volume level of 20.
To access the information volume offset
setting, press the Tone button for
approximately five seconds until the AVC Level
setting is displayed. Repeatedly press the Tone
button to scroll through the menu until Info Vol
Offset is displayed.
The current information volume offset value
will be displayed. Rotate the volume control to
increase or decrease the value.
To access the navigation volume offset
settings, press the Tone button for
approximately five seconds until the AVC Level
setting is displayed. Repeatedly press the Tone
button to scroll through the menu until Nav Vol
E81868
Offset is displayed.
The current navigation volume offset value will The voice volume allows you to set an
be displayed. Rotate the volume control to independent level for the volume of the unit’s
increase or decrease the value. voice output.
Phone volume To access the voice volume settings, press the
Tone button for approximately five seconds
until the AVC Level setting is displayed.
Phone Volume Repeatedly press the Tone button to scroll
8 through the menu until Voice Volume is
1 2 3 4 5 6

Note: If an announcement is received during a displayed.

Tone button for approximately five seconds
phone call, the phone call will be terminated. The current voice volume value will be
until the current AVC Level setting is displayed.
Rotate the volume control to increase or displayed. Rotate the volume control to
decrease the value. increase or decrease the value.

E81867

The phone volume allows you to set an

independent level for the volume of the
telephone.

289 290
 Audio unit operation Audio unit operation
Reset volume settings BASS/TREBLE CONTROL Subwoofer settings Logic 7 settings
Bass response adjustment
Subwoofer
Reset Vol. Settings LOGIC7
1 2 3 4 5 6
No Bass No
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

E81842

E81840 Press the Tone button repeatedly until the

current Subwoofer setting is displayed. Rotate
Reset Vol. Settings
Press the Tone button briefly. When the current the volume control to increase or decrease the LOGIC7
Yes Bass setting is displayed, rotate the volume setting. Yes
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
control to increase or decrease the level.
Press the Tone button to confirm your choice.
Press the Tone button to confirm the setting.
Treble response adjustment

E81869 E81843

This feature resets all of the volume settings to
the original factory values.
Press the Tone button for approximately five
seconds until the AVC Level setting is
displayed. Repeatedly press the Tone button to
scroll through the menu until Reset Vol
Settings is displayed. Rotate the volume
control to highlight Yes or No as required.
Press the Tone button to confirm your choice
and exit the menu.
Treble
Press the Tone button repeatedly until the
1 2 3 4 5 6
current LOGIC7 setting is displayed. Rotate the
volume control to highlight Yes or No as
required.
Press the Tone button to confirm your choice.
E81841
Press the Tone button repeatedly until the
current Treble setting is displayed. Rotate the
volume control to increase or decrease the
level.
Press the Tone button to confirm your choice.

291 292
 Audio unit operation Audio unit operation
Source tone memory Resetting tone values BALANCE/FADE CONTROL STATION PRESET BUTTONS
Balance adjustment

Source Tone Memory Reset Tone Settings FM1 14 : 54

No No Balance 87. 50
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

E81838

Source Tone Memory Reset Tone Settings

Press the Tone button repeatedly until the
Yes Yes current Balance setting is displayed. Rotate
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
the volume control to increase or decrease the
left or right sound level. FM1 14 : 54
2 BBC R4
Fader adjustment

E81844 E81845
Fader
Press the Tone button repeatedly until the To return the tone settings to the factory
1 2 3 4 5 6
current Source Tone Memory setting is defaults, press the Tone button repeatedly until E81885

displayed. Rotate the volume control to
highlight Yes or No as required.
Press the Tone button to confirm your choice.
Reset Tone Settings is displayed. Rotate the
volume control to highlight Yes or No as
required.
Premium audio: Press the Tone button to
confirm your choice.
Standard audio: Press the MENU/OK button to
confirm your choice.
All settings will be reset to the neutral (central)
value.
E81839
Press the Tone button repeatedly until the
current Fader setting is displayed. Rotate the
volume control to increase or decrease the
front or rear sound level.
To store a station, press either of the search
buttons to scan up or down to the next
available station. Having tuned to the desired
station, press and hold the preset number
under which you would like the station stored.
Note: For information on radio reception
quality See RADIO RECEPTION (page 285).
The audio output will be muted when the
button is pressed. When the audio output can
be heard again, the station has been stored.
To access the stored stations, press the
required preset number briefly.

293 294
 Audio unit operation Audio unit operation
WAVEBAND BUTTON AUTOSTORE CONTROL TRAFFIC INFORMATION CONTROL
FM A 14 : 54
2 97.9 Radio 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 TA
FM1 FM2 FMa News ON
FMa 14 : 54 TA OFF
Autostore

FM1 14 : 54
2 BBC R4 TA
E81884

To autostore FM stations, press and hold the FM1 14 : 54

E81886 FM button. Autostore will be shown in the 2 BBC R4 TA 14 : 54
information display and the stations will be TA

To select the FM waveband, press the FM 95.2 BBC Oxfd

stored under the preset numbers in the order in 1 2 3 4 5 6 TA
button briefly. Repeated presses will scroll which they are found.
through FM1, FM2 and FMa. The selections E81879
will be shown in the top left-hand corner of the To access the stored stations, press the
information display. required preset number briefly. To switch Traffic information on or off, briefly
TA press the INFO button
MW1 MWa LW1 LWa If the audio unit is tuned to a weak FM signal (in
remote areas, for example) or a station that
cannot provide traffic information, when the
Tr a f f i c 14 : 54
INFO button is pressed, the display will show
BBC R2
MW1 14 : 54 TA No TA/TP.
4 531 If a traffic information station cannot be found,
No Station will be displayed. The audio unit will
E81878 return to the previously tuned frequency.
E81887
If the signal from a traffic information station
Press the MENU/OK button to display the weakens, the TP indicator in the left-hand side
To select the AM waveband (includes MW and menu. Rotate the menu control to select TA. of the display will flash. Press either of the
LW), press the AM button briefly. Repeated Press the menu control to change the status to search controls to search for another station. If
presses will scroll through MW1, MWa, LW1 ON or OFF. the traffic information signal weakens during
and LWa. The selections will be shown in the As soon as a traffic announcement is received, CD play, the audio unit will attempt to re-tune
top left-hand corner of the information display. radio reception or CD play is interrupted and to a traffic information station with a stronger
TRAFFIC appears briefly in the information signal.
display, followed by the name of the station Note: If a non-traffic information station is
providing the information. stored on a preset button, and is selected while
At the end of the traffic announcement, radio or traffic information is switched on, the audio
CD play, will resume. unit will remain on the selected station unless
TA is turned off and on again.

295 296
 Audio unit menus Audio unit menus
Audio unit menus

RADIO DATA SYSTEM (RDS) ON or OFF will now be displayed. Rotate the Alternatively, press and hold the INFO button to PRIORITY PROGRAMME TYPE (PTY)
Your audio unit is equipped with RDS, which menu control to select one of these and press switch news announcements on or off. The RDS (Radio Data System) allows
enables the audio unit to receive additional either the menu control or the MENU/OK When a news announcement is received, programmes to be categorised by the
information with the normal radio signals. button to confirm your selection. normal radio reception or CD play is broadcast type (rock music, current affairs,
On the FM waveband, RDS enables the audio to The RDS status will be shown briefly on the interrupted and the display flashes NEWS news etc.).
receive traffic and news information information display. alternately with the name of the station This in turn, allows you to search for a station
broadcasts. RDS also allows the audio to providing the news information. by choosing the type of broadcast that you
automatically re-tune to stations that are linked NEWS BROADCASTS The display will alternatively flash the station wish to listen to.
to the same network if that network allows this. name and NEWS. At the end of each
Selecting news information PTY search
Note: Not all FM radio stations broadcast RDS. announcement, radio or CD play will resume.
Note: Both traffic and news information can be To search for a station by programme type,
If a non-RDS station is selected, RDS features
Regional ON selected at the same time. However, the audio RDS must be set to ON. Press the MENU/OK to
will not be available.
News OFF unit will always give priority to traffic enter the menu.
Selecting RDS information.
Cancelling an announcement
Cancel
Cancel PTY Seek
PTY Seek FM Scan
FM Scan 1 2 3 4 5 6
TA 14 : 54
1 2 3 4 5 6
95.2 BBC Oxfd
FM1 14 : 54 1 2 3 4 5 6 TA
2 BBC R2
NEWS
Cancel
News
FM Scan Affairs
RDS 1 2 3 4 5 6

AF Switch
1 2 3 4 5 6

E81881
NEWS No PTY
To cancel an announcement briefly press the C
button.
Cancel FM A 14 : 54
On News 14 : 54 Note: Cancelling an announcement in this way
Off BBC R4 will not prevent further announcements when 2 94.1 Radio 4
1 2 3 4 5 6
NEWS they become available. 1 2 3 4 5 6 PTY

E82210

To turn RDS on or off, press the MENU/OK E81880 PTY

button to display the menu. Rotate the menu E82211

control until RDS is displayed. Press the Press the MENU/OK button to display the
control to accept this setting. menu. Rotate the menu control to select Use the rotary control to scroll through the
NEWS. Press the MENU/OK button to change menu until PTY Seek is highlighted, then press
the status to ON or OFF. the rotary control.

297 298
 Audio unit menus Audio unit clock and date displays
Audio unit clock and date displays

Having entered the PTY menu, use the rotary PTY programme type SETTING THE CLOCK AND DATE ON Setting the time
control to scroll through the programme types THE AUDIO UNIT
until your choice is highlighted. Press either NEWS News services
the rotary control or the MENU/OK button to Setting the time format 09
AFFAIRS Current affairs
select the programme type and start the
search. INFO Information
Time
SPORT Sport Set AM 09
Once a matching station is found, it will Cancel
PTY Seek 1 2 3 4 5 6
continue to play. If you wish to continue EDUCATE Educational FM Scan
1 2 3 4 5 6
searching, press the Search up or Search DRAMA Drama
down button within thirty seconds. To continue 32
CULTURE Cultural
listening to the station, no action is required as
it will remain tuned, and can be stored as a SCIENCE Scientific
News Time
pre-set if required. VARIED Varied programming Set AM 09 32
Clock
To abort a PTY search, press the C button. POP M Pop music 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6

ROCK M Rock music

E81850
EASY M Easy listening music
LIGHT M Light music 12 24 x Rotate the menu control until the correct
hours setting is shown. Press the control
CLASSICS Classical music
to accept the setting.
OTHER M Other music Time
12/24 12 x Rotate the menu control until the correct
WEATHER Weather information 1 2 3 4 5 6 minutes setting is shown. Press the
FINANCE Financial information control to accept the setting.
CHILDREN Children’s programming E81849
x The display will return to the main menu.
SOCIAL Religious music 1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the
RELIGION Religious talk/music clock menu.
PHONE IN Phone-in 2. Rotate the menu control to select Clock,
TRAVEL Travel then press the control to select.
LEISURE Leisure 3. Rotate the menu control to scroll between
12 and 24, then press the control to select
JAZZ Jazz music the required format.
COUNTRY Country music
NATION M National music
OLDIES Older music
FOLK M Folk music
DOCUMENT Documentaries

299 300
 Compact disc player Compact disc player
Compact disc player

LOADING COMPACT DISCS Inserting a single disc - Premium audio Ensure that the label side of the disc is facing Note: If a compact disc fails to be drawn in,
upwards then partially insert the disc; the and the message CD Error is displayed, press
Inserting a disc - Standard audio CAUTION player mechanism will draw the disc in the eject button to clear the error.
Do not force the disc into the slot. automatically. If the error fails to clear contact your Land
CAUTION
Inserting multiple discs Rover Dealer/Authorised repairer.
Do not force a disc into the slot.
This process is repeated until all six compact
disc positions are occupied. If one or more of
CD No Discs 14 : 54 the disc positions is already occupied, that
FM1 14 : 54 Press 1-6 CD 1 14 : 54
position will be skipped in the loading process.
2 BBC R4 Please Wait
Note: To stop the loading process, either press
and hold the CD mode button or press the C
button.
1 2
ABC
3
DEF
Note: If there is a problem with a disc that has
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 1 14 : 54
CD 3 14 : 54 been loaded (inserted upside down, wrong
Insert Disc
7
PQRS
8
TUV
9
WXYZ Please Wait format etc.), Disc Error will appear in the
0
information display, and the disc in question
E82442 will be ejected. If the problem can be corrected
(disc upside down for example), then re-insert
A compact disc can be loaded during any mode
3 the disc in the correct manner. If the problem
of play.
cannot be rectified, do not re-insert the disc.
Ensure that the label side of the disc is facing CD 3 14 : 54
upwards then partially insert the disc; the Insert Disc
player mechanism will draw the disc in 3

automatically.
CD 1 14 : 54
Loading All
1

CD 2 14 : 54
Please Wait
E81783 1
E81784

Press the CD mode button, then press the

To insert more than one disc, briefly press the
numbered button of the position in which the
CD mode button. Then press and hold the CD
compact disc is to be stored. Please Wait will
mode button. The information display will
appear in the information display, followed by
show Loading All, followed by Please Wait.
the instruction Insert Disc.
When the message Insert Disc is displayed, the
Note: The six circles at the bottom left-hand
first disc can be inserted. The disc's position
side of the information display represent the
number will be highlighted on the information
six available CD positions. As soon as a CD is
display screen both during and after loading.
loaded, its number will appear in the circle.

301 302
 Compact disc player Compact disc player
EJECTING COMPACT DISCS EJECTING MULTIPLE COMPACT The discs will be ejected one at a time with a COMPACT DISC SELECTION
DISCS short pause in between each. Following the
CAUTION removal of the last disc, Loading will be shown
1 2
ABC
3
DEF
Do not pull the disc from the player in the information display.
CD 1 14 : 54 4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
before it has stopped moving, this will To stop the process, press any number button. CD 1 14 : 54
damage the player mechanism. Ejecting All 7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ Tr 12 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6 Note: If a disc is not removed from the slot
1 2 3 5 6
within fifteen seconds, it will be drawn back 0
into the player.
CD 5 14 : 54
Ejecting CD 4 14 : 54
1 2 3 4 5 6
Please Wait
1 2 3 5 6

CD 4 14 : 54
CD 1 14 : 54
Insert Disc
Remove Disc 1 2 3 5 6

2 3 4 5 6

CD 5 14 : 54
Remove Disc
1 2 3 4 6

CD 2 14 : 54 CD 4 14 : 54
Ejecting All Tr 01 0 : 01
2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
E81788

CD 6 14 : 54 To start compact disc playback, briefly press

E81785
It is only possible to eject a single disc, if it is
currently selected or playing.
To eject a disc, press the eject button briefly.
Ejecting will be shown on the information
display and, after a short pause, the disc will be
presented. When the disc has stopped moving
Remove Disc is displayed. The disc should
now be removed.
Note: If the disc is not removed from the slot
within fifteen seconds, it will be drawn back
into the player.
Loading the disc number required. If the position
E81786 selected does not contain a disc, there will be a
pause and the message Insert Disc will appear
All the discs loaded in the player can be ejected on the information display.
in sequence. To eject all of the discs, press and
Once a disc has been inserted, there will be a
hold the eject button. Ejecting All will be
pause whilst the player reads the disc
shown on the information display and, after a
information. Playback will then begin at the
short pause, the first disc will be presented.
start of track one.
When the disc has stopped moving Remove
Disc is displayed. The disc should now be
removed.

303 304
 Compact disc player Compact disc player
COMPACT DISC PLAYBACK Premium audio TRACK SELECTION FAST FORWARD/REVERSE
Standard audio
CD 4 14 : 54 CD 4 14 : 54
CD 1 14 : 54 Tr 04 2 : 16 Tr 03 0 : 00
CD No Disc Tr 12 3 : 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6

CD 14 : 54
Tr 01 0 : 01 1 2
ABC
3
DEF

4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7
PQRS
8
TUV
9
WXYZ Loading E81790 E81792
1 2 3 4 5 6
E82443 0
To search forwards or backwards through the To return to the start of a track during playback,
To start compact disc playback, briefly press
current track, briefly press the relevant button. briefly press the button arrowed.
the CD mode button. 6CD-465

Note: If no disc is inserted, NO Disc will appear COMPACT DISC PAUSE CD 4 14 : 54

in the display. Playback will start as soon as a CD 3 14 : 54
Tr 04 0 : 00
disc is inserted. Tr 01 0 : 01 1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6
CD 1 14 : 54
Tr 03 2 : 13
E81789 1 2 3 4 5 6

To start compact disc playback, briefly press E81791

the CD mode button, followed by the disc

number required. If no disc number is selected, To pause or stop compact disc playback,
playback will begin at one of two places. briefly press one of the other mode buttons, E81793
AM or FM for example.
x If the discs have not been removed since
their last use, playback will begin from the To fast forward to the beginning of the next
point at which it was stopped previously. track, briefly press the button arrowed.
x If the discs have not been used since they
were inserted, playback will begin at the
start of disc one.

305 306
 Compact disc player Compact disc player
COMPACT DISC FUNCTION MENU SHUFFLE/RANDOM REPEAT COMPACT DISC TRACKS COMPACT DISC TRACK SCANNING

CD 2 14 : 54 Cancel CD Scan Random

Tr 06 1 : 27 Random Repeat CD Scan
1 2 3 4 5 6
CD Scan Load All Repeat

6CD-465 6CD-465 6CD-465

E81794
CD 3 14 : 54 CD 1 14 : 54 CD 1 Scan 14 : 54
The following additional functions are available Tr 17 0 : 00 Random Tr 06 0 : 27 Repeat Tr 01 0 : 08
using the compact disc function menu: 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
x Random.
x CD scan. E81795 E81796 E81797

x Repeat.
Select compact disc mode, then briefly press
the MENU/OK button. Rotate the menu control
to select the required function. Press the
control to enable or disable the function.
Shuffle/random alters the playback sequence
for the current disc. The tracks are selected
randomly by the player.
Rotate the menu control to select Random and
press the control to enable the function.
To disable the function, rotate the menu control
to select Random and press the control.
Pressing the C button will also disable the
function.
Repeat allows the current track to play
repeatedly until it is stopped/ cancelled.
Rotate the menu control to select Repeat and
press the control to enable the function.
To disable the function, rotate the menu control
to select Repeat and press the control.
Pressing the C button, or the skip forward/next
track or return to start/previous buttons, will
also disable the function.
Compact disc track scan allows you to sample
the music on a compact disc. This feature plays
the first ten seconds of each track in numerical
order. Play will then begin at the start of track
one.
Rotate the menu control to select CD scan and
press the control to enable the function.
To disable the function, rotate the menu control
to select CD scan and press the control.
Pressing the C button, or the skip forward/next
track or return to start/previous buttons, will
also disable the function.

307 308
 Compact disc player
MP3 FILE PLAYBACK
6CD-465
CD 3 Data 14 : 54
Tr 01 1 : 37
Fd 03 16 Tr 01 14
1 2 3 4 5 6
E81798
When a data disc (containing MP3 encrypted
music data) is inserted into the compact disc
slot, the information display will show
additional folder and track information.
The first line of the information display shows
that a data disc is inserted. The second line
shows which track is being played and the play
time of that track.
The third line shows which folder out of the
total number of folders (03/16) and which track
out of the total number of tracks available
(01/14) is currently playing
A short press on the # or * keys selects the next
or previous folder respectively. The number of
that folder will change accordingly
When a new folder is selected, play will
commence at the first track in that folder.
Within the current folder, track selection can be
changed by use of the return to start/previous
and skip forward/next track buttons. Track
number in the display will change accordingly.
Note: Blank or empty folders may be listed on
screen, but they will be skipped when moving
through the available folders.
If an MP3 recording is made with a
compression rate lower than 128k some Digital
Signal Processing (DSP) functionality may be
lost.
309
To ensure that the best sound quality is
achieved the instructions/information provided
with the recording software should be read
carefully and adhered to.
Rear passenger controls
Rear passenger controls
REAR SEAT CONTROLS
2 5 7 frequency band for the next station with
1 3 4 6
E81893
1. 3.5 mm headphone jack
2. Preset/CD select
x During radio play, a short press will
select the next preset radio station.
x During CD play, a short press will select
the next CD.
3. Mode control
x A long press will select AUX.
x With AUX selected, press to return to the
previous mode.
x When rear seat entertainment is
selected, all adjustments are made
through the remote control.
4. Search down
x During radio play, press to search down
the frequency band for the next station
with a good signal strength.
x During CD play, a short press will start
the current track again. A second press
will start the previous track.
x During CD play, a long press will search
back through the track being played,
until the button is released.
310
5. Search up
x During radio play, press to search up the
a good signal strength.
x During CD play, a short press will start
the next track.
x During CD play, a long press will search
forward through the track being played,
until the button is released.
6. Volume decrease
x Press to decrease headphone volume
7. Volume increase
x Press to increase headphone volume
With the starter switch in position I or II, the
rear seat controls can operate, regardless of
whether the audio system is switched on or
not. However, the output can only be heard
through the headphones.
If rear seat passengers are listening to the
same source as the front seat passengers, only
the volume can be adjusted via the rear seat
controls.
For example, if a music CD is playing on the
audio unit, rear seat passengers can listen to
that music and adjust the volume to suit their
requirement. No other functions will be
available.
If however, the audio unit is switched to
another source, all CD related rear seat
controls become operable. If the audio source
is subsequently switched back to CD, the rear
seat controls will again be limited to volume
control only.
The same logic applies to radio functions.
Adjustments can be made to other functions of
the audio system.
 Rear passenger controls Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket
Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket

For example, if a music CD is selected on the
audio unit, radio can be selected and controlled
using the rear seat controls. All radio related
rear seat controls become operable.
HEADPHONES
The maximum volume available to this type of
headphones is limited to the volume set at the
rear seat controls.
Note: Only headphones compatible with a 3.5
mm jack plug socket can be used. To obtain
optimum sound quality, use headphones with
an impedance of 32 ohms.
Note: When the headphones are not
connected, the rear seat controls remain
operational. It is still possible to select CD,
whilst the radio is playing on the audio unit. CD
play will remain operational until the mode
AUXILIARY INPUT (AUX IN) SOCKET
WARNINGS
Ensure that any auxiliary devices are
stored securely whilst the vehicle is in
motion. Any loose objects can present a
serious hazard during sudden manoeuvres,
emergency braking, or an accident.
Do not place any item connected to the
auxiliary input socket, or the auxiliary
power socket, on the vehicle’s seats, carpets,
or other upholstery. The heat generated by
these devices may cause damage to the
upholstery, or in extreme cases, a vehicle fire.
Do not leave any auxiliary input devices
connected whilst the vehicle is left
unattended. There is a risk of heat damage or
fire, in addition to the risk of theft. E80550

control is pressed again.

Note: The mode in use when the starter key is
removed will resume if the starter switch is
turned on again (position I or II) within two
minutes. If the starter switch is turned off for
longer than two minutes AUX mode will be
selected when the starter switch is next turned
on. For example, a CD is playing when the key
is removed, play will recommence when the
starter switch is next turned to position I, or the
engine is started, whether the headphones are
in use or not.
Note: Adjusting the volume on the audio unit,
does not alter the headphone volume. The
volume of each controller can be adjusted
independently.
CAUTION
Read the manufacturer's instructions for
any device before it is connected to the
vehicle's audio system. Ensure that the device
is suitable, and comply with any instructions
regarding connection and operation. Failure to
do so may result in damage to the vehicle's
audio system or the auxiliary device.
AUX (Auxiliary Input) mode allows additional
equipment to be connected to the vehicle's
audio system. Items such as a personal stereo,
MP3 player, hand-held navigation unit etc. can
be plugged in to the vehicle's audio system.
The auxiliary connector is situated at the rear of
the centre console. To gain access, lift the
lower edge of the cover.
Auxiliary audio devices are connected via the
3.5 mm stereo jack plug marked AUX.
The auxiliary power socket, situated next to the
auxiliary input connector, can be used to power
or charge any suitable device.
Note: On vehicles fitted with rear seat
entertainment, additional Audio Visual sockets
(AV1 and AV2) are provided. This allows
auxiliary equipment (such as a video games
console) to be linked up to the rear DVD
screens. For information on the installation of
such equipment, please refer to the installation
guide supplied with the auxiliary equipment.

311 312
 Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket
Auxiliary mode
AUX
AUX
1 2 3 4 5 6
E80551
To listen to an auxiliary input source, connect
the device and briefly press the AUX button.
The unit will playback audio via the 3.5 mm
stereo jack plug.
Alternatively, press and hold the MODE button
on the steering wheel or the rear audio
controls.
Volume is controlled using the left rotary
control. Tone and balance can also be adjusted.
Note: The volume levels and sound quality
available from devices connected to the
auxiliary inputs may vary widely.
Telephone
Telephone
GENERAL INFORMATION Note: The vehicle telephone system is
designed to function with a wide variety of
WARNINGS Bluetooth telephones. As these telephones
Use of your phone handset while you have a wide range of audio and echo
are driving is dangerous as it diverts performance characteristics, it may take a few
attention from the traffic situation. If you wish seconds for the vehicle telephone system to
14 : 54
to use your phone handset, stop at an adapt and deliver optimum audio performance.
appropriate place where you are not It may be necessary to reduce the in-vehicle
endangering or inconveniencing other volume slightly to fully optimise audio
vehicles. performance and reduce echo.
Using the telephone near the car: do not
telephone inside a garage or near an
open car bonnet. The air may contain fuel
vapours and the telephone could produce
sparks and start a fire.
Unusual ambient conditions: Switch off
the telephone in areas where high
explosives are being used. High frequency
remote controls could be interfered with and
cause an explosion. Switch off your telephone
in areas with a high explosion risk. This
includes filling stations, fuel storage areas or
chemical factories, as well as places where the
air contains fuel vapour, chemicals or metal
dust. The telephone might possibly produce
sparks and cause a fire or explosion.
Medical equipment: The functioning of
cardiac pacemakers or hearing aids
may be impaired when the phone is in use.
Check with a doctor or manufacturer whether
any such devices you or your passengers are
using are sufficiently protected against
high-frequency energy.
Always stow your mobile phone
securely. In an accident loose items can
cause injury.
313 314
 Telephone Telephone
Telephone networks Mobile phone compatibility TELEPHONE CONTROLS
The Telephone network standard allows you to Not all phones are fully compatible with the
Telephone controls - Facia
use your telephone in many countries, and to Land Rover system. For the latest list of
use a uniform emergency call number (112) compatible phones and software versions,
irrespective of which country you are driving. please refer to www.landrover.com. 1 2
Telephone reception may be poor or Alternatively consult your Land Rover
unavailable in remote regions, due to the Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
inadequate power of the transmitter, which Bluetooth supported features 1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465
results in a weak signal or incomplete x Make a call. 4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO
coverage. 14 : 54
x Receive a call.
7
PQRS
8
TUV
9
WXYZ Bluetooth
x End an active call.
1 2 3 4 5 6

x Call stacking - display of missed calls, last 0 3

number called, call waiting.
x Phonebook - access to the phonebook 4
stored on the phone or SIM card.
Unsupported features
5
x Phone charging.
x Hold/unhold an active call.
x Rejecting an incoming call. 6
LAN1192
x No display of network operator, signal
1. Alphanumeric keypad 4. MENU OK button
strength or caller id.
2. Display 5. Cancel button
Note: Functionality will depend on
model/manufacturer of your mobile phone. 3. Phone button 6. Rotary/Enter button

315 316
 Telephone
Telephone controls - Steering wheel
1 prompt you for the Bluetooth access code.
2 phone.
3
4 Note: A maximum of eight mobile phones can
E83782
1. Answer call/Dial switch
x Pull the switch briefly towards the
steering wheel to answer an incoming
call or dial a displayed number. Pull and
hold the switch (for approximately two
seconds) to redial the last number
dialled.
2. End/Reject call switch
x Pull the switch towards the steering
wheel to end the current call or reject an
incoming call.
3. Menu/Next button
x Press to scroll down through a menu.
4. Menu/Previous button
x Press to scroll up through a menu.
Note: To leave the menu press the CANCEL
button on the audio unit.
317
Voice control switch
E82207
To activate voice control, briefly pull the voice
control switch (arrowed) towards the steering
wheel until an acoustic signal sounds.
Pull and release the switch before giving a
voice command.
For further information. See USING VOICE
CONTROL (page 336).
Telephone
Phone display - Facia 3. The text LAND ROVER will appear on your
mobile phone device list. This should be
1 2 3 selected. LAND ROVER can be
personalised by the user (e.g. the vehicle
6CD-465
registration number).
14 : 54 4. Your mobile phone display will now
Bluetooth Press the numeric keys 2121 on your
5. When the code is accepted, the system will
LAN1191
allow you to use the Bluetooth mode.
1. Call status icon be paired to the vehicle.
2. Call status/Caller ID/Number received or Note: If more than one paired Bluetooth phone
Dialled is in range, then the system will automatically
3. Clock select the last phone used in Bluetooth mode (if
present).
BLUETOOTH SETUP Note: Priority can be given to other phones by
de-selecting Bluetooth mode on your mobile
Bluetooth operation phone.
Bluetooth access code
The four digit access code required for
Bluetooth pairing operation is 2121.
Pairing your phone to the vehicle
If your mobile phone supports this wireless
feature, it will need to be paired to the vehicle.
The pairing process will also be described in
your mobile phone instructions.
1. With the vehicle ignition on, select the
Bluetooth feature on your mobile phone.
2. Start the Search function on your mobile
phone. This search process may vary from
one handset/manufacturer to another
(consult your mobile phone instructions
for further details). Typically, when
searching for other wireless devices the
search range is 10 metres or less.
318
 Telephone Telephone
TELEPHONE SETUP Using display menus Switching the phone on/off When all the digits of the phone number have
Many of the functions available for the phone The phone cannot be switched on or off been entered, briefly press the Phone button
Selecting telephone mode (arrowed in middle illustration) or operate the
are accessed through menus on the display. remotely when using the Bluetooth
Once your phone is paired and connected, you functionality. Answer call switch on the steering wheel, to
Press the MENU OK button briefly to access the
can select the vehicle telephone system. dial the number, Dialling appears in the
menu relevant to the current phone mode.
USING THE TELEPHONE display.
(Different menus are available in different
F 6CD-465 modes). Note: Pressing the Cancel button briefly or
Dialling operating the End call switch on the steering
O x Press the button, when there is no active
14 : 54
Dialling a number manually wheel when the phone is dialling, will cancel
YZ Bluetooth call, to access the Phone menu.
1 2 3 4 5 6
the call.
x Press the button during a call to access the With the phone turned on, access Phone mode
In-call menu. as described previously. Note: If you wish to dial a number stored in the
phone book. See PHONEBOOK (page 324).
1 2
ABC
3
DEF Correcting/Clearing number entries
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
Cancel 01926648
LAN1194 Phone Book 7
PQRS
8
TUV WXYZ
9
Call Register F 6CD-465
1 2 3 4 5 6
0 O
0192664
Briefly press the Phone button (arrowed) or
YZ
operate the Answer call switch on the steering 1 2 3 4 5 6

wheel. Visual confirmation of phone operation Phone Book F 6CD-465

is given via the display. Call Register
O
1 01926648100
Note: Once Phone mode is selected, if there is
YZ
no user action within 30 seconds, the system Dialling
1 2 3 4 5 6

reverts to Audio mode and Phone mode will LAN1195

need to be reselected.
If a phone system is not fitted to your vehicle,
No Phone fitted is displayed when Phone
mode is selected.
To exit Phone mode, briefly press the Cancel
button or operate the End call switch on the
steering wheel.
Use the rotary control to highlight the chosen
LAN1197
menu item, by turning the control clockwise to
6CD-465
scroll down or anti-clockwise to scroll up If an incorrect digit is entered, press the Cancel
through the chosen menu. Press the rotary button (arrowed) briefly to delete the last digit,
1 01926648100
control or press the Phone button to select the then enter the correct digit.
highlighted item. The menu Prev and Next
Press and hold the Cancel button (for
buttons on the steering wheel can also be used 1 2 3 4 5 6 approximately two seconds) to delete all
to scroll through menus.
entered digits.
LAN1196

Use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the

phone number to be dialled. The digits of the
number appear in the display.

319 320
 Telephone Telephone
Last number redial 3. Highlight and select Dialled from the list of Using the received call list To exit the received call list without selecting an
If your phone is capable of sending the last options using the rotary control. Your phone must be capable of sending the entry, scroll through the list until Cancel is
dialled call list to the vehicle, the last number 4. Use the rotary control to scroll through the received call list to the vehicle. highlighted, then press the rotary control to
dialled can be redialled using the Answer call list of dialled numbers until the desired select. The system returns to the previous
switch on the steering wheel. If Phone mode is number is highlighted. menu.
active, press and release the switch. If Phone 5. Press the rotary control or the Phone Using the missed call list
mode is not active, press and hold the switch. Cancel
button, to select and dial the chosen Phone Book Your phone must be capable of sending the
The number will appear in the display and in the number. Call Register
1 2 3 4 5 6 missed call list to the vehicle.
main message centre and will be dialled. To
cancel dialling, operate the End call switch on To exit the redial list without selecting an entry,
the steering wheel. scroll through the list until Cancel is
highlighted, then press the rotary control to
Dialled Cancel
Using the call register select. The system returns to the previous Missed Phone Book
menu. Received Call Register
Using the redial list 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

Your phone must be capable of sending the

redial call list to the vehicle.
6CD-465 Dialled
Missed
01926648100 Received
1 2 3 4 5 6
Phone Book
Call Register Jane
Phone Off Home
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6

6CD-465

E91051
01926648100
Cancel
Dialled 1. Press the MENU OK button to access the Jane
Missed Phone menu. James
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
2. Use the rotary control to highlight and
select Call register.
E91052

6CD-465
3. Highlight and select Received from the list
of options using the rotary control. 1. Press the MENU OK button to access the
Tom 4. Use the rotary control to scroll through the Phone menu.
01926648100 list of received numbers until the desired 2. Use the rotary control to highlight and
Work number is highlighted. select Call register.
1 2 3 4 5 6
5. Press the rotary control, the Phone button 3. Highlight and select Missed from the list of
or operate the Answer call switch on the options using the rotary control.
E91050
steering wheel, to select and dial the 4. Use the rotary control to scroll through the
1. Press the MENU OK button to access the chosen number. list of missed numbers until the desired
Phone menu. number is highlighted.
2. Use the rotary control to highlight and
select Call register.

321 322
 Telephone Telephone
5. Press the rotary control, the Phone button The call can be answered in three ways: Rejecting an incoming call To end the current active call without first
or operate the Answer call switch on the x Operate the Answer call switch on the To reject an incoming call without answering, deleting the scratchpad entry, either operate
steering wheel, to select and dial the steering wheel (arrowed in inset). operate the End call switch on the steering the End call switch on the steering wheel, or
chosen number. x Press and release the Phone button wheel or press and release the Cancel button. briefly press the OK MENU button to access the
To exit the missed call list without selecting an (arrowed in main illustration). In-Call menu, then use the rotary control to
Scratchpad highlight End Call and press the control to
entry, scroll through the list until Cancel is x Press and release the MENU OK button.
highlighted, then press the rotary control to This function enables you to note down a select.
select. The system returns to the previous Ending a call number while in an active call. If the active call is ended with the Scratchpad
menu. entry still displayed, the Scratchpad entry will
1 2
ABC
3
DEF
move up to the top line of the display.
Answering/Rejecting calls 4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO
1 Tim Smith PHONEBOOK
Answering an incoming call 7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ 0191_
1 2 3 4 5 6
0 Phone book
When your phone is connected to the car,
dependent on the phone being used, your
phone book will be downloaded to the vehicle
1 Tim Smith
019_ and will be accessible using the integrated
1 2 3 4 5 6
phone system controls.
To confirm that your phone supports this
LAN1200 feature and to check whether the phonebook is
F 6CD-465 downloaded from the phone or the SIM card,
O
Using brief presses, use the alphanumeric consult the list of approved phones at
1 Tim Smith
keypad to enter the number onto the display www.landrover.com.
YZ

1 2 3 4 5 6
(the number will appear on the second line of Note: Once the phone is disconnected from the
F
the display). This will not interrupt the current vehicle, the phonebook will be deleted from the
6CD-465
active call.
O vehicle system.
1 Tim Smith
To enter a + character (for an international
YZ Selecting the Phone book
1 2 3 4 5 6
number, for example), press and hold the 0 key
for approximately one second. Access the Phone book by turning the rotary
control or by pressing either the menu Next or
LAN1199 If an incorrect digit is entered, briefly press the
Prev button on the steering wheel.
Cancel button to delete the last digit, or press
To end a phone call, whether incoming or and hold the Cancel button to delete the entire To exit the Phone book without selecting an
outgoing, operate the End call switch on the number. entry, scroll through the list until Cancel is
steering wheel (arrowed in inset) or press and highlighted, then press the rotary control to
LAN1198
Note: Pressing the Cancel button when the
release the Cancel button (arrowed in main select. The system returns to the previous
Scratchpad function is active, will not end the
illustration). menu.
When an incoming call is received, the number current active call.
or caller ID (if entered into the Phone book) will Note: If the Scratchpad function is active, use Alternatively, the Phone book can be accessed
appear in the phone system display and also in the End call switch on the steering wheel to via the Phone menu.
the main message centre in the instrument end a call.
panel.

323 324
 Telephone Telephone
If the menu Next and Prev buttons are used to Phone book alphabetical search
scroll through the Phone book, the entry This method should be used when you wish to
Tanya currently highlighted in the display will also
Tim Smith narrow the search to the initial letter of the
Cancel Work appear in the main message centre in the Phone book entry.
Phone Book 1 2 3 4 5 6

Call Register instrument pack. The message centre will

1 2 3 4 5 6
display the caller ID, alternating at three second
1 2
ABC
3
DEF
intervals with the phone number.
GHI
4 5
JKL
6
MNO
6CD-465 Note: If scrolling is carried out using the rotary Harry
7 8 9 Helen
control, the caller ID/phone number is NOT PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tanya Home
Tim Smith displayed on the message centre. 0
Work Once the chosen Phone book entry is
Cancel 1 2 3 4 5 6

Phone Book highlighted, press the rotary control, the Phone

1 2 3 4 5 6
button or operate the Answer call switch on
the steering wheel, to select the entry and dial 1 Helen
the number.
E91059
1 2 3 4 5 6 Dialling
Tanya If the entry was selected by mistake, either
1. Press the MENU OK button to access the Tim Smith operate the End call switch on the steering LAN1121

Phone menu. Work wheel, or press and release the Cancel button
1 2 3 4 5 6

to cancel dialling. With the Phone book displayed, press the

2. Use the rotary control to highlight and
select Phone Book.
Note: To exit the Phone menu without
selecting the Phone book, highlight and select
Cancel.
Phone book scroll
There are two methods of selecting a contact
name from the Phone book. This method
should be used to browse through the contacts
listed in the Phone book.
appropriate alphanumeric key the
E91060 corresponding number of times according to
the initial letter of the entry.
To navigate through your contact list, turn the
rotary control clockwise or press the menu For example; if the initial letter of the required
Phone book entry is an H, press the 4 key of the
Next button on the steering wheel to scroll
down through the Phone book. To scroll up alphanumeric keypad twice. The display will
through the list, turn the rotary control now show the entries starting with the letter H.
anti-clockwise or press the menu Prev button Select the highlighted entry by briefly pressing
on the steering wheel. the rotary control or the Phone button.
To exit the Phone book without selecting an
entry, scroll through the list until Cancel is
highlighted, then press and release the rotary
control to select.

325 326
 Telephone
TELEPHONE VOICE CONTROL
Telephone voice control
WARNING
Do not use the voice control for placing
emergency calls. Your voice and tone
could be affected by stressful situations as a
result of which, the process of establishing the
telephone connection could be unnecessarily
delayed.
Voice control enables you to activate important
functions of your telephone system, without
the need to operate the controls manually. This
enables you to concentrate fully on driving the
vehicle.
A number of voice commands are available
and, with a little experience, you will find them
easy and convenient to use. You are guided
through these dialogues by announcements or
questions.
Please familiarise yourself with the functions of
your telephone system, before using voice
control.
Note: The voice recognition directory is
separate from your phone handset SIM card
address book/phone book.
For general information about voice control.
See USING VOICE CONTROL (page 336).
327
Telephone
Defined voice commands Activating the system Interrupting voice control
The voice control system understands A command can be interrupted by speaking the
predefined commands which need to be given word Cancel or by pressing the steering wheel
word for word. voice control key until the system responds by
You can prompt the system to speak a displaying COMMAND CANCEL in the Main
selection of these commands by activating the message centre.
system and giving the command Phone help It is only possible to interrupt dialogues where
or Telephone help. you say a name in the voice recognition phone
Note: For each command below, the term book, by pressing the steering wheel key.
Phone or Telephone are equally acceptable. If you receive a telephone call (or Navigation
These commands are as follows: route guidance instruction/T.A.
announcement) while conducting a dialogue by
Telephone commands
voice control, the telephone mode
x Phone dial number/Dial phone number automatically cuts in.
x Phone redial/Redial
x Phone dial name/Dial name
x Phone store name
x Phone play directory/Read phone book
x Phone delete directory/Clear phone book
x Phone help
Telephone sub-commands E82207
These commands are used in response to a
prompt or question within a dialogue. To switch on voice control, press the voice
control key (arrowed) in the multi-functional
x Correction
steering wheel:
x Delete
x Briefly pull the control. An audible alert will
x Cancel
be heard, and LISTENING will be displayed
x Store on the main message centre (your Audio
x Dial will mute at this point, if switched on). The
x Yes system is now waiting for a spoken input.
x No Once the system is listening, give the desired
x Replay voice command.
x Numbers 0-9 Before giving a new voice command - except
x Double during a dialogue - always press the steering
x Treble/Triple wheel voice control key.
328
 Telephone Telephone
General commands Dialling a phone number To speed up input it is a good idea to group
Note: The voice control commands you should together between three and five digits into a
Starting a dialogue continuous string. However, you can also say
give are shown in bold and the responses by
Hold the voice control key in the each digit individually, or all digits
the voice recognition system are shown inside
multi-functional steering wheel pressed in until continuously.
chevrons >...<.
the acoustic signal is heard. Any audio sources
Note: Note: Telephone numbers of up to 20
Activating the user help function in the vehicle are muted.
digits are acknowledged. If a longer number is
The command Phone help calls up a list of The command Dial telephone number, or given, the following error message will be
telephone commands in spoken form. Phone dial number, start the dialogue for issued: >Number too long<.
entering a telephone number. You are guided
Command not recognised Establishing a connection
through this process by a predefined dialogue.
If a command is not recognised by the speech The command Dial terminates input of the
recognition system, it responds with >Sorry<. Saying numbers digits and a connection is established with the
Please say your command again. The system understands single digits from telephone number displayed.
zero to nine. You can choose to say either Zero
Note: To make a foreign phone call say Plus
Activating the user help function or Oh.
followed by the country code.
Numbers such as ten, eleven, twelve etc. are
Command System response Message centre display
not recognised.
Phone help (Reads out the telephone (Followed by telephone
commands) commands) Dialling a phone number
Command System response Message centre display
Phone dial number >Phone dial number, Number Dial Number Number Please
please<
Zero, one, six, one >Zero, one, six, one, 0161
continue?<
Four, nine, six >Four, nine, six, continue?< 0161496
Zero, nine, nine, eight >Zero, nine, nine, eight, 01614960998
continue?<
Dial >Dialling< Dialling

329 330
 Telephone Telephone
Correcting/Deleting and Cancelling Deleting inputs Storing a telephone name/number
inputs Delete, deletes all digits entered. It is then Telephone numbers which you dial frequently
When you are entering digits into the system, it necessary to enter the digits again from the can be stored in the Voice Recognition phone
will repeat back the numbers given, then asks very beginning. book in conjunction with the contact name.
you to continue. You may continue entering Cancelling voice session Storing via voice command
digits to complete your number or if you have
Cancel terminates voice session. The command Phone store name calls up the
made a mistake or if the voice control has
misunderstood, you may say: Correction, dialogue for storing a name. The name is
Delete or Cancel. entered first, then the number. The same rules
for saying numbers apply as for the Phone dial
Correcting inputs number command.
Correction to delete the last block of digits. If possible, keep names acoustically distinct
After the command Correction, the system from one another, for example, Andrew Royd
repeats the digits that were entered correctly and David Royle instead of Mr Royd and Mr
up to that point. Royle. This will improve recognition when you
make a call.
Correcting/Deleting inputs
Depending on the spoken length of the names
Command System response Message centre display and numbers you have entered, it is possible to
Phone dial number >Phone dial number, Number Dial Number Number Please store approximately 50 entries.
please<
Storing via voice command
Zero, one, six, one >Zero, one, six, one, 0161
continue?< Command System response Message centre display
Four, nine, six >Four, nine, six, continue?< 0161496 Phone store name >Phone store name< >Name Phone Store Name Name
Correction >Zero, one, six, one, 0161 please< Please
continue?< Andrew Royd >Number please< Number Please
Four, nine, five >Four, nine, five, continue?< 0161495 Zero, one, six, one >Zero, one, six, one, 0161
Delete >Number please< Number Please continue?<
Four, nine, six >Four, nine, six, continue?< 0161496
Redialling Zero, nine, nine, eight >Zero, nine, nine, eight, 01614960998
The command Phone redial or Redial dials the continue?<
telephone number last used. Store >Stored< Stored

Redialling the last number used

Command System response Message centre display
Phone redial >Phone redial, Confirm Yes or No< Phone Redial Say Yes Or No
Yes >Dialling< Dialling

331 332
 Telephone Telephone
Using the voice control phone book Dialling/Editing and Deleting from the
phone book
Dialling a telephone number in phone book
The command Phone play directory or Read
The command Phone dial name activates the
phone book enables you to have all entries in
phone number in the directory corresponding
your voice recognition phone book read out in
to the name tag.
order.
When prompted by the voice control system,
You may say one of the following after each
speak the name under which you have stored
name has been read out. Give the command
the telephone number you want.
Dial, Replay, Delete, Edit, Cancel or remain
The voice control system will understand best silent to advance to the next name.
the person who made the entries.
Dialling from the phone book
Dialling a telephone number in phone book
Command System response Message centre display
Command System response Message centre display
Phone play directory You can >Phone play directory< Phone Directory
Phone dial name >Dial name, Name please< Dial Name Name Please say Dial, Replay, Delete, Edit
Andrew Royd >Andrew Royd, Confirm Yes or Say Yes or No or Cancel after each name.
No< (Reads out the entries)
Yes >Dialling< Dialling Dial >Phone dial name, Confirm Yes Dial Name Say Yes or No
or No<
Yes >Dialling< Dialling

Dialling Editing
This function enables you to dial a telephone This function enables voice editing of a
number stored in the phone book. This is telephone number of an existing name stored
useful if you have forgotten a contact’s in the phone book.
voice/name tag or if the tag is not recognised.
Cancelling
Replaying Terminates the voice session.
This function repeats the name again from the
phone book.
Deleting
This function enables deletion of a telephone
number and name stored in the phone book.

333 334
 Telephone Voice control
Voice control

Deleting/Clearing the entire phone book PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION x Avoid causing background noise in the
The command Phone delete directory or Clear Voice control enables operation of the audio vehicle while you are speaking, and ask
phone book deletes all entries in the Voice and telephone systems without the need to your passengers not to talk while you are
Recognition phone book. divert your attention from the road ahead in issuing voice commands.
The names and telephone numbers entered in order to change settings, or receive feedback x The hands-free microphone is positioned
your Voice Recognition phone book are from the system. to pick up the driver’s voice.
independent of the telephone or SIM card Whenever you issue one of the defined Activating the system
memory of your phone. In other words, it is not commands with the system active, the voice
possible to recall or delete the numbers stored control system converts your command into a
in the telephone itself or on the SIM card by control signal for the audio or telephone
voice input, nor is it possible to store numbers system. Your inputs take the form of dialogues
there by voice input. or commands. You are guided through these
dialogues by announcements or questions.
Deleting/Clearing the entire phone book Please familiarise yourself with the functions of
Command System response Message centre display the audio and telephone systems before using
Phone delete directory >Phone delete directory, Delete Directory Say Yes or No voice control.
Confirm Yes or No< USING VOICE CONTROL
Yes >Are you sure you want to Say Yes or No The voice recognition system includes a
delete the whole directory?< hands-free microphone mounted in the roof of
Yes >Directory deleted< Deleted your vehicle. There are a few points to observe
to ensure that the system understands your
commands:
x Speak continuously and at normal volume,
avoiding unnatural emphasis and pauses
between words.
x Do not speak while the voice recognition
system is giving an output. The voice
system displays LISTENING on the E82207

message centre, and gives a beep when it To activate voice control:

is waiting for a voice command. x Briefly pull the control (the audio will
x It is possible that noise from inside or mute). A tone will be heard, and
outside the vehicle could affect LISTENING will be displayed on the main
commands. Keep the doors, windows, and message centre to indicate that the system
sunroof closed. Reducing Climate control is waiting for a voice command.
to a minimum while you are speaking will Note: It is only necessary to operate the control
also help. at the beginning of each voice session.
x If a command is not heard, or is
misunderstood, the voice system
responds with >Sorry<, >Command not
recognised< or >No speech detected<. If
this happens, repeat the command.

335 336
 Voice control Voice control
Defined voice commands Interrupting voice control Voice settings Voice language
The voice control system understands A command can be interrupted by saying the
predefined commands which need to be word Cancel or by pressing the control until the System Settings Voice Settings

quoted word for word. system responds by saying >Command

An audio guide of voice commands is available. cancelled<.
Screen Screen Audible Voice Add Voice
To activate the guide, pull the control briefly If you receive a telephone call (or Navigation Language Off Feedback
Settings Name Language
and give one of the following commands: route guidance instruction/TA announcement) Help

x Voice help - to list all commands. while conducting a dialogue, the dialogue is
System Voice System Screen Voice
interrupted. Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings
x Radio help - to list Radio commands.
x CD help - to list CD commands. Command not recognised
x Navigation help - to list Navigation If a command is not recognised, the system Voice Settings Voice Language

commands. Please refer to the Navigation responds with: UK English

Handbook for operating instructions. >Sorry<, >Command not recognised<. US English M
Voice Add
x Notepad Help - to list Notepad commands. Name
US English F
Help
Français
System Screen Voice
Settings Settings Settings Italiano

LAN1276 LAN1277

From the System Settings menu, touch the
Voice Settings icon.
Note: If required, on screen help can be
inittiated by touching the Help icon.
From the Voice Settings screen, touch the
Voice Language icon.
It should be noted that the Voice Language icon
is only available with the extended voice option
and not with basic voice.
Touch the up and down arrows to scroll
through the list of available languages.
Select the required language by touching the
relevant icon.

337 338
 Voice control Voice control
AUDIO UNIT COMMANDS Radio stations
Voice Language Frequencies are said as in the following
Starting a dialogue examples:
Italiano
Hold the control until the tone is heard. Any
Deutsch audio sources in the vehicle are muted.
Nederlands
Command System response Message centre display
Español “Radio play” >Radio play< RADIO PLAY
Svenska “Radio tune” <nametag> >Radio tune <nametag>< Radio Tune

Nametags Radio tune <nametag> is used to select a

Change Voice Language ?
UK English Español
OK Cancel
E91652
Touch the button icon next to the language you
wish to use. A pop-up menu will appear
indicating the current language, the new
language and the option to cancel or accept the
change.
Once your language choice has been made and
you have pressed the OK icon, the main
settings screen will be displayed.
Nametags are a unique name or phrase of your station that has been previously stored.
choice which can be used to recall a radio
station. The nametags used can be the station
name, or a completely separate name of your
choosing.
Once you have tuned to a radio station, it is
possible to store a name in a directory by using
the Radio store name command. The system
responds with >Name please<. You say the
name that you have chosen (e.g. Radio 1).
The system will read out a list of current
nametags when given the command Radio
directory.

339 340
 Voice control Voice control
Storing radio stations via voice command The command Radio store preset <say Tune/delete from the radio directory Tune
Once you have tuned to a radio station, it is number (1-9)> calls up the dialogue for storing The commands Radio play directory or Radio After a nametag has been read out by the
possible to store that station for future use as a a pre-set station. directory prompt the system to read aloud the system, give the command Tune and the radio
pre-set. The following commands apply to the The command Radio autostore enters the entire list of nametag entries in the radio tunes to the station saved under that nametag.
currently tuned station. autostore function for the selected frequency directory.
Delete
band (e.g. FM). The nametag list is read out in stored order,
After a nametag has been read out by the
and commands can be entered during the
Command System response Message centre display system, give the command Delete and the
system response.
nametag will be removed from the directory.
“Radio store preset” <preset >Radio store preset <preset STORE PRESET (1-9).
Replay After a nametag has been read out by the
number (1-9)> number (1-9)><
After a nametag has been read out by the system, give the command Cancel and the
1. “Radio store” name 2. >Radio store name, name RADIO STORE NAME, NAME system, give the command Replay and the current Voice session will end.
please< PLEASE nametag will be repeated.
3. “Name” >Name< STORED
Command System response Message centre display
“Radio autostore” >Radio autostore< RADIO AUTOSTORE
Radio play directory You can >Radio play directory< RADIO DIRECTORY Station
“Radio tune” <name> >Radio tune <name>< RADIO TUNE say “Replay”, “Tune”, “Delete” Reads out directory. frequency
or “Cancel” after each name.

341 342
 Voice control Voice control
Deleting the directory Selecting disc and track numbers
The command Radio delete directory deletes For CD player commands, say disc and track
all entries in the radio directory. numbers as in the following examples:
Command System response Message centre display x CD play disc one.
1. “Radio delete directory” 1. >Radio delete directory, 1. DELETE DIRECTORY SAY x CD play disc six track ten.
confirm yes or no< YES OR NO x CD play track twenty five.
2. “Yes” 1. >Are you sure that you want 2. SAY YES OR NO x CD play track forty seven.
to delete the whole directory?< Command System response Message centre display
3. “Yes” 1. >Directory deleted< 3. DIRECTORY DELETED “CD help” >List of CD commands< CD HELP
“CD play” >CD play< CD PLAY
“CD play disc” <say number >CD play disc <say number DISC <disc number (1-6)>
(1-6)> (1-6)><
“CD play next disc” >CD play next disc< NEXT DISC
“CD play previous disc” >CD play previous disc< PREVIOUS DISC
“CD play track” <say number >CD play track <say number TRACK <track number (1-99)>
(1-99)> (1-99)><
“CD play disc” <say number >CD play disc <say number DISC <disc number (1-6)>
(1-6)> track <say number (1-6) track <say number TRACK <track number (1-99)>
(1-99)> (1-99)><

343 344
 Voice control Television
Television

NOTEPAD COMMANDS Briefly pull the voice control (the audio will GENERAL INFORMATION
mute). A tone will be heard, and LISTENING
Using Notepad will be displayed on the main message centre. TELEVISION CONTROLS
Notepad allows you to record short messages A notepad command can now be given.
as memory aids or reminders.
1 2 3
You can record a maximum of 10 notes, each
with a maximum duration of 30 seconds.
TV
Command System response Action
“Record note” or “Notepad Notepad gives a beep to You may start your recording 1 2 3
record” indicate the start of recording. after the beep. To stop
recording, hold the voice 4 5 6
recognition control.
“Play notepad” or “Rear Notepad will recite each note in Saying Replay will replay the Touch image for full screen 7 8 9
notepad” turn. You can say Replay, previous message. Saying
TV
Delete or Cancel after each beep Delete will delete the previous 9 Auto Manual
or remain silent to hear the next message. Saying Cancel will
note. cancel the previous message.
TV
“Clear notepad” or “Notepad Do you want to clear the Say Yes to delete all stored
delete” notepad? notes. Say No to cancel the
command. 8 7 6 5 4
E92606
“Notepad help” The system will recite notepad
information and all the 1. Channel preset icons Analogue/Digital television
commonly used commands 2. Home menu icon To cope with changes in technology, the TV
3. Return icon tuner is able to receive both analogue and
digital TV signals.
4. Forwards/Next icon
In certain areas both analogue and digital
5. Manual tuning icon
signal strengths will vary. When in an area of
6. Backwards/Previous icon weak reception, you may experience a
7. Automatic tuning icon break-up in picture and sound quality or a
8. TV select icon blank screen and audio muting. It may be of
benefit to retune the viewed station and
9. TV country/format icon possibly switch between analogue and digital
Note: For occupant safety, when the vehicle is TV stations. The analogue and digital stations
in motion or the parking brake is released, the have been combined into a single list.
TV picture is not displayed (but the audio signal
can be heard).

345 346
 Television Television
USING THE TELEVISION Channel selection
TV
There are two methods of channel selection.
Selecting TV
1 2 3
Ch 61
4 5 6

Touch image for full screen 7 8 9

4:3
TV
Auto Manual
Zoom

TV 16:9

E92609

Touch the reduced TV image for full-screen

display.
E92611
E92607
Ch 61
Once channels are stored, touch the full size TV
Press the Driver information hardkey on the
image to access the icons and press the
screen surround. 4:3
appropriate Forwards/Next or Backwards/
Home Menu Zoom Previous icon to select the desired channel.

16:9 TV
Navigation Settings
1 2 3

4 5 6
E92610
4x4 Info TV
Touch image for full screen 7 8 9
The full-screen TV display is accompanied by
TV
Auto Manual
icons, allowing the user to change channel and
E92608 adjust the picture format. After five seconds, TV
the icons will disappear from the display. They
From the next screen, select TV by pressing the E92612
can be made to reappear by touching the
TV or TV-DVD icon. screen again. Alternatively, from the TV menu, press the
The TV menu and a reduced TV image will be Press the return icon in the top right-hand appropriate channel preset icon (numbered
displayed. corner of the display to return to the TV menu. 1-9).
Note: If no reduced TV image is visible, this
may be due to the vehicle having moved since
the stations were stored or that no stations are
stored or that the vehicle is in a poor reception
area. Whichever the case, tuning/retuning the
stations will be necessary. See Automatic
station search and store, below.

347 348
 Television Television
Automatic station search and store Selecting an automatically stored station Manual station search and store Selecting a manually stored station
Up to 99 analogue or digital TV stations can be Up to nine TV stations can be stored manually
TV
registered automatically in the Auto list. TV
as presets.
1 2 3
Ch 4 Ch 23
TV 4 5 6
TV
Ch 26 Ch 29
Touch image for full screen 7 8 9
1 2 3 1 2 3
Touch image for full screen Ch 33 Ch 37
TV
4 5 6 Auto Manual
4 5 6
TV
Auto

Touch image for full screen 7 8 9 Touch image for full screen 7 8 9 TV
TV
TV TV
Auto Manual Auto Manual E92616

TV TV To select a stored station subsequently, press

TV
the required station preset icon.
Ch 4 Ch 23
TV TV
Ch 26 Ch 29
Ch 4 Ch 23 1 2 3
Touch image for full screen Ch 33 Ch 37
Ch 26 Ch 29 4 5 6
TV
Auto

Touch image for full screen Ch 33 Ch 37 Touch image for full screen 7 8 9
TV
TV TV
Auto Auto Manual

TV
E92613
Press the Auto icon to display the list of
available stations.
Received stations are stored automatically and
each assigned to a channel preset icon.
The stored stations are listed by name, in
ascending alphanumeric order.
E92614
If there are more than six stored stations, the
continuation of the channel list can be
accessed by pressing the right arrow icon (left
arrow icon for the previous list).
Once the desired channel name or number is
visible, press the appropriate station preset
icon.
To access the manual station menu, press the
Auto icon.
TV
E92615
1. Press the Manual icon to initiate the
manual station search and store mode.
2. To search manually for a station, press the
right or left arrow icon.
3. To assign and store the received station,
press and hold one of the station preset
icons, until a confirmation tone is heard.
The station is now stored.

349 350
 Television Television
TELEVISION SETUP Selecting TV country/format Not all countries use the same TV format.
However, you can adapt your unit to accept the
Adjusting picture format TV format of the country in which you are driving
Ch 61 3
(PAL, SECAM, NTSC).
1 2
Note: During normal operation, the user
4 5 6
should not need to adjust the format. Selection
4:3
Touch image for full screen 7 8 9 of the correct country of operation is sufficient.
Zoom TV
Auto Manual To switch to the TV Format menu, press the
16:9
Format icon.
TV

E92618
TV Format
Press the TV Country/Format icon to enter the
Ch 61 PAL B
format menu.
PAL D

4:3 Country PAL I

TV Country
Zoom PAL M
United Kingdom

16:9 PAL N
United States

Format Uruguay

Uzbekistan
TV Format
Ch 61
Vanuatu
PAL B/G

4:3 PAL B/H

Zoom Country PAL D/K

TV Country
SECAM B/G
16:9
France
SECAM E/L
Gabon
E92620
Format Gambia
E92617
Georgia Scroll up or down using either arrow icon and
To adjust the viewable picture format, press the press the relevant TV format icon for your
Germany
appropriate icon, 4:3, Zoom or 16:9, for a reception area.
proportional enlargement. E92619
To switch to the TV Country menu, press the
To select the country in which you are driving, Country icon.
scroll up or down using either arrow icon and
press the relevant country icon.

351 352
 Index
A Audio unit overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ABS driving hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Adaptive front lighting system (AFS). . . . . 89
Cornering lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
The AFS advantage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Adjusting the headlamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Headlamp beam adjustment - Xenon . . 88
Adjusting the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Adjusting the suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Access height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Access height from off-road height . . 178
Additional lift whilst in extended
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Automatic height change warnings. . . 179
Crawl mode (locked at Access height) 178
Door open override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Extended mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Suspension freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Suspension height indicators . . . . . . . 177
Adjusting the windscreen washer jets . . . 106
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
AFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Air suspension
Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Air suspension messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Intake air. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Third row seats vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Airbag service information . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Airbag warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Alarm
Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Arming the alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Anti-theft alarm indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Interior space protection. . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Partial arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Perimetric alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Audio control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Audio unit commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Starting a dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
353
286
Premium audio unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Standard audio unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Automatic climate control. . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
General notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Operation of controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
CommandShift™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Electronically selected automatic
modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Kick-down in automatic mode . . . . . . . 143
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Autostore control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Auxiliary heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket . . . . . . . . 312
Auxiliary mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Auxiliary power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Front auxiliary power socket . . . . . . . . 133
Rear auxiliary power sockets . . . . . . . . 133
B Rear lamp bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Balance/fade control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Balance adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Fader adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Bass/treble control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Bass response adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 291
Logic 7 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Resetting tone values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Source tone memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Subwoofer settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Treble response adjustment. . . . . . . . . 291
Battery care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Check and replenish battery electrolyte 221
Battery charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Battery warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Bluetooth setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Bluetooth operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Bonnet lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Booster cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Booster cushions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Brake fluid check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Checking the fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Topping up the fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Index
Brakes
Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Bulb changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Bulb specification chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
C Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Catalytic converter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Centre console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Card holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
CD storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Bulb access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Cornering bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Courtesy lamp bulb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Front fog lamp bulb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Front indicator lamp bulb . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Front side lamp bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Headlamp bulb (Halogen) . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Headlamp bulb (Xenon) . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Licence plate lamp bulb . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Map lamp bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Side repeater lamp bulb . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Stepwell lamp bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Tailgate lamp bulb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Vanity mirror lamp bulb . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Changing a fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Changing a road wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Raising the vehicle (Air suspension) . . 232
Raising the vehicle (Coil suspension) . 235
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Stowing the changed wheel . . . . . . . . 240
Using wheel chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Wheel changing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Changing the vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . 224
Battery disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Changing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Charging the vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . 223
Battery warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . 224
Effects of battery disconnection . . . . . 225
Checking the wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . 106
354
Child safety locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Child seat positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
ISOFIX child seat positions. . . . . . . . . . . 78
Recommended ISOFIX child seats . . . . . 78
Child restraint checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Seat belt automatic locking mechanism . 76
Cigar lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Cleaning the alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Cleaning the exterior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Cleaning after off-road driving . . . . . . . 204
Glass and mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Removing tar spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Underbody maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Airbag module covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Carpet and fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Instrument pack, clock and audio unit . 205
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Plastic and cloth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Setting the time - premium audio
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Setting the time - standard audio
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Coded keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Compact disc function menu . . . . . . . . . . 307
Compact disc pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Compact disc playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Compact disc selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Compact disc track scanning . . . . . . . . . . 308
Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Coolant check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 163
Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
D
Detachable tow ball. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Fitting the tow ball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Removing the tow ball . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) . . . . . . . . . . 141
 Index
Direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Disabling the passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . 71
Airbag switched OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Airbag switched ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Passenger airbag status indicator. . . . . 72
Driving after a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Before starting or driving . . . . . . . . . . 262
Resetting the fuel cut-off . . . . . . . . . . 262
When driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
E F
Economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Driving tips for fuel economy . . . . . . . 162
Maintenance and fuel economy . . . . . 162
Ejecting compact discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Ejecting multiple compact discs . . . . . . . 303
Electric exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Folding the mirror body . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Mirror glass adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Reverse mirror dipping. . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Electric parking brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . 153
Applying the electric parking brake. . . 153
Dynamic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Releasing the electric parking brake . . 154
Electric seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Folding armrest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Lumbar support adjustment . . . . . . . . . 55
Electric sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Anti-trap mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Sunroof calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Anti-trap mechanism
(front windows only) . . . . . . . . . . . 108
One touch operation
(front windows only) . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Operating the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Rear window isolation switch . . . . . . . 109
Rear window operation. . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . 210
Engine coolant check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . 213
Topping up the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Engine immobiliser
Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
355
Engine oil check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Engine oil specification . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Topping up the oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
EPB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Essential towing checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Event data recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Proximity mirror (Japan only) . . . . . . . 109
Fast forward/reverse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Fastening the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Releasing the belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Filling station information
Engine coolant specification. . . . . . . . . . 36
Fuel filler flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Refuelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Front fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Fuel burning heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Fuel consumption figures. . . . . . . . . . . 189
Fuel cut-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Resetting the fuel cut-off system . . . . . 188
Fuel filler flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Fuel quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Alternative fuels for petrol engines. . . . 184
Diesel engined vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Petrol engined vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Fuse box locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Engine compartment fuse box . . . . . . . 253
Passenger compartment fuse box . . . . 254
Tow hitch fuse box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Fuse specification chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Engine compartment fuse box . . . . . . . 256
Passenger compartment fuse box . . . . 258
Tow hitch fuse box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
G Warnings messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Index
General driving points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Interior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Breakdown safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Front interior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Extreme driving conditions . . . . . . . . . 160 Instrument pack illumination . . . . . . . . . 92
Vehicle stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Rear interior lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Wading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Interior mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Warning indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Automatic dimming mirror. . . . . . . . . . 112
General information on radio frequencies . 44 Manual mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
H ISOFIX anchor points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Hazard warning flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Tether strap anchorages (Australia only) 80
HDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 J
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 K
Rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Headlamp adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Keys and remote controls
Headlamp levelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Headlamp washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
L
Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Lashing points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Levelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Heated windows and mirrors. . . . . . . . . . 126
Lighting
Exterior mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Hill descent control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Hill descent control (HDC)
Automatic control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Headlamp courtesy delay . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Hints on driving with ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
High beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
ABS and off-road driving. . . . . . . . . . . 152
Low beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
ABS warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Side lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Cornering Brake Control (CBC) . . . . . . 153
Load carrying
Electronic Brake Distribution (EBD) . . 153
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Emergency Brake Assist (EBA) . . . . . . 153
Loading compact discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Inserting a disc - Standard audio . . . . . 301
I Inserting a single disc - Premium
Information messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Critical warning messages . . . . . . . . . 117 Inserting multiple discs . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Gear selector display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Information messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Service interval indicator. . . . . . . . . . . 118
117
Inspecting safety system components . . 263
Instrument lighting dimmer. . . . . . . . . . . 129
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . 113
356

Locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Automatic re-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Automatic unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Door open warning indicator . . . . . . . . 47
Interior door handles and door locking
levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Locking with the remote control . . . . . . 45
Master lock and unlock switches . . . . . 46
Opening the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Partial locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Speed-related locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Superlocking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Luggage anchor points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Luggage covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Operating the luggage cover . . . . . . . . 191
Removal and refitting of luggage
cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
M Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Maintenance
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Manual climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Operation of controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Manual seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Manual transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Memory function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Lazy entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Recalling a stored seat position . . . . . 138
Setting a memory pre-set . . . . . . . . . . 138
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
MP3 file playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
N Manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
News broadcasts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting news information . . . . . . . .
Notepad commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Notepad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O
Oil check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On/off control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening and closing the bonnet . . . . . . .
Closing the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index
P Q
Panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Principle of operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Personalised settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Phone book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Power steering fluid check . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Checking the fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Topping up the fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Principle of operation
Access height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Battery-backed sounder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Crawl mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Extended mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Foot brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
High speed height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Off-road height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Remote control battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Suspension warning indicator . . . . . . . 177
Vehicle security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Priority programme type (PTY) . . . . . . . . 298
PTY programme type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
PTY search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Programming the remote control . . . . . . . . 42
Air suspension control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Headlamp courtesy delay . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Single-point entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
297
297
345
345
212
288
209
209
209
357
Index
Quick start
Air distribution control (Automatic
system only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Air distribution control (Manual
system only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Air recirculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Air suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Audio systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
AUTO mode (Automatic system only) . . 18
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Blower speed (Automatic system only). 18
Blower speed (Manual system only) . . . 19
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
CD operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
CommandShift ™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Defrost mode (Automatic system only) 18
Direction indicators and Headlamp high
beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Door mirror adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Driving position memory (when fitted) . 12
Economy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Electric Parking Brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . 26
Exterior lamps master switch . . . . . . . . 25
Facia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Heated windscreen and rear window . . 19
Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . . . . . . . . 28
Instrument pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
OFF (Automatic system only) . . . . . . . . 18
Overhead console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . 16
Power fold mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Power operated seat adjustment. . . . . . 11
Rear environment (when fitted) . . . . . . 19
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Reverse automatic mirror dip . . . . . . . . 13
Seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . 16
Seat heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Steering column adjustment . . . . . . . . . 14
Steering column levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
358
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Telephone - Bluetooth system . . . . . . . . 33
Temperature selection (Automatic
system only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Temperature selection (Manual
system only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Terrain response system . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Transfer gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Warning indicators (attention) . . . . . . . . 23
Warning indicators (information) . . . . . . 24
Windows and door mirrors . . . . . . . . . . 13
R
Radio data system (RDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Radio reception. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Rain sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Rain sensor variable delay . . . . . . . . . . 104
Rear fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Rear loadspace hatches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Rear passenger climate controls. . . . . . . . 126
Rear seat controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Rear seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Second row seats - 7-seat vehicle . . . . . 58
Second-row seats - 5-seat vehicle . . . . . 57
Third-row seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Rear window wiper and washers . . . . . . . 105
Reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Tailgate open disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Wiper - continuous operation. . . . . . . . 105
Wiper - intermittent operation . . . . . . . 105
Recommended towing weights. . . . . . . . . 199
Towing weights - Australia only . . . . . . 199
Reduced engine performance . . . . . . . . . . 162
Check engine - petrol models only . . . . 162
Engine Management System (EMS)
fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Refitting the vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Remote control programming . . . . . . . . . . 42
Removing a headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Refitting the grille. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Refitting the headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Removing the grille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Removing the headlamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
 Index
Removing a rear lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Repairing minor paint damage . . . . . . . . 206
Repeat compact disc tracks . . . . . . . . . . 308
Running out of fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
S Dimensions - Models with coil spring
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Safety precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Seat belt height adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Seat belt reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Seat belts
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Setting the clock and date on the
audio unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Shuffle/random . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Sitting in the correct position . . . . . . . . . . 52
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Starter switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Warming-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Station preset buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Steering wheel lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Sun blinds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Supplementary restraints system
Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Switching off the alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
359
T Tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical specifications
Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Dimensions - Air suspension vehicles . 271
suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Lubricants and fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
V6 Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
V6 Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
V8 Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Telephone controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Phone display - Facia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Telephone controls - Facia . . . . . . . . . . 316
Telephone controls - Steering wheel . . 317
Telephone setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Selecting telephone mode . . . . . . . . . . 319
Turning the phone on/off . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Using display menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Telephone voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Correcting/Deleting and Cancelling
inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Deleting/Clearing the entire phone
book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Dialling a phone number . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Dialling/Editing and Deleting from the
phone book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
General commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Storing a telephone name/number. . . . 332
Telephone voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Using the voice control phone book. . . 333
Television
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Television controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Television setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Adjusting picture format . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Selecting TV country/format . . . . . . . . 351
Terrain response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Principle of operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Tilt sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Index
227 Tyre glossary
5-seat vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Terms used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
7-seat vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . 247
Tow ball stowage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 TPM system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Fixed - tow ball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 U
Multi-height drop plate - tow bar . . . . 196 Under bonnet covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Trailer socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Towing points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Front towing point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Using booster cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Rear towing point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Boosting from another vehicle . . . . . . . 222
Towing the vehicle on four wheels . . . . . 267 Boosting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
After towing on four wheels . . . . . . . . 267 Using cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Track selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Increasing cruising speed . . . . . . . . . . 164
Traction control Reducing cruising speed . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Suspending cruise control . . . . . . . . . . 164
Traffic information control. . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Using HDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Transfer gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Hill Descent Control (HDC) faults . . . . . 168
HIGH range (Hi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Hill Descent Control in action . . . . . . . . 168
LOW range (Lo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Using seat belts during pregnancy . . . . . . . 67
Range changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Using snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Range changing on the move . . . . . . . 147 Using stability control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Stationary range changing . . . . . . . . . 147 Deactivating DSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Transmission warning indicators and Reactivating DSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Using terrain response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Transporting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Driver override options. . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Type approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Grass-Gravel-Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Type approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Inappropriate program selection . . . . . 172
Tyre care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Increased suspension height . . . . . . . . 172
Age degradation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Checking tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Mud-Ruts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Directional tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Rock Crawl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
flat spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Sand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
High performance wheel and tyre Wading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Using the key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
long term storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Emergency locking and unlocking . . . . . 44
Pressure compensation for ambient Using the parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
temperature changes . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Front parking aid - manual operation . . 159
punctured tyres. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 System fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Replacement tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
wear indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
360
 Index
Using the telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Answering/Rejecting calls. . . . . . . . . . 323
Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Scratchpad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Using the call register . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Using the television. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Automatic station search and store . . 349
Channel selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Manual station search and store. . . . . 350
Selecting TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Using voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Defined voice commands . . . . . . . . . . 337
Voice language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Voice settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Using winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
V
Vehicle build plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Vehicle identification number (VIN). . . . . 268
Vents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
VIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Activating the voice control system . . . 84
Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Volume control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Automatic Volume control (AVC) . . . . 289
Information volume offset . . . . . . . . . 289
Navigation volume offset . . . . . . . . . . 290
Phone volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Reset volume settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Voice volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
W
Washer fluid check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Waveband button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Wheels and tyres
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Windscreen washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Intermittent variable delay . . . . . . . . . 103
Speed dependent intermittent mode . . 104
Speed dependent mode . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Winter tyres. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

361